Kia, THE COMPANY Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle. As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out.
This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle. Drive safely and enjoy your Kia! Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle. The information and specifications provided in this manual When you require service, remember that your dealer knows were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, discontinue or change specifications or design at any time recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts and without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you is dedicated to your complete satisfaction. have questions, always check with your Kia Dealer. Because subsequent owners require this important information We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle. sold. This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte- nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup- plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle. We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation © 2013 Kia Canada Inc. of your new vehicle. All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any for its various models. information storage and retrieval system or translation in Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along with whole or part is not permitted without written authorization the various illustrations, may not all be applicable to your par- from Kia Canada Inc.. ticular vehicle. Printed in Korea
i Introduction 1
Your vehicle at a glance 2
Features of your vehicle 3
Driving your vehicle 4 table of contents What to do in an emergency 5
Maintenance 6
Specifications 7 Index I
ii Introduction 1
How to use this manual / 1-2 Fuel requirements / 1-2 Vehicle break-in process / 1-3 Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL FUEL REQUIREMENTS We want to help you get the greatest You’ll find various WARNING’s, Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use possible driving pleasure from your vehi- CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manu- only unleaded fuel with a minimum cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you al. These were prepared to enhance your Octane Rating of 87 Anti-Knock Index in many ways. We strongly recommend personal safety.You should carefully read (AKI). that you read the entire manual. In order and follow ALL procedures and recom- to minimize the chance of death or injury, mendations provided in these you must read the WARNING and CAU- WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s. CAUTION TION sections spread throughout the NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is detrimental to manual. WARNING Illustrations complement the words in this the catalytic converter and will manual to best explain how to enjoy your A WARNING indicates a situation in damage the engine control sys- vehicle. By reading your manual, you which harm, serious bodily injury or tem’s oxygen sensor and affect learn about features, important safety death could result if the warning is emission control. information, and driving tips under vari- ignored. Never add any fuel system cleaning ous road conditions. agents to the fuel tank other than The general layout of the manual is pro- what Kia has specified. (Consult an vided in the Table of Contents. A good CAUTION Authorized Kia Dealer for details.) place to start is the index; it has an alpha- A CAUTION indicates a situation in betical listing of all information in your which damage to your vehicle could manual. result if the caution is ignored. Sections: This manual has seven sec- tions plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell ✽ NOTICE at a glance if that section has the infor- A NOTICE indicates interesting or help- mation you want. ful information is being provided.
21 Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS Gasoline containing alcohol and Fuel Additives No special break-in period is needed. By methanol Kia recommends that you use good qual- following a few simple precautions for the Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ity gasolines treated with detergent addi- first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), tives such as TOP TIER Detergent the performance, economy and life of and gasoline or gasohol containing Gasoline, which help prevent deposit for- your vehicle. methanol (also known as wood alcohol) mation in the engine. These gasolines • Do not race the engine. are being marketed along with or instead will help the engine run cleaner and • Do not maintain a single speed for long of leaded or unleaded gasoline. Pursuant enhance performance of the Emission periods of time, either fast or slow. to EPA regulations, ethanol may be used Control System. For more information on Varying engine speed is needed to in your vehicle. Do not use gasohol con- TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please properly break-in the engine. taining more than 10% ethanol, and do go to the website (www.toptiergas.com). • Avoid hard stops, except in emergen- not use gasoline or gasohol containing For customers who do not use TOP Tier cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop- any methanol. Ethanol provides less Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have erly. energy than gasoline and it attracts • Avoid full-throttle starts. water, and it is thus likely to reduce your problems starting or the engine does not fuel efficiency and could lower your MPG run smoothly, additives that you can buy results. Methanol may cause drivability separately may be added to the gasoline. problems and damage to the fuel sys- If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not tem. Discontinue using gasohol of any available, one bottle of additive added to kind if drivability problems occur. Vehicle the fuel tank at every 12,000 km or every damage or drivability problems may not engine oil change is recommended. be covered by the manufacturer's war- Additives are available from your author- ranty if they result from the use of: ized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other addi- 1. Gasoline or gasohol containing tives. methanol. 2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
CAUTION Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs dri- vability.
13 Your vehicle at a glance 2
Interior overview / 2-2 Instrument panel overview / 2-3 Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ...... 3-13 2. Driver position memory system*...... 3-59 3. Seat adjust knob*...... 3-40 4. Outside rearview mirror control switch ...... 3-109 5. Power rear quarter window switches*...... 3-26 6. Power window switches ...... 3-26 7. Central door lock switch...... 3-13 8. Power window lock switch...... 3-28 9. Fuel filler lid release button...... 3-30 10. Instrument panel illumination* ...... 3-120 11. Room light main control switch.....3-133 12. Power adjustable pedal control switch*...... 3-61 13. Steering wheel tilt ...... 3-107 14. Parking brake release lever*...... 4-16 15. Fuse box ...... 6-23 16. Hood release lever ...... 3-29 17. Parking brake pedal...... 4-16 18. Brake pedal...... 4-14 19. Accelerator pedal 20. Seat...... 3-37 * : if equipped
OVQ020001N
22 Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Driver’s airbag ...... 3-93 2. Light control / Turn signals...... 3-137, 3-139 3. Instrument cluster...... 3-116 4. Wiper/Washer...... 3-141 5. Auto cruise control* ...... 4-11 6. Audio controls* ...... 3-197 7. Steering wheel ...... 3-106 8. Ignition switch...... 4-3 9. Digital clock ...... 3-193 10. Climate control system* ..3-147, 3-159 11. Hazard warning flasher switch ...3-146 12. Seat warmer* ...... 3-45 13. Shift lever ...... 4-5 14. Cigar lighter or Power outlet* .....3-189 15. Power outlet...... 3-193 16. Ashtray*...... 3-189 17. Passenger’s airbag...... 3-94 18. Vent controls ...... 3-151, 3-166 19. Glove box ...... 3-187 20. Sunglass holder* ...... 3-187 21. Sunvisor ...... 3-192 22. Power sliding door and power tailgate controls*...... 3-17 23. Sunroof* ...... 3-33 24. Conversation mirror...... 3-115 25. Trip computer* ...... 3-121 26. Day/night rearview mirror ...... 3-110 * : if equipped OVQ029002N
23 Keys / 3-3 Remote keyless entry / 3-4 Theft-alarm system / 3-7 Immobilizer system / 3-9 Door locks / 3-11 Power sliding door and power tailgate / 3-17 Window / 3-26 Features of your vehicle 3
Hood / 3-29 Fuel filler lid / 3-30 Sunroof / 3-33 Seat / 3-37 Driver position memory system / 3-59 Power adjustable pedals / 3-61 Safety belts / 3-62 Child restraint system / 3-76 Air bags-advanced restraint system / 3-83 Steering wheel / 3-106 Mirrors / 3-108 Instrument cluster / 3-116 Gauges / 3-117 Trip computer / 3-121 Warnings and indicators / 3-127 Interior lights / 3-133 Lighting / 3-137 Wipers and washers / 3-141 Horn / 3-145 Defroster / 3-145 Hazard warning flasher / 3-146 Manual climate control system / 3-147 3 Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system / 3-159 Windshield defrosting and defogging / 3-173 Cluster ionizer / 3-176 Luggage net holder / 3-176 Roof rack / 3-177 Homelink® wireless control system / 3-178 Homelink® Wireless control system with rearview display / 3-182 Storage compartment / 3-186 Interior features / 3-189 Antenna / 3-195 Steering wheel mounted controls / 3-196 Audio system / 3-197 Sirius satellite radio information / 3-215 Rear seat entertainment system / 3-231 Features of your vehicle
KEYS Key operations Master key WARNING Used to start the engine, lock and unlock Use only Kia original parts for the the doors, lock and unlock the glove box ignition key in your vehicle. If an and center console storage (if equipped). aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter WARNING - Ignition key will continue to operate causing Leaving children unattended in a damage to the starter motor and vehicle with the ignition key is dan- possible fire due to excessive cur- gerous even if the key is not in the rent in the wiring. ignition. Children copy adults and 1VQA2001 they could place the key in the igni- The key code number is stamped on the tion. The ignition key would enable plate attached to the key set. Should you children to operate power windows lose your keys, this number will enable or other controls, or even make the an authorized Kia Dealer to duplicate the vehicle move, which could result in keys easily. Remove the plate and store it serious bodily injury or even death. in a safe place. Also, record the code Never leave the keys in your vehicle number and keep it in a safe and handy with unsupervised children. place, but not in the vehicle.
33 Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED) Type A (1) Lock ( ) After depressing this button, the All doors are locked if the lock button doors will be locked automatically is pressed. unless you open any door within 30 seconds. If all doors are closed, the hazard warning lights blink once to indicate that all doors are locked. However, if (3) Power tailgate opening or closing any door remains open, the hazard ( , if equipped) warning lights are not operated. After The tailgate is opened or closed this, if all door are closed, the hazard automatically if the button is pressed 1VQA2002B warning lights blink. and held. Type B If the lock button is pressed once The hazard warning lights will blink more whithin 4 seconds after locking and the chime will sound 3 times to all door by pressing the lock button, indicate that the tailgate will swing the hazard warning lights and horn upward or downward. will operate once to indicate that all doors are locked. (4) Left power sliding door opening or closing ( if equipped) (2) Unlock ( ) , Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock The left sliding door is opened or 1VQA2002A button is pressed once. closed automatically if the button is Type C pressed and held. The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the driver's door is unlocked. (5) Right power sliding door opening or All doors are unlocked if the unlock closing ( , if equipped) button is pressed twice within 3 sec- The right sliding door is opened or onds. closed automatically if the button is The hazard warning lights will blink pressed and held. twice again to indicate that all doors 1VQA2002 are unlocked.
43 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE The power sliding door and power tail- The transmitter will not work if any of CAUTION gate are not opened by pressing the cor- following occur: Keep the transmitter away from responding button on the transmitter • The ignition key is in ignition switch. water or any liquid. If the keyless directly when all power sliding doors • You exceed the operating distance entry system is inoperative due to and power tailgate are locked and limit (about 30 m [90 feet]). exposure to water or liquids, it will closed. To open the power sliding door not be covered by your manufactur- • The battery in the transmitter is er vehicle warranty. or power tailgate from outside vehicle, weak. press the unlock button twice within 3 • Other vehicles or objects may be seconds first and press corresponding blocking the signal. Operational distance may vary depend- power sliding door or power tailgate • The weather is extremely cold. ing upon the area the transmitter is used opening button. • The transmitter is close to a radio in. For example, if the vehicle is parked transmitter such as a radio station or near police stations, government and an airport which can interfere with public offices, broadcasting stations, mil- CAUTION normal operation of the transmitter. itary installations, airports, or transmit- The power doors can be operated When the transmitter does not work ting towers, etc. when the engine is not running. correctly, open and close the door with This device complies with Industry However, the power doors consume the ignition key. If you have a problem large amounts of vehicle electric Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation with the transmitter, contact an autho- is subject to the following two conditions: power. To prevent the battery from rized Kia Dealer. being discharged, do not operate 1. This device may not cause interfer- • If the transmitter is in close proximity ence, and them consecutively (more than to your cell phone or smart phone, the approximately 10 times). 2. This device must accept any interfer- signal from the transmitter could be ence, including interference that may blocked by normal operation of your cause undesired operation of the cell phone or smart phone. This is device. (6) Alarm ( ) especially important when the phone The horn sounds and hazard warning is active such as making call, receiving lights flash for about 27 seconds if calls, text messaging, and/or send- WARNING this button is pressed and held. To ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing the Changes or modifications not stop the horn and lights, press any transmitter and your cell phone or expressly approved by the party button on the transmitter. responsible for compliance could smart phone in the same pants or void the user's authority to operate jacket pocket and maintain adequate the equipment. distance between the two devices. 35 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE The keyless entry system transmitter is CAUTION designed to give you years of trouble- An inappropriately dis- free use, however it can malfunction if posed battery can be harm- exposed to moisture or static electricity. ful to the environment and If you are unsure how to use your trans- human health. mitter or replace the battery, contact an Dispose the battery according to authorized Kia dealer. your local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION IC WARNING • Using the wrong battery can 1VQA2003 cause the transmitter to malfunc- This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan- Battery replacement tion. Be sure to use the correct battery. dard(s). Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery • To avoid damaging the transmit- Operation is subject to the follow- which will normally last for several years. ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or ing two conditions: (1) this device When replacement is necessary, use the expose it to heat or sunlight. may not cause interference, and (2) following procedure. this device must accept any inter- 1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen- ference, including interference that tly pry open the transmitter center may cause undesired operation of cover (1). the device. 2. Replace the battery with a new one. When replacing the battery, make sure the battery is positioned properly. 3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an Authorized Kia Dealer for reprogram- ming.
63 Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Armed stage • If any door, tailgate or engine hood Park the car and stop the engine. Arm remains open, the system will not the system as described below. be armed. If this happens, re-arm Armed the system as described previous. stage 1. Remove the ignition key from the igni- tion switch. • Do not arm the system until all pas- sengers have left the vehicle. If the 2. Make sure that all doors, the engine system is armed while a passen- hood and tailgate are closed and ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the latched. Disarmed Theft-alarm alarm may be activated when the stage stage 3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of remaining passenger(s) leave the the keyless entry system. vehicle. If any door, tailgate or After completion of the steps above, the engine hood is opened within 30 hazard warning lights will blink once to seconds after entering the armed indicate that the system is armed. This system is designed to provide pro- stage, the system is disarmed to tection from unauthorized entry into the prevent unnecessary alarm. car. This system is operated in three If any door, tailgate or engine hood stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the remains open, the hazard warning lights second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and won’t operate and theft-alarm will not the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig- arm. After this, if all doors, tailgate and gered, the system provides an audible engine hood are closed, the hazard alarm with blinking of the hazard warning warning lights blink once. lights. The system can be armed by locking the doors with the key from the front doors or tailgate. However, the hazard warning lights are not operated.
37 Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage Disarmed stage CAUTION The alarm will be activated if any of the The system will be disarmed when the following occurs while the system is doors are unlocked by depressing the Do not change, alter or adjust the armed. unlock button on the transmitter or theft-alarm system because it could unlocked with the ignition key. cause the theft-alarm system to • A front or rear door is opened without malfunction and should only be using the ignition key or transmitter. After depressing unlock button, the haz- serviced by an authorized Kia deal- • The tailgate is opened without using ard warning lights will blink twice to indi- er. cate that the system is disarmed. the ignition key or transmitter. Malfunctions caused by improper • The engine hood is opened. After depressing unlock button, if any alterations, adjustments or modifi- The siren will sound and the hazard door is not opened within 30 seconds, cations to the theft-alarm system warning lights will blink continuously for the system will be rearmed. are not covered by your vehicle 27 seconds, and repeat the alarm 3 If the system is not disarmed with the manufacturer warranty. times unless the system is disarmed. To ignition key or transmitter, insert the key turn off the system, unlock the doors with in the ignition switch, turn the key to the the ignition key or transmitter. ON position and wait for 30 seconds. Then the system will be disarmed. ✽ NOTICE Avoid trying to start the engine while the alarm is activated. The vehicle start- ing motor is disabled during the theft- alarm stage.
83 Features of your vehicle
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle is equipped with an elec- To activate the immobilizer sys- tronic engine immobilizer system to tem: CAUTION Do not put metal accessories near reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. the key or ignition switch. use. The immobilizer system activates auto- Your immobilizer system is comprised of matically. Without a valid ignition key for The engine may not start for the a small transponder in the ignition key, your vehicle, the engine will not start. metal accessories may interrupt the and antenna coil in the key cylinder and transponder signal from normally Immobilizer Control Unit (or Smartra transmitting. Unit). WARNING With this system, whenever you insert In order to prevent theft of your your ignition key into the ignition switch vehicle, do not leave spare keys Limp home (override) procedure and turn it to ON, the antenna coil in the anywhere in your vehicle. Your When you turn the ignition key to the ON ignition switch receives a signal from the Immobilizer password is a cus- position, if the IMMO indicator goes off transponder in the ignition key and then tomer unique password and should after blinking 5 times, your transponder sends the signal to the ECU (Engine be kept confidential. Do not leave equipped in the ignition key is out of order. Control Unit). this number anywhere in your vehi- You cannot start the engine without the The ECU checks the signal whether the cle. lime home procedure. To start the engine, ignition key is valid. you have to input your password by using If the key is determined to be valid, the the ignition switch. engine will start. ✽ NOTICE The following procedure is how to input If the key is determined to be invalid, the When starting the engine, do not use the your password of “2345” as an example. engine will not start. key with other immobilizer keys around. 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. Otherwise the engine may not start or The IMMO indicator ( ) will blink 5 may stop soon after it starts. Keep each times and go off indicating the begin- To deactivate the immobilizer ning of the limp home procedure. system: key separately not to have any malfunc- tion after you receive your new vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC posi- Insert the ignition key into the key cylin- tion. der and turn it to the ON position. ✽ NOTICE If you need additional keys or lose your keys, consult your authorized Kia dealer.
39 Features of your vehicle
3. To enter the first digit (in this example This device complies with Industry “2”), turn the ignition key to the ON and CAUTION Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation ACC position twice. Perform the same The transponder in your ignition is subject to the following two conditions: procedure for the next digits between 3 key is an important part of the 1. This device may not cause interfer- seconds and 10 seconds (for example, immobilizer system. It is designed ence, and for “3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC 3 to give years of trouble-free service, 2. This device must accept any interfer- times). however you should avoid expo- ence, including interference that may 4. If all of the digits have been input suc- sure to moisture, static electricity cause undesired operation of the cessfully, you have to start the engine and rough handling. Immobilizer device. within 30 seconds. If you attempt to system malfunction could occur. start the engine after 30 seconds, the engine will not start and you will have WARNING to input your password again. CAUTION Changes or modifications not After performing the limp home proce- Do not change, alter or adjust the expressly approved by the party dure, you have to see an authorized Kia immobilizer system because it responsible for compliance could dealer immediately to inspect and repair could cause the immobilizer sys- void the user's authority to operate your ignition key or immobilizer system. tem to malfunction and should only the equipment. be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifi- cations to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.
3 10 Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS Front doors • When closing the door, push the door Rear sliding doors by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.
✽ NOTICE In cold and wet climates, door lock and Unlock door mechanisms may not work proper- Lock ly due to freezing conditions.
WARNING • If you don't close the door 1VQA2004 securely, the door may open 1VQA2005 Operating door locks from out- again. • Once the doors are unlocked, it may be side the vehicle • Be careful that someone's body opened by pulling the door handle and • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to and hands are not trapped when sliding the door towards the rear of the unlock and toward front of vehicle to closing the door. vehicle. lock. • Turn the key toward front of vehicle to WARNING lock all doors. When the rear sliding door is not • Turn the key to the right once to unlock fully open, it is not latched and may the driver’s door and to the right twice move unintentionally. This could within 3 seconds to unlock all doors. result in a serious injury. • Turn the key to the left once to unlock the passenger’s door and to the left twice within 3 seconds to unlock all doors. (if equipped) • Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter key (if equipped). • Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.
311 Features of your vehicle
Rear sliding doors Front door WARNING Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.
Pull ✽ NOTICE Slide If the door is locked/unlocked multiple OVQ036001N times in rapid succession with either the Rear door vehicle key or door lock switch, the sys- OVQ047205 tem may stop operating temporarily in • When the door is fully open, the door order to protect the circuit and prevent will lock into an open position. To close damage to system components. the door, pull out the door handle (1) and sliding the door (2) towards the front of vehicle. • If the window on the rear sliding door is open (more than 80 mm/3 in.), the rear sliding door will not open fully but will open to the 3/4 position. 1VQA2327 CAUTION To lock a door without the key, push the The left sliding door cannot be inside door lock button (1) or door lock opened when the fuel filler lid is switch (2) to the “Lock” position and close open. However, if the fuel filler lid is the door (3). opened after the door is opened slightly, the left sliding door can be slide rearward. Close the left sliding door to prevent possible damage to the door or the fuel filler lid.
3 12 Features of your vehicle
Front door • To lock a door, push the door lock but- Driver’s door ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door Unlock Lock is locked, red part (2) of the button becomes invisible. • To open a door, pull the door handle (3). • If the inner door handle of the front door is pulled when the door lock but- ton is in lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens. (if equipped) 1VQA2007 • Front doors cannot be locked if the Rear door ignition key is in the ignition switch and OVQ026021N door is open. With central door lock switch ✽ NOTICE - Door lock malfunction The central door locking switch is located on the front door arm rest. It is operated If a power door lock ever fails to func- by depressing the door lock switch. If any tion while you are in the vehicle, try one door is open when the switch is or more of the following techniques to depressed, the door will remain locked Lock Unlock exit: when closed. • Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manu- 1VQA2008 al) while simultaneously pulling on Operating door locks from inside the door handle. the vehicle • Operate the other door locks and han- dles, front and rear. With the door lock button • Lower a front window and use the key • To unlock a door, pull the door lock but- to unlock the door from outside. ton (1) to the “Unlock” position. If the door is unlocked, the red part (2) of the button becomes visible.
313 Features of your vehicle
Passenger’s door (if equipped) WARNING - Doors WARNING - Unattended • The doors should always be fully children closed and locked while the vehi- An enclosed vehicle can become cle is in motion to prevent acci- extremely hot, causing death or dental opening of the door. severe injury to unattended chil- Locked doors will also discour- dren or animals who cannot escape age potential intruders when the the vehicle. Furthermore, children vehicle stops or slows. might operate features of the vehi- • Be careful when opening doors cle that could injure them, or they and watch for vehicles, motorcy- could encounter other harm, possi- cles, bicycles or pedestrians bly from someone gaining entry to 1VQA2012 approaching the vehicle in the the vehicle. Never leave children or • When pushing down on the front por- path of the door. Opening a door animals unattended in your vehicle. tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors when something is approaching will lock. can cause damage or injury. • When pushing down on the rear por- Auto door lock/unlock feature tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors • All doors will be automatically locked will unlock. WARNING - Unlocked when shifting the transaxle shift lever • However, if the key is in the ignition vehicles out of P (Park) with engine is running. • All doors will be automatically unlocked switch and any front door is open, the Leaving your vehicle unlocked can when shifting the transaxle shift lever doors will not lock when the front por- invite theft or possible harm to you into P (Park) with engine is running. tion of central door lock switch is or others from someone hiding in pressed. your vehicle while you are gone. Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.
3 14 Features of your vehicle
3. Close the rear door. To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle or push the main control but- ton of the power sliding door. Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle or pushing the sub control button until rear door child safety lock is unlocked ( ).
Unlock Lock WARNING - Rear door 1VQA2013 locks OEP036009 Child-protector rear door lock If children accidentally open the Tailgate rear doors while the vehicle is in The child safety lock is provided to help Opening the tailgate motion, they could fall out and be prevent children from accidentally open- severely injured or killed.To prevent • Tailgate is locked or unlocked with a ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle. children from opening the rear key. (if equipped) The rear door safety locks should be doors from the inside, the rear door • To open the tailgate, insert the key into used whenever children are in the vehi- safety locks should be used when- the lock, turn it to the unlock position cle. ever children are in the vehicle. and pull up the tailgate by pressing the 1. Open the rear door. handle. 2. Push the child safety lock located on You can also lock/unlock the latch (but the front edge of the door to the “Lock” not release it) with the central door lock position. When the child safety lock is system. in the “Lock ( )” position, rear door • If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened will not open when the inner door han- by pressing the handle and pulling it up. dle is pulled inside the vehicle or the sub control button of the power sliding door is pressed.
315 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE • In cold and wet climates, door lock WARNING - Exhaust and door mechanisms may not work fumes properly due to freezing conditions. If you drive with the tailgate open, • When jacking up the vehicle to you will draw dangerous exhaust change a tire or repair the vehicle, do fumes into your vehicle which can not operate the tailgate. This could cause serious injury or death to cause the tailgate to close improperly. vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all win- WARNING - Tailgate dows open so that additional out- The tailgate swings upward. Make side air comes into the vehicle. 1VQA2010 sure no objects or people are near Closing the tailgate the rear of the vehicle when open- To close the tailgate, lower and push ing the tailgate. down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that WARNING - Rear cargo the tailgate is securely latched. area CAUTION Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints Make certain that you close the tail- are available. To avoid injury in the gate before driving your vehicle. event of an accident or sudden Possible damage may occur to the stops, occupants should always be tailgate lift cylinders and attaching properly restrained. hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
3 16 Features of your vehicle
POWER SLIDING DOOR AND POWER TAILGATE (IF EQUIPPED) On the overhead console (1) Left power sliding door main control button WARNING (2) Right power sliding door main control Never leave children or animals button unattended in your vehicle. (3) Power tailgate main control button* Children or animals might operate (4) Power ON/OFF button the power sliding door or power (5) Right power sliding door sub control tailgate that could result in injury to button themselves or others or damage to the vehicle. (6) Left power sliding door sub control 1VQA2014 button On the center pillar trim (7) Power tailgate sub control button* ✽ NOTICE *: if equipped If the power sliding door or power tail- gate is open approximately 6 hours, the The power sliding doors and power tail- ECU will enter Sleep mode to conserve gate can be opened and closed automat- battery power and the door or tailgate ically with the transmitter key, the main might not close automatically. Close the control buttons on the overhead console door or tailgate manually and then or the sub control buttons on the center operate the door or tailgate with the OVQ036002N pillar trim and the tailgate. power operating system. On the tailgate When the power ON/OFF button (PWR) ✽ is OFF (not depressed), the power slid- NOTICE ing door and power tailgate can be In cold and wet climates, power sliding opened and closed manually by pulling doors and tailgate may not work prop- the door handles from inside or outside erly due to freezing conditions. vehicle. ✽ However, it is possible to control the NOTICE doors and tailgate with the transmitter or When the sliding doors are opened man- the main control buttons on the overhead ually (power OFF), more effort will be 1VQA2016 console even though the power ON/OFF required to open and close than on non- button (PWR) is OFF (not depressed). power sliding doors.
317 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE Automatic stop and reversal • The power sliding door and power If the power opening or closing is blocked tailgate can be operated when the by an object or part of the body, the engine is not running. However the power sliding door and power tailgate will power operation consumes large detect the resistance, then the chime will amounts of vehicle electric power. To sound 3 times, and stop movement or prevent the battery from being dis- move to the full open position to allow the charged, do not operate them exces- object to be cleared. sively e.g.: more than approximately However, if the resistance is weak such 10 times repeatedly. as an object that is thin or soft, or the • To prevent the battery from being dis- 1VQA2346 door is near latched position, the auto- charged, do not leave the power slid- matic stop and reversal may not detect ing door and power tailgate at open the resistance and closing operation will position for a long lime. continue. Also, if the power sliding door • Do not apply excessive force while or power tailgate is forced by strong operating the power sliding door or impact, the automatic stop and reversal power tailgate. This could cause dam- may operate. age to the power sliding door or power If the automatic stop and reversal feature tailgate. operates continuously more than twice • Do not modify or repair any part of during one opening or closing operation, the power sliding door or power tail- the power sliding door or power tailgate gate by yourself. This must be done by may stop at that position. At this time, an authorized Kia dealer. 1VQA2347 close the doors manually and operate • When jacking up the vehicle to the door automatically again. change a tire or repair the vehicle, do not operate the power sliding door or power tailgate. This could cause the power sliding door or power tailgate to operate improperly.
3 18 Features of your vehicle
On the driver’s side fuse panel 3. Pull the SHUNT connector on the dri- WARNING ver's side fuse panel and reinstall it • Never intentionally place any after 1 minute. object or part of your body in the 4. Close the sliding door or tailgate man- path of the power sliding door or ually. power tailgate to make sure the 5. Open the sliding door or tailgate com- automatic stop operates. pletely using the transmitter or main • Make sure rear passengers are control button on the overhead con- seated and there are no people or sole. objects around the door before 6. Close the sliding door or tailgate com- operating the power sliding door. pletely using the transmitter or main • Make sure all faces, arms, hands, control button on the overhead con- body parts and any other obstruc- 1VQA4005 sole. tions are safely out of the way How to reset the power sliding door before operating the power slid- and power tailgate For the left/right power sliding doors and ing doors or power tailgate. If the battery has been discharged or dis- power tailgate, follow above steps to • Never place any object or part of connected, the related fuse has been reset. your body in the path of the replaced or disconnected, and the power If the power sliding door or power tailgate power sliding door or power tail- sliding door or power tailgate doesn't doesn't work properly after above proce- gate. This could result in serious work properly, the power sliding door and dure, have the system checked by an injury or cause damage to the power tailgate must be reset as follows: authorized Kia dealer. vehicle. 1. Put the shift lever in the P (Park) for • Make sure there are no people or automatic transaxle. objects around the door before 2. Close the sliding door's windows and operating the power sliding door fuel filler lid. or power tailgate. Have rear pas- sengers or cargo get in or out of the vehicle after the door is open fully and stopped.
319 Features of your vehicle
• When the power ON/OFF button (PWR) is OFF (not depressed), the WARNING power sliding door and power tailgate Do not allow children to play with can not be controlled with the sub con- the power sliding door or power trol buttons or door handles. However, tailgate. Keep the power ON/OFF the doors can be controlled with the button (PWR) in the OFF (not transmitter or the main control buttons depressed) position when not in on the overhead console even though use. Serious injury or death can the power ON/OFF button (PWR) is result from unintentional power OFF (not depressed). operation by child. Also, the doors can be opened and closed manually by pulling the inside or 1VQA2017 outside door handles. ✽ NOTICE Power ON/OFF button Close the sliding door and tailgate, and • When the power ON/OFF button keep the power ON/OFF button (PWR) (PWR) is ON (depressed), the power in the OFF (not depressed) position sliding door and power tailgate can be before washing the vehicle in an auto- controlled with the sub control buttons matic car wash. on the center pillar trim or tailgate. ✽ Also, the doors can be opened and NOTICE closed automatically by pulling the When the sliding doors are opened man- inside or outside door handles. ually (power OFF), more effort will be required to open and close than on non- power sliding doors.
3 20 Features of your vehicle
On the overhead console On the center pillar trim - If the door handle is pulled from inside or outside while the door is locked or child safety lock is engaged, the power sliding door will not open. However, the power sliding door can be opened by pulling the outside door handle while the door is unlocked and child safety lock is engaged. • When the power ON/OFF button (PWR) is OFF (not depressed), the power sliding door can not be con- 1VQA2018 OVQ036003N trolled with the sub control buttons or Power sliding door operation • When the power ON/OFF button door handles, and if the sub control button is pushed, chime sounds once. • Push the corresponding main control (PWR) is ON (depressed), do as fol- button on the overhead console to lows to open or close the power sliding However, the doors can be opened open or close the power sliding door. doors: and closed manually by pulling the door handles from inside or outside However, the power sliding door will - Push the corresponding sub control vehicle. not open with the transmitter or the button on the center pillar trim. main control button when all power - Pull the door handle from inside or • On a steep grade, the power sliding sliding doors and power taligate are outside vehicle. door will slide faster when closing. And the drive unit motor may operate addi- locked and closed. - If the sub control button is pushed tionally for a moment after the door is while the door is locked or child safe- closed. This is a normal operation to ty lock is engaged, the chime sounds ensure door closing, not a malfunction. once, and the power sliding door will not open.
321 Features of your vehicle
WARNING WARNING If children accidentally open the • Let the rear passengers get in or power sliding doors while the vehi- out of the vehicle after the door is cle is in motion, they could fall out open fully. Sudden closing could and be severely injured or killed. To cause a serious injury. prevent children from opening the • Close the door by pulling the power sliding doors from the door handle after the door is open inside, the child safety locks should fully. Do not pull the door handle be used whenever children are in while rear passengers are getting the vehicle. in or out. The door could sudden- ly close by itself and cause a seri- OVQ036004 ous injury. WARNING • It takes about 5 seconds for the When the rear passenger operates power sliding door to close and WARNING latch completely. If your vehicle is facing downward the power sliding door, make sure there are no people or objects Sudden starting or accelerating on a steep grade (15 percent or the vehicle before the door closes more), the door may not stay open around the door, and have all occu- pants get in or out of the vehicle and latches completely could and could slam shut, possibly injur- cause it to open the door and ing someone. To make sure the after the door is open fully and stopped. result in a serious injury or dam- door does not slam shut, turn on age to cargo. Do not start the the power sliding door feature. vehicle before the door closes Then if the door closes, it will close and latches completely. under the control of the power door system.
3 22 Features of your vehicle
• If the window on the power sliding door • The left power sliding door cannot be • If the power sliding door is operated is open (more than 80 mm/3 in.), the opened while the fuel filler lid is open again while the door is closing, the power sliding door will not power open fully. If the main or sub control button is door is automatically opened fully. fully but will open to the 3/4 position pushed, the chime sounds once. Also, • If the power sliding door is operated and the chime will sound 3 times. To if the fuel filler lid open button is again while the door is opening, the close the door, use the transmitter or pushed while the left power sliding door is automatically closed complete- main control button with the power door is opening, the chime sounds ly. However, If the power sliding door is ON/OFF button in OFF position (not once. operated again when the door is in par- depressed), or sub control button or tially opened position (less than 300 door handle with the power ON/OFF ✽ NOTICE mm/12 in.), the door is opened contin- button in ON position (depressed). If the fuel filler lid is opened when the uously. left sliding door is not closed completely, • The half-opened power sliding door is WARNING the door may be opened. Close the left automatically opened or closed fully by sliding door before refueling to prevent pushing the door forward or backward Do not leave the power sliding door without pulling the door handle while in a partially opened position. Close possible damage to the door or the fuel filler lid. the power ON/OFF button is in ON the window and then open the door (depressed). However, when the door fully. A partially opened door is held is in partially opened position (less and then released after 10 minutes. • If the power sliding door is not closed and latched completely after power than 300 mm/12 in.), the door is not The chime sounds 3 times to indi- closed automatically. cate the door is released. If the closing operation, the chime sounds 3 vehicle is stopped on a downward times. Open and close the door again. slope, it may move and cause an • If the power sliding door is operated injury. while the door is in partially opened position (less than 300 mm/12 in.), the door is automatically opened fully. • If the power sliding door is operated while the door is in half-opened posi- tion (more than 300 mm/12 in.), the door is automatically closed complete- ly.
323 Features of your vehicle
Power sliding door non-opening condi- On the overhead console On the tailgate tions The power sliding door is not automati- cally opened, but closed under the fol- lowing conditions. If the main or sub con- trol button is pushed for power opening operation, the chime sounds once. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, 1.Vehicle is moving above 5 km/h (3 mph). 2. The gearshift lever is not in P (Park) for automatic transaxle. 1VQA2019 1VQA2016A Power tailgate operation • When the power ON/OFF button WARNING (if equipped) (PWR) is ON (depressed), do as fol- Do not open the sliding doors while • Push the power tailgate main control lows to open or close the power tail- the vehicle is in motion. Passengers button on the overhead console to gate: or cargo may be ejected from the open or close the power tailgate. - Pushing the sub control button on the vehicle, possibly resulting in prop- However, the power tailgate will not bottom of the tailgate will close the erty damage, severe injury, or open with the transmitter or the main power tailgate automatically. death. control button when all power sliding - Pressing and pulling up the tailgate doors and power tailgate are locked handle slightly will open the power and closed. tailgate automatically when the tail- • When the power tailgate is operated gate is unlocked. with the main or sub control button or transmitter, the chime sounds and haz- ard warning lights flash 3 times.
3 24 Features of your vehicle
• When the power ON/OFF button • If the power tailgate is operated again (PWR) is OFF (not depressed), the WARNING while the tailgate is closing, the tailgate power tailgate can not be controlled Make sure there are no people or is automatically opened fully. with the sub control buttons or tailgate objects around the tailgate before • If the power tailgate is operated again handle, and if the sub control button is operating the power tailgate. Wait while the tailgate is opening, the tail- pushed, the chime sounds once. until the tailgate is open fully and gate is automatically closed complete- However, the tailgate may be opened stopped before loading or unload- ly. However, if the power tailgate button manually by pulling the exterior handle ing cargo or passengers from the is pressed again when the tailgate is and lifting the tailgate upward. The tail- vehicle. open less than 20 degrees, the tailgate gate may be manually closed by push- will continue to open. ing the tailgate downward. Power tailgate non-opening condi- WARNING tions WARNING Make sure the tailgate is closed The power tailgate will not open auto- firmly before driving. If the tailgate Even though the power ON/OFF matically, but will close under the follow- is open, you will draw dangerous button (PWR) is in the OFF (not ing conditions. If the main or sub control exhaust fumes into your vehicle depressed) position, the tailgate button is pushed for power opening oper- which can cause serious injury or will still be propelled upward by ation, the chime sounds once. mechanical force if the tailgate is death to vehicle occupants. manually opened more than 20 When the ignition switch is in the ON degrees beyond the fully closed position, position. In addition, if the tailgate • If the power tailgate is not closed and 1.Vehicle is moving above 5 km/h (3 mph). is manually closed to the secondary latched completely after power closing 2. The gearshift lever is not in P (Park) for latch position, the tailgate will be operation, the chime sounds 3 times. automatic transaxle. electrically moved to the fully • If the power tailgate is operated while latched position. Make sure that the tailgate is in partially opened posi- face, arms, hands, and other tion (less than 20 degrees), the tailgate obstructions are safely out of the is automatically opened fully. way before operating the tailgate. If the power tailgate is operated while the tailgate is in half-opened position (more than 20 degrees), the tailgate is automatically closed completely.
325 Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS Power windows (1) Driver’s door power window switch (2) Front passenger’s door power win- dow switch (3) Rear door (left) power window switch (4) Rear door (right) power window switch (5) Power rear quarter window (left) switch* (6) Power rear quarter window (right) switch* (7) Power window lock switch (8) Window opening and closing (9) Automatic power window down (Driver’s window)
*: if equipped
✽ NOTICE In cold and wet climates, power win- dows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
OVQ030005N 3 26 Features of your vehicle
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate. CAUTION WARNING - Windows Each door has a power window switch • To prevent the power window • Always double check to make that controls that door’s window. system from the possibility of sure all arms, hands, head and However, the driver has a power window damage, do not open or close two other obstructions are safely out lock switch which can block the operation windows at the same time. This of the way before closing a win- of passenger windows. will also ensure the longevity of dow. The power windows can be operated for the fuse. • Do not allow children to play with approximately 30 seconds after the igni- • Never try to operate the main the power windows. Keep the dri- tion key is removed or turned to the ACC switch on the driver's door and ver’s door power window lock or LOCK position. However, if the front the individual door window switch in the LOCK position doors are opened, the power windows switch in opposing directions at (depressed). Serious injury can cannot be operated even within the 30 the same time. If this is done, the result from unintentional window seconds after the ignition key removal. window will stop and cannot be operation by the child. opened or closed. • Do not extend face or arms out- ✽ NOTICE side through the window opening While driving with the rear windows while driving. down or with the sunroof in an open (or partially open position), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or Window opening and closing pulsation noise. This noise is a normal The driver’s door has a master power occurrence and can be reduced or elim- window switch that controls all the win- inated by taking the following actions. dows in the vehicle. If the noise occurs with one or both of • To open or close a window, press down the rear windows down, partially lower (8) or pull up (8) the front portion of the both front windows approximately one corresponding switch. inch. If you experience the noise with • To open or close a rear quarter win- the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size dow, push (8) the corresponding of the sunroof opening. switch.
327 Features of your vehicle
Automatic power window down (driver’s window) Depressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent posi- tion (9) completely lowers the driver’s window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up the switch momentarily to the opposite direction of the window movement. If the power window is not operated cor- rectly, the automatic power window sys- OVQ026023N 1VQA2024 tem must be reset as follows: Power window lock switch Manual flip - open (rear quarter 1. Turn the ignition key to ON position. The driver can disable the power window windows, if equipped) 2. Close driver’s window and continue switches on the front and rear passen- To open the quarter windows, pull the pulling up on driver’s power window gers' doors by pressing the power win- rear portion of the latch out. Swing the switch for at least 1 second after the dow lock switch to lock position latch forward and out, then lock it into the window is completely closed. (pressed). open position by pushing outward until When the power window lock switch is you hear a click. To close the windows, pressed, the driver's master control can- pull the handle inward. Then push the not operate the front and rear passen- handle rearward until you hear a click. gers' power windows and rear quarter windows. ✽ NOTICE In cold and wet climates, rear quarter panel windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
3 28 Features of your vehicle
HOOD Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the fol- lowing: • All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed. • Gloves, rags or any other com- bustible material must be removed from the engine compartment. 2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to securely lock in place.
1VQA2028 1VQA2029 WARNING Opening the hood 2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the Make sure the hood is properly 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood slightly, pull the secondary latch locked before driving. hood. The hood should pop open (1) inside of the hood center and lift (2) slightly. the hood. 3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely WARNING - Hood by itself after it has been raised about • Before closing the hood, ensure halfway. WARNING that all obstructions are removed Open the hood after turning off the from the hood opening. Closing engine on a flat surface, shifting the the hood with an obstruction pre- shift lever to the P(Park) position sent in the hood opening may for automatic transaxle. result in property damage or severe personal injury. • Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.
329 Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
WARNING - Refueling If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
1VQA2025 1VQA2026 1. Stop the engine. 3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open. 2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the 4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank release button located on the driver’s cap counterclockwise. lower door. 5. Refuel as needed. 6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until WARNING it clicks once. This indicates that the To avoid injury from sharp edges, it cap is securely tightened. is recommended that protective 7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light- gloves be worn if there is a need to ly and make sure that it is securely open the fuel filler door manually. closed.
3 30 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling dan- (Continued) (Continued) gers • Do not get back into a vehicle Use only portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and Automotive fuels are flammable once you have begun refueling store gasoline. materials. When refueling, please since you can generate static note the following guidelines care- electricity by touching, rubbing or • Do not use cellular phones while fully. Failure to follow these guide- sliding against any item or fabric refueling. Electric current and/or lines may result in severe personal (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) electronic interference from cellu- injury, severe burns or death by fire capable of producing static elec- lar phones can potentially ignite or explosion. tricity. Static electricity discharge fuel vapors causing a fire. • Before refueling note the location can ignite fuel vapors resulting in • When refueling, always shut the of the Emergency Gasoline Shut- rapid burning. If you must re- engine off. Sparks produced by Off, if available, at the gas station enter the vehicle, you should electrical components related to facility. once again eliminate potentially the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is • Before touching the fuel nozzle, dangerous static electricity dis- complete, check to make sure the you should eliminate potentially charge by touching a metal part filler cap and filler door are dangerous static electricity dis- of the vehicle, away from the fuel securely closed, before starting charge by touching another metal filler neck, nozzle or other gaso- the engine. part of the vehicle, a safe distance line source. away from the fuel filler neck, noz- • When using a portable fuel con- • DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit zle, or other gas source. tainer be sure to place the con- cigarette in your vehicle while at a (Continued) tainer on the ground prior to refu- gas station especially during eling. Static electricity discharge refueling. Automotive fuel is high- from the container can ignite fuel ly flammable and can, when ignit- vapors causing a fire. Once refu- ed, result in fire. eling has begun, contact with the (Continued) vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete. (Continued)
331 Features of your vehicle
(Continued) CAUTION • If a fire breaks out during refuel- • Make sure to refuel your vehicle ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi- according to the “Fuel require- cle, and immediately contact the ments” suggested in section 1. manager of the gas station and • Check to make sure the fuel filler then contact the local fire depart- cap is securely closed after refu- ment or 911. Follow any safety eling. A loose fuel filler cap may instructions they provide. cause the "Check Engine" (Malfunction Indicator) light in the instrument panel to illuminate unnecessarily. • If the fuel filler cap requires OVQ036007N replacement, use only a genuine When fuel filler lid does not open Kia cap or the equivalent speci- with the release button fied for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a seri- If the fuel filler lid does not open using ous malfunction of the fuel sys- the remote fuel filler lid release, you can tem or emission control system. open it manually. Unsnap and remove the panel in the cargo area. Pull the handle • Do not spill fuel on the exterior outward. surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint. • If the fuel filler lid will not open in cold weather because the area around it is frozen, push or lightly tap the lid.
3 32 Features of your vehicle
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED) The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The sunroof can be operated for approx- imately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the front door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operat- ed even within the 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. 1VQA2031 1VQA2030 CAUTION (1) Slide button Do not continue to press the sun- (2) Tilt button roof control button(s) after the sun- (3) Close button roof is in the fully open, closed, or If your vehicle is equipped with this fea- tilt position(s). Damage to the motor ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroof or system components could occur. with the sunroof control buttons located on the overhead console. ✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE The sunroof cannot slide when it is in 1VQA2032 In cold and wet climates, sunroof may the tilt position nor can it be tilted while Sliding the sunroof not work properly due to freezing con- in an open or slide position. ditions.
333 Features of your vehicle
Open Open Autoslide Autotilt To use the autoslide feature, momentari- To use the autotilt feature, momentarily ly (less than 0.4 second) press the slide (less than 0.4 second) press the tilt but- button on the overhead console. ton on the overhead console. The sun- The sunroof will slide all the way open. To roof will tilt all the way open. To stop the stop the sunroof sliding at any point, sunroof tilting at any point, press any press any sunroof control button. sunroof control button.
Manual slide Manual tilt Press the slide button on the overhead OVQ049034 Press the tilt button on the overhead con- console and hold it until the sunroof is sole and hold it until the sunroof is opened to the desired position. opened to the desired position.
Close Close To close the sunroof, press the close but- To close the sunroof, press the close but- ton on the overhead console and hold it ton on the overhead console and hold it until the sunroof is closed. until the sunroof is closed.
1VQA2035 Tilting the sunroof
3 34 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Sunroof CAUTION • Do not extend face, neck, arms or • Do not press any sunroof control body outside through the sunroof button longer than necessary. opening while driving. Damage to the motor or system • Make sure hand and face are components could occur. safely out of the way before clos- • Periodically remove any dirt that ing a sunroof. may accumulate on the guide rail. • If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the 1VQA2039 glass or the motor could be dam- Sunshade aged. The sunshade will be opened with the • While using sunroof for a long glass panel automatically when the glass time, a dust between sunroof and panel is slid.You will have to close it man- roof panel can make a noise. ually if you want it closed. Open the sunroof and remove regularly the dust using clean cloth. • The sunroof is made to slide together with sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.
335 Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof 4. Press and hold the tilt button (for Whenever the vehicle battery is discon- more than 10 seconds) until the sun- nected or discharged, you have to reset roof has returned to the original posi- your sunroof system as follows: tion of tilt after it is raised a little high- er than the maximum tilt position. Then, release the button. 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi- tion. 5. Press and hold the tilt button (for more than 5 seconds) until the sun- 2. According to the position of the sun- roof is operated as follows; roof, do as follows. 1) in case that the sunroof has closed → → completely or been tilted : TILT DOWN SLIDE OPEN SLIDE CLOSE Press the tilt button until the sun- roof has tilted upward completely. 2) in case that the sunroof has slide- Then, release the button. opened: Press and hold the close button When this is complete, the sunroof sys- (for more than 5 seconds) until the tem is reset. sunroof has closed completely. Press the tilt button until the sun- roof has tilted upward completely. 3. Release the tilt button.
3 36 Features of your vehicle
SEAT Front seat (1) Forward and backward Power seat Manual seat (2) Seatback angle (3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)* (4) Seat warmer* (5) Headrest (6) Armrest (7) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
Rear seats Long wheelbase (8) Forward and backward (9) Seatback angle (10) Headrest (11) Armrest (12) Stowing*
* if equipped Short wheelbase WARNING - Loose objects Loose objects in the driver’s foot area could interfere with the opera- tion of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Do not place anything under the front seats.
OVQ036201N
337 Features of your vehicle
(Continued) (Continued) WARNING - Uprighting seat • Always drive and ride with your Failure to follow these warnings seatback upright and the lap por- could result in serious injury or When you return the seatback to its tion of the safety belt snug and death in the event of a sudden upright position, hold the seatback low across the hips. This is the stop, collision or rollover. and return it slowly and be sure best position to protect you in • No passenger should ride in the there are no other occupants case of an accident. cargo area or sit or lie on folded around the seat. If the seatback is • In order to avoid unnecessary seatbacks while the vehicle is returned without being held and and perhaps severe airbag moving. All passengers must be controlled, the back of the seat injuries, always sit as far back as in seats and restrained properly could spring forward resulting in possible from the steering wheel while riding. accidental injury to a person struck so that your chest is at least 250 by the seatback. • When resetting the seatback to mm (10 inches) away from the the upright position, make sure it steering wheel. is securely latched by pushing it forward and backwards. WARNING - Driver’s seat • To avoid the possibility of burns, • Never attempt to adjust seat while do not remove the carpet in the the vehicle is moving. This could WARNING - Rear Seatback cargo area. Emission controls result in loss of control, and an • The rear seatback must be beneath this floor generate high accident causing death, serious securely latched. If not, passen- exhaust temperatures. injury, or property damage. gers and objects could be thrown • Use extreme caution so that • Do not allow anything to interfere forward resulting in serious hands or other objects are not with the normal position of the injury or death in the event of a caught in the seat mechanisms seatback. Storing items against a sudden stop or collision. while the seat is moving. seatback or in any other way • Luggage and other cargo should • Do not put a cigarette lighter on interfering with proper locking of be laid flat in the cargo area. If the floor or seat. When you oper- a seatback could result in serious objects are large, heavy, or must ate the seat, gas may gush out of or fatal injury in a sudden stop or be piled, they must be secured. the lighter and cause fire. collision. Under no circumstances should (Continued) cargo be piled higher than the seatbacks. (Continued)
3 38 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver respon- sibility for front seat pas- senger Riding in a vehicle with a front seat- back reclined could lead to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a front seat is reclined during an acci- dent, the occupant’s hips may slide under the lap portion of the safety belt applying great force to the unprotected abdomen. Serious or 1VQA2041 1VQA2043 fatal internal injuries could result. Front seat adjustment - manual Seatback angle The driver must advise the front To recline the seatback: passenger to keep the seatback in Forward and backward an upright position whenever the 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the To move the seat forward or backward: vehicle is in motion. 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever seatback recline lever located on the under the front edge of the seat cush- outside of the seat, at the rear. ion up and hold it. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat and 2. Slide the seat to the position you adjust the seatback of the seat to the desire. position you desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure the 3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for Adjust the seat before driving, and make the seatback to lock.) sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.
339 Features of your vehicle
CAUTION • Power seats are driven by an electric motor. Stop operating once the adjustment is complet- ed. Excessive operation may damage the electrical equipment. • When in operation, the power seats consume large amounts of electrical power. To prevent unnec- essary charging system drain, don’t adjust the power seats 1VQA2328 1VQA2044 longer than necessary while the Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat) Front seat adjustment - power engine is not running. To change the height of the seat cushion, • Do not operate two or more power The front seat can be adjusted by using seat control buttons at the same push the lever up or down located on the the control knob on the front door. Before outside of the seat cushion. time. Doing so may result in driving, adjust the seat to the proper power seat motor or electrical • To lower the seat cushion, push down position so as to easily control the steer- component malfunction. the lever several times. ing wheel, pedals and switches on the • To raise the seat cushion, pull up the instrument panel. lever several times. WARNING The power seats are operable with the ignition OFF. Therefore, children should never be left unattended in the car.
3 40 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver respon- sibility for front seat pas- senger Riding in a vehicle with a front seat- back reclined could lead to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a front seat is reclined during an acci- dent, the occupant’s hips may slide under the lap portion of the safety belt applying great force to the unprotected abdomen. Serious or 1VQA2045 1VQA2047 fatal internal injuries could result. Forward and backward Seatback angle The driver must advise the front Push the control knob forward or back- Push the control knob forward or back- passenger to keep the seatback in ward to move the seat to the desired ward to move the seatback to the desired an upright position whenever the position. Release the knob once the seat angle. Release the knob once the seat vehicle is in motion. reaches to the desired position. reaches to the desired position.
341 Features of your vehicle
WARNING • For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as close OVQ039046 OVQ039300N-1 to your head as possible. For this Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat) Headrest (front) reason, the use of a cushion that Push the control knob up to raise or The driver's and front passenger's seats holds the body away from the down to lower the seat cushion. Release are equipped with a headrest for the seatback should not be recom- the knob once the seat reaches to the occupant's safety and comfort. mended. desired position. The headrest not only provides comfort • Do not operate vehicle with the for the driver and front passenger, but headrests removed as injury to also helps to protect the head and neck the occupants may occur in the in the event of a collision. event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted. • Do not adjust the headrest posi- tion of the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion.
3 42 Features of your vehicle
1VQH3900N 1VQA2049 1VQA2050 Active headrest (if equipped) Forward and backward adjustment Adjusting the height up and down The active headrest is designed to move (if equipped) To raise the headrest, pull it up to the forward and upward during a rear impact. The headrest may be adjusted forward to desired position (1). To lower the head- This helps to prevent the driver's and three different positions by pulling the rest, push and hold the release button (2) front passenger’s head from moving headrest forward. To adjust the headrest on the headrest support and lower the backward and thus helps prevent neck backward, pull it fully forward to the far- headrest to the desired position (3). injuries. thest position and release it. Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck. WARNING A gap between the seat and the headrest release button may appear when sitting on the seat or when you push or pull the seat. Be careful not to get your finger, etc. caught in the gap.
343 Features of your vehicle
OVQ039001 OVQ027052 OVQ028053 Removal Armrest (if equipped) Seatback pocket To remove the headrest, raise it as far as The front seats have the armrest located A seatback pocket is provided on the it can go then press the release button (1) on the side of seatback. back of the front passenger and drivers while pulling upward (2). To use the armrest, swing down the arm- seatbacks. To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest rest to the lowest position. poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the WARNING - Seatback appropriate height. pockets Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an acci- WARNING dent they could come loose from Make sure the headrest locks in the pocket and injure vehicle occu- position after adjusting it to proper- pants. ly protect the occupants.
3 44 Features of your vehicle
CAUTION CAUTION For proper operation of the occu- • When cleaning the seats, do not pant detection system: use an organic solvent such as • Do not place any items cumula- thinner, benzene, alcohol and tively weighing over 1 kg (2.2 lbs) gasoline. Doing so may damage in the seatback pocket or on the the surface of the heater or seats. seat. • To prevent overheating the seat • Do not hang onto the front pas- warmer, do not place anything on senger seat. the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat OVQ039010N warmer is in operation. ❈ The location of the seat warmer switch may • Do not place heavy or sharp be changed depending on your model. objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat Seat warmer (if equipped) warming components could The seat warmer is provided to warm the occur. front seats during cold weather. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat. During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.
✽ NOTICE With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depend
345 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Seat heater burns Passengers should use extreme caution when using seat warmers due to the possibility of excess heating or burns. The seat warmer may cause burns even at low tem- peratures, especially if used for long periods of time. In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following types of pas- sengers: 1VQA2042 OVQ030203N 1. Infants, children, elderly or hand- Lumbar support (driver’s seat only) Rear seat adjustment icapped persons, or hospital out- (if equipped) Adjusting the seat forward and back- patients You can adjust the lumbar support by ward 2. Persons with sensitive skin or moving the lever on the outside of the dri- - 2nd row seat those that burn easily ver’s seatback. Pivoting the lever increas- To move the seat forward or backward: 3. Fatigued individuals es or decreases the lumbar support. 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever 4. Intoxicated individuals under the front edge of the seat cush- 5. Individuals taking medication ion up and hold it. that can cause drowsiness or 2. Slide the seat to the position you sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold desire. tablets, etc.) 3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.
3 46 Features of your vehicle
2nd row seat Seatback angle To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the seatback recline lever (or strap) locat- ed on the outside of the seat at the rear. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire. 3. Release the lever (or strap) and make OVQ030204N sure the seatback is locked in place. 3rd row seat (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.) OVQ027052 Armrest The 2nd row seats have the armrest located on the side of seatback. To use the armrest, swing down the arm- rest to the lowest position.
OVQ036205N
347 Features of your vehicle
2nd row seat WARNING • For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with height of the top of their eyes. 1VQA2050 Also, adjust the headrest as close 3rd row seat OVQ039300N-3 to your head as possible. For this Headrest (rear) reason, the use of a cushion that The rear seat(s) is equipped with head- holds the body away from the rests in all the seating positions for the seatback should not be recom- occupant's safety and comfort. mended. The headrest not only provides comfort • Do not operate vehicle with the for the passengers, but also helps to pro- headrests removed as injury to tect the head and neck in the event of a the occupants may occur in the collision. For best protection, adjust the event of an accident. Headrests headrest so its center is as high as your may provide protection against ears. neck injuries when properly 1VQA2057 adjusted. Adjusting the height up and down • Do not adjust the headrest posi- To raise the headrest, pull it up to the tion of the driver's seat while the desired position (1). To lower the head- vehicle is in motion. rest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).
3 48 Features of your vehicle
2nd row seat WARNING Make sure the headrest locks in position after adjusting it to proper- ly protect the occupants.
OVQ039001 3rd row seat 1VQA2329 Full flat seat When the vehicle is parked, you can place the front seat in a reclined position, nearly flat. 1. Move the rear seat to the farthest rear- ward position. 2. Move the front seat to the farthest for- ward position. OVQ039002 3. Remove the headrest. Removal 4. Recline the seatback as far as it can go to allow the rear seat passenger to To remove the headrest, raise it as far as support their legs in the reclined posi- it can go then press the release button tion. (1) while pulling upward (2). To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
349 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Uprighting seat When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. If the seatback is returned without holding it, the back of the seat could spring for- ward resulting in accidental injury from being struck by the seatback.
OVQ030211N OVQ036209N WARNING - Full flat seat Folding the rear seatback 2. Pull the seatback recliner (or strap) Never allow a passenger to use the and double-fold the seat forward. full flat seat feature while the vehi- The rear seatbacks fold forward to pro- cle is in motion because severe vide additional cargo space and to pro- 3. Push down the seat backward firmly to injury or death could occur in an vide access to the cargo area. lock the catches into the rear anchors until an audible "click" is heard. accident. To fold the rear seat: - 2nd row seat 1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi- tion.
3 50 Features of your vehicle
2nd row seat
OVQ036210N OVQ036208N OVQ030211N 4. Make sure the green mark on the rear - 3rd row seat Double-folding the rear seat seat cushion frame is visible and the 1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi- - 2nd row seat catches are locked in position by mov- tion. To fold the rear seat: ing the seat forward and backward or 2. Hold the seatback and pull out the 1. Lower the headrest to the lowest position. lifting the front portion of the seat. If the folding strap. 2. Move the seat to rear-most position. green mark is invisible and the seat 3. Fold the seatback forward and down moves, it is not locked properly. 3. Double-fold the rear seat forward by firmly until it clicks into place. pull up the seatback recline lever (or strap). To unfold the rear seat: 1. Pull up the seatback recline lever (or strap). 2. Lift and push the seatback backward firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. 3. Return the rear safety belt to the prop- er position.
351 Features of your vehicle
2nd row seat
OVQ036213N
OVQ036212N OVQ036210N 4. Pull the folding strap out of the pocket 3. Make sure the green mark on the rear located under the seat cushion. (2nd seat cushion frame is visible and the row seat) catches are locked in position by mov- 5. Lift the entire folded seat forward and ing the seat forward and backward or tie the folded seat to the assist handle lifting the front portion of the seat. If the using the strap. (2nd row seat) green mark is invisible and the seat moves, it is not locked properly. 4. Pull up the seatback recline lever (or OVQ036209N strap). 5. Lift and push the seatback backward To unfold the rear seat firmly until it clicks into place. 1. Untie the strap from the assist handle Make sure the seatback is locked in and insert the strap into the pocket. place. (2nd row seat) 6. Return the rear safety belt to the prop- 2. Push down the seat backward firmly to er position. lock the catches into the rear anchors until an audible “click” is heard.
3 52 Features of your vehicle
2nd row seat 2nd row seat 2nd row seat
OVQ030211N OVQ036214N OVQ036215L Removing the rear seat 2. 2nd row seat ✽ NOTICE - 2nd row seat Pull up the catch release lever under Only use the strap to remove the seat. To remove a rear seat: the front of the seat cushion while 1. Double-fold the rear seat forward by reclining the folded seat rearward 3. Remove the entire seat from the floor. pulling up the seatback recline lever slightly to release the front catches (or strap). from the anchors.
353 Features of your vehicle
OVQ036216N OVQ036209N OVQ036210N To install the rear seat: 3. Lift the rear portion of the seat cushion 4. Make sure the green mark on the rear 1. Put the front anchor strikers along the then push down firmly to lock the seat cushion frame is visible and the front anchors on the floor. catches into the rear anchors until an catches are locked in position by mov- 2. Insert two front anchor strikers into the audible “click” is heard. ing the seat forward and backward or front anchors. lifting the front portion of the seat. If the green mark is invisible and the seat moves, it is not locked properly. 5. Pull up the seatback recline lever (or folding strap). 6. Lift and push the seatback backward firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. 7. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.
3 54 Features of your vehicle
OVQ036400L OVQ037401N/OVQ037402N OVQ037403N If the rear catches of the seat are locked 1. Lift the seatback (2) while pulling up 4. Remove the seat while lifting up the into the rear anchors (2) while the front the seatback recline lever (1) and push rear portion of seat cushion (6). catches are not locked into the front the seatback backward firmly until it anchors (1), do the followings to release clicks into place. Be careful not to fold the rear catches from the rear anchors. the seat backward because the front catches are not locked. 2. Pull out the seatback recline strap (4) while lifting up the rear portion of the seat cushion (3). 3. Then the seatback will be folded for- ward and rear catches will be released (5).
355 Features of your vehicle
WARNING • Make sure there is no body or object around the seat and be careful not to injure your hands or body under the seat or in the mov- ing parts when stowing or rein- stalling the seat. • Do not sit on the seat stowed with the seatback upright in the lug- gage compartment. Sitting on the OVQ036219N unstable and unlocked seat could OVQ036218N cause serious injuries in an acci- Stowing the rear seat dent. - 3rd row seat The rear seat can be folded and stowed in the luggage compartment to provide additional cargo space.
To stow the rear seat: 1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi- tion. OVQ036220N 2. Fold the seatback by pulling out the 3. Pull the seat by using the stowing folding strap. strap. 4. Stow the seat by pushing down firmly.
3 56 Features of your vehicle
OVQ036221N OVQ036222N OVQ036223N To use the rear seat: 2. Release the strap and push the seat 3. Make sure the catches are locked in 1. Lift the seat by pulling out the stowing forward firmly until it clicks into place to position by moving the seat forward strap. insert the catches into the anchors. and backward or lifting the front por- tion of the seat. If the seat moves, it is ✽ NOTICE not locked properly. 4. Pull out the folding strap. Do not push down the upper part of the seatback when pushing the seat for- 5. Lift and pull the seatback backward ward. Doing so can prevent the catches firmly until it clicks into place. from being locked in position. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. 6. Return the rear safety belt to the prop- er position.
357 Features of your vehicle
2nd row 3rd row CAUTION - Rear safety WARNING - Cargo belts Cargo should always be secured to When returning the rear seatbacks prevent it from being thrown about to the upright position, remember the vehicle in a collision and caus- to return the rear shoulder belts to ing injury to the vehicle occupants. their proper position. Routing the Special care should be taken of safety belt webbing through the objects placed in the rear seats, rear safety belt guides will help since those may hit the front seat keep the belts from being trapped occupants in a frontal collision. behind or under the seats. 1VQA2074B/1VQA2074C WARNING - Cargo loading CAUTION - Avoid damag- Make sure the engine is off, the ing rear safety buckles transaxle is in P and the parking When you fold the rear seatback or brake is applied whenever loading put luggage on the rear seat cush- or unloading cargo. Failure to take ion, insert the buckle in the pocket these steps may allow the vehicle to between the rear seatback and move if shift lever is inadvertently cushion. Doing so can prevent the moved to another position. buckle from being damaged by the rear seatback or luggage. 1VQA2190A
CAUTION Before changing seat position, slip the seat belt into the trim panel and close the power outlet cap.
3 58 Features of your vehicle
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Recalling positions from memory WARNING 1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while Never attempt to operate the driver the ignition switch is ON. position memory system while the 2. To recall the position in memory, press vehicle is moving. the desired memory button (1 or 2). This could result in loss of control, The system will beep once, then the and an accident causing death, driver seat, outside rearview mirror serious injury, or property damage. and adjustable pedal will automatically adjust to the stored positions. Adjusting one of the control knobs for the Storing positions into memory driver seat, outside rearview mirror and using the buttons on the door adjustable pedal while the system is OVQ039094 recalling the stored positions will cause Storing driver’s seat positions A driver position memory system is pro- the movement for that component to stop vided to store and recall the driver seat, 1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while and move in the direction that the control outside rearview mirror and adjustable the ignition switch is ON. knob is moved. Other components will pedal positions with a simple button 2. Adjust the driver seat, outside continue position recalling. operation. By saving the desired posi- rearview mirror and adjustable pedal tions into the system memory, different to positions comfortable for the driver. drivers can reposition the driver seat, 3. Press SET button on the control panel. WARNING outside rearview mirror and adjustable The system will beep once. Use caution when recalling adjust- pedal based upon their driving prefer- 4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or ment memory while sitting in the ence. 2) within 5 seconds after pressing the vehicle. Push the seat position con- If battery is disconnected, the position SET button. The system will beep trol knob to the desired position memory will be lost and the driving posi- twice when memory has been suc- immediately if the seat moves too tions should be restored in the system. cessfully stored. far in any direction.
359 Features of your vehicle
Storing and recalling with trans- mitter Storing with the transmitter Remove the key from the ignition switch and lock all the doors using the transmit- ter. The driver seat, outside rearview mir- ror and adjustable pedal positions will be stored in the system memory.
Driver’s position recalling with trans- mitter
Unlock the door with the transmitter, OVQ039095 1VQA2109 positions stored in the system memory will be recalled automatically. Easy access function Reverse parking aid function When the AUTO button is ON (the indi- (if equipped) ✽ NOTICE cator light illuminates) with the shift lever While the vehicle is moving backward, The buzzer sounds 10 times if there is a in P position, the system will move the the outside rearview mirror(s) will move malfunction of the memory system. driver’s seat forward or rearward auto- downward to aid reverse. depending on Have the driver position memory system matically so you can comfortably enter the position of the outside rearview mir- checked by an authorized Kia dealer. and exit the vehicle. ror switch (1), the outside rearview mir- • It will move driver’s seat rearward when ror(s) will operate as follows: the ignition key is removed. • It will move driver’s seat forward when the ignition key is inserted.
3 60 Features of your vehicle
POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED) L/R : When the remote control outside Setting the adjustable pedal posi- rearview mirror switch is selected to tion the L (left) or R (right) position, both 1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged. outside rearview mirrors will move downward. 2. Move the accelerator and brake ped- als to the front most position by push- Neutral : When the remote control out- ing the ▼ portion of the switch. side rearview mirror switch is placed in the middle position, 3. Adjust the seat position and the steer- the outside rearview mirrors ing wheel angle properly. will not operate while the vehi- 4. Move the pedals toward you until you cle is moving backward. can fully depress the brake pedal by pushing the ▲ portion of the switch. ✽ NOTICE 1VQA2066 5. Depress the pedals a few times to get used to the feel after adjusting. The outside rearview mirrors will auto- To adjust the position of the accelerator matically revert to their original posi- and brake pedals, push the switch with tions under the following conditions: the shift lever in the P position. WARNING 1. Ignition switch is in the LOCK posi- • Adjust the pedals after parking tion. ▲ If you push the portion of the switch, the vehicle on level ground. Never 2. Shift lever is moved to any position the pedals move toward the driver. except R. attempt to adjust the pedals while If you push the ▼ portion of the switch, the vehicle is moving. 3. Remote control outside rearview mir- the pedals move away from the driver. ror switch is placed in the middle • Never adjust the pedals with your position. foot on the accelerator pedal as this may result in increasing the engine speed and acceleration. • Make sure that you can fully depress the brake pedal before driving. Otherwise, you may not be able to hold down the brake pedal firmly in an emergency stop.
361 Features of your vehicle
SAFETY BELTS Safety belt restraint system All seats have lap/shoulder belts. Inertial The rear (or front passenger) safety belts locks in the safety belt retractors allow all use a special auto-lock feature designed of the lap/shoulder safety belts to remain to allow a child restraint to be used in WARNING - Safety belts unlocked during normal vehicle opera- these positions without an added locking To minimize the risk of serious or tion. This allows the occupants some clip. They normally lock only under fatal injury in an accident, the driver freedom of movement and increased extreme or emergency conditions (emer- and all passengers should use the comfort while using the safety belts. If a gency lock mode). However they can be appropriate safety restraints for force is applied to the vehicle, such as a adjusted so that they remain fixed and their age and size. The presence of strong stop, a sharp turn, or a collision, locked when a child restraint system is air bags does not change the need the safety belt retractors will automatical- placed in these positions. (Use this auto- to be properly restrained by a safe- ly lock the safety belts. lock mode only to secure a child ty belt or size-appropriate child Since the inertial locks do not require a restraint, never for passengers restrained restraint. In fact, air bags are collision in order to lock up, you may by the safety belts.) designed to work the best when become aware of the safety belts locking The drivers safety belt can only operate passengers are correctly restrained while braking or going around sharp cor- in the emergency lock mode. in the vehicle. ners. • Be sure you are familiar with the Always use the rear seat position(s) to Safety belts provide the best restraint information in this section, install your child restraint(s). including the information on when: infant and child restraints. • The seatback is upright. • Read the safety warnings on the WARNING - Child restraint • The occupant is sitting upright (not sun visors of your vehicle also. in front seat slouched). Never install a child restraint sys- • The lap belt is snug across the hips. We strongly recommend that the driver tem in the front passenger position, • The shoulder belt is snug across the and all passengers be properly as an inflating air bag could cause chest. restrained at all times by using the safety serious or fatal injury to a child in • The knees are straight forward. belts provided with the vehicle. Proper that position. use of the safety belts decreases the risk of severe injury or death in accidents or sudden stops. In most states, and in Canada, the law requires their use.
3 62 Features of your vehicle
(Continued) WARNING - After a colli- WARNING - Twisted belts sion • Use the shoulder portion of the A twisted or jammed safety belt safety belt on the outside shoul- • Lap/shoulder belt assemblies cannot restrain you properly. If you der only. Never wear the shoulder may be stretched or damaged cannot untwist or unjam the safety portion under the arm or place it when subjected to the stress and belt, have an authorized Kia dealer between your back and seatback. forces of a collision. service it immediately. Never drive • Never swing the safety belt • The entire restraint system or ride with a twisted or jammed safety belt. around your neck to fit over the should be inspected following inside shoulder. any collision. All belts, retractors, • Never wear the shoulder portion anchors and hardware damaged of the safety belt across the neck by a collision should be replaced or face. before the vehicle is operated WARNING - Belt use again. Safety belts must be used correctly • Wear the lap portion as low as to work properly in an accident. possible. Be sure that the lap belt Each seating position in your vehi- fits snugly around the hips. cle has a specific safety belt assem- Never wear a lap portion of a WARNING - Cargo area bly that includes a buckle and lap/shoulder belt over your waist; Passengers should never be tongue designed to be used togeth- it should always go over the allowed to ride in the cargo area of er. stronger area of your hips. a vehicle. No safety belts are pro- Failure to heed these warnings and • Never use a single safety belt for vided for the cargo area. Persons follow these instructions will more than one person. riding in the vehicle without a fas- increase the risk and severity of • The front seatbacks should tened safety belt are much more injuries and the likelihood of death always remain in a comfortable, likely to suffer serious bodily injury in an accident. upright position when the vehicle or death during an accident. (Continued) is moving.
363 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Safety belt WARNING care • When you fasten the seat belt, be • A damaged belt may not give you careful not to latch the seat belt in the protection you need in an buckles of other seat. It's very dan- accident. gerous and you may not be pro- • Inspect your safety belts periodi- tected by the seat belt properly. cally for excessive wear or dam- • Do not unfasten the seat belt and age. Pull out each belt fully and do not fasten and unfasten the look for fraying, cuts, burns or seat belt repeatedly while driving. other damage. Pull the safety belt This could result in loss of con- out and let it retract a number of trol, and an accident causing times. Make sure that the death, serious injury, or property 1GQA2083 lap/shoulder belts return smooth- damage. Safety belt warning light and chime ly and easily into the retractor. • When fastening the seat belt, If the driver's safety belt is not fastened • Check the latches to make sure make sure that the seat belt does when the key is turned ON or if it is dis- they latch and release without not pass over objects that are connected after the key is turned ON, the interference or delay. hard or can break easily. safety belt warning light will blink until the • Never close the doors on any part • Make sure there is nothing in the belt is fastened. buckle. The seat belt may not be of the lap or shoulder belt. If the driver's safety belt is not fastened fastened securely. • Any belt not in good condition or when the key is turned ON or if it is in good working order should be unfastened after the key is ON, the safe- promptly replaced. ty belt warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds.
WARNING Never close the doors on any part of the lap or shoulder belt. It can damage the safety belt or buckle which could increase the risk of injury in case of an accident.
3 64 Features of your vehicle
1GHA2262 1VQH2263 1VQH2264 Lap/shoulder belt 3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into the 4. Position the lap portion (2) of the belt To fasten the lap/shoulder belt: open end of the buckle (2) until an across your lap as LOW ON THE HIPS 1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate. audible “click” is heard, indicating the as possible to reduce the risk of sliding 2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out belt is locked in the buckle. under it during an accident. Adjust the from the retractor. belt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up on the shoulder portion (1) of the safety belt. The belt retractor is designed to take up excess webbing automatically and to maintain tension on the belt. For your safety, do not put any excess slack into the safety belt at any loca- tion.
✽ NOTICE If you are not able to pull out the safety belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
365 Features of your vehicle
1st / 2nd row WARNING • The height adjuster must be in the locked position when the vehicle is moving. • The misadjustment of height of the shoulder belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash.
1VQA2068 4GQB0338 5. Adjust the shoulder anchor position to To unfasten the lap/shoulder belt: your size. To raise the anchor position, Press the release button on the buckle push the anchor up (1). To lower the and allow the belt to slowly retract. anchor position, press (2) the button (A) and slide the anchor down (3). After adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position. (if equipped) If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection. The shoul- der portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door and not your neck.
3 66 Features of your vehicle
OVQ036225N OVQ036097N 1VQH3903 3 Point rear center belt 2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the 3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the - 3rd row open end of the buckle (C) until an tongue plate (B) into the open end of To fasten the rear center belt audible “click" is heard, indicating the the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is 1. Extract the tongue plate from the hole latch is locked. Make sure the belt is heard, indicating the latch is locked. on the belt assembly cover and slowly not twisted. Make sure the belt is not twisted. pull the tongue plates out from the retractor.
CAUTION - Cargo Be sure that the cargo is securely loaded in the rear cargo area. Failing to do so may damage the rear center safety belt in sudden stop or certain collisions.
367 Features of your vehicle
There will be an audible “click” when the tab locks in the buckle. The safety belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manu- ally so that it fits snugly around your hips, if you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.
WARNING OVQ036226N 1VQH3904 When using the rear safety center When using the rear center seat belt, the To unfasten the rear center belt belt, you must lock all tongue plates buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be 1. Press the release button on the buckle and buckles. If any tongue plate or used. (D) and remove the tongue plate (B) buckle is not locked, it will increase from the buckle (D). the chance of injury in the event of 2. Retract the rear center seatbelt. collision.
3 68 Features of your vehicle
3rd row seat CAUTION When using the seat belt, use it after taking it out of the guides. If you pull the seat belt when it is stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and/or belt webbing.
OVQ036098N
OVQ036099N Stowing the rear safety belt The rear safety belt can be stowed in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion when not in use.
OVQ036227N 3. Insert the key or similar small rigid device into the web release button (E) on the anchor connector. Pull up on the seat belt web (A) and allow the webbing to retract automatically. 4. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the hole on the belt assembly cover.
369 Features of your vehicle
Proper use and care of the safety Infants and small children belt system WARNING - Belt cleaning To increase their safety, infants and To ensure that the safety belts provide Do not bleach or dye the webbing young children should always be the maximum protection, please follow because this may weaken the web- restrained by a restraint system these instructions: bing fibers and cause them to fail approved for their age and size. • Use the belts at all times - even on when restraining an occupant in a Never allow a child to stand or kneel on short trips. collision. the seat of a moving vehicle. Never allow • If the safety belt is twisted, straighten it a safety belt to be placed around both a child and an adult or around two children prior to use. Restraint women • Keep sharp edges and damaging at the same time. Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul- objects away from the belts. It is best for children to be seated in the der belt assemblies whenever possible • Periodically inspect belt webbing, rear seats. according to specific recommendations Many companies manufacture child anchors, buckles and all other parts for by their doctors. The lap portion of the signs of wear and damage. Replace restraint systems (often called child belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND seats) for infants and small children. An damaged, excessively worn or ques- LOW AS POSSIBLE. tionable parts immediately. acceptable child restraint system must • To clean the belt webbing, use a mild always satisfy Canadian Motor Vehicle soap solution recommended for clean- - Pregnant Safety Standards. Make sure that any WARNING child-restraint system you use in your ing upholstery or carpets. Follow the women instructions provided with the soap. vehicle is labelled as complying with Pregnant women must never place Federal Safety Standards. • Do not make modifications or additions the lap portion of the safety belt to the safety belt. The child-restraint system should be over the area of the abdomen where chosen to fit both the size of the child and • After wearing a safety belt, make sure the fetus is located or above the the size of the vehicle seat. Be sure to fol- it fully retracts to the stowed position. abdomen where the belt could low any instructions provided by the Do not allow the belt to get caught in crush the fetus during an impact. child-restraint system manufacturer the door when you close it. when installing the child-restraint system.
3 70 Features of your vehicle
Larger children WARNING - Children on WARNING - Infants and As children grow, they may need to use laps young children new child-restraint systems, including Never hold a child on your lap or in • Infants and young children are at larger child seats or booster seats, which your arms in a moving vehicle. much greater risk of serious injury are appropriate for their increased size. Even a very strong person cannot or death in an accident or sudden A child who has outgrown available child- hold onto a child in the event of stop if they are unrestrained or restraint systems should use the belts even a minor collision. restrained improperly. Follow all provided in the vehicle. When seated in instructions in this section and the the rear outboard seats, the child should instructions that came with an be restrained by the lap/shoulder belt. approved child safety system. The If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch- WARNING - Hot metal child restraint must be correctly parts es the child’s neck or face, try placing the installed in the vehicle, and the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If Safety belts and seats can become child must be correctly placed in hot in a vehicle that has been the shoulder belt still touches their face the child restraint. or neck they need to be returned to a closed during warm/hot weather; • All children under 12 are safest in they could burn a child. Check seat child restraint system. In addition, after- the back seat. market devices are available from inde- covers and buckles before you • Never install a rear facing infant place a child anywhere near them. pendent manufacturers which help pull seat in the front passenger posi- the shoulder belt down and away from tion. The baby will be injured or the child’s face or neck. killed by the air bag if it deploys. • Never allow a child to stand or kneel on the seat of a moving vehi- WARNING - Shoulder belts cle. on small children • Never allow a shoulder belt to be in contact with a child’s neck or face while the vehicle is in motion. • If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted on children, there is a risk of death or serious injury.
371 Features of your vehicle
(1) Retractor Pretensioner The purpose of the retractor preten- WARNING sioner is to make sure that the shoul- • Do not put anything near the der belts fit in tightly against the occu- buckle. Placing objects near the pant's upper body in certain frontal buckle may increase the risk of collisions. personal injury in the event of a (2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device) collision. The purpose of the EFD is to make • For your safety, be sure that the sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly belt webbing is not loose or twist- against the occupant's lower body in ed and always sit properly on certain frontal collisions. your seat.
OXMA033101 If the system senses excessive tension Pre-tensioner seat belt on the driver or passenger's seat belt Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and when the pre-tensioner system activates, front passenger's pre-tensioner seat the load limiter inside the retractor pre- belts (retractor pretensioner and EFD tensioner will release some of the pres- (Emergency Fastening Device)). The pre- sure on the affected seat belt. tensioner seat belts may be activated, when a frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags. When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor may lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.
3 72 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE WARNING • Both the driver's and front passen- To obtain maximum benefit from a ger's seat belt pre-tensioner system pre-tensioner seat belt: may be activated not only in certain 1. The seat belt must be worn cor- frontal collision but also in certain rectly and adjusted to the proper side collision, if the vehicle is equipped position. Please read and follow with a side or curtain air bag. all of the important information • When the pre-tensioner seat belts are and precautions about your vehi- activated, a loud noise may be heard cle’s occupant safety features – and fine dust, which may appear to be including seat belts and air bags smoke, may be visible in the passenger – that are provided in this manu- compartment. These are normal oper- ODMESA2024 al. ating conditions and are not haz- The seat belt pre-tensioner system con- 2. Be sure you and your passen- ardous. sists mainly of the following components. gers always wear seat belts prop- • Although it is harmless, the fine dust Their locations are shown in the illustra- erly. may cause skin irritation and should tion: not be breathed for prolonged peri- 1. SRS air bag warning light ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor- 2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly oughly after an accident in which the 3. SRS control module pre-tensioner seat belts were activat- ed. 4. Emergency fastening device (EFD) • Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre- tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximate- ly 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.
373 Features of your vehicle
CAUTION WARNING (Continued) • Improper handling of the pre-ten- If the pre-tensioner seat belt system • Pre-tensioners are designed to are not working properly, this warn- sioner seat belt assemblies, and operate only one time. After acti- failure to heed the warnings not ing light will illuminate even if there vation, pre-tensioner seat belts is no malfunction of the SRS air to strike, modify, inspect, replace, must be replaced. All seat belts, service or repair the pre-tension- bag. If the SRS air bag warning light of any type, should always be does not illuminate when the igni- er seat belt assemblies may lead replaced after they have been to improper operation or inadver- tion switch is turned ON, or if it worn during a collision. remains illuminated after illuminat- tent activation and serious injury. • The pre-tensioner seat belt • Always wear the seat belts when ing for approximately 6 seconds, or assembly mechanisms become if it illuminates while the vehicle is driving or riding in a motor vehi- hot during activation. Do not cle. being driven, have an authorized touch the pre-tensioner seat belt Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner assemblies for several minutes • If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as after they have been activated. seat belt must be discarded, con- tact an authorized Kia dealer. soon as possible. • Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer. • Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies. • Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner. (Continued)
3 74 Features of your vehicle
Load limiter (if equipped) When the pre-tentioner activates, if the WARNING - Air bag/pre- WARNING - Replacing system senses excessive seat belt ten- tensioner seat belt warning used pre-tensioners sion on the driver or passenger’s seat light • Pre-tensioners are designed to belt, the load limiter inside the pre-ten- If the SRS air bag warning light operate once. After activation, sioner will release some of the pressure does not illuminate when the igni- pre-tensioner seat belts must be on the affected seat belt. tion key is turned to “ON”, or if it replaced. All seat belts, of any remains illuminated after approxi- type, should always be replaced mately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates after they have been worn during WARNING - Air bag/Pre- while the vehicle is being driven, a collision. tensioner seat please have an authorized Kia deal- • Do not attempt to replace the pre- belt dust er inspect the pre-tensioner and air tensioners yourself. This must be When the air bags and pre-tension- bag system as soon as possible. done by an authorized Kia dealer. ers are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment.This WARNING - Hot parts WARNING - Damaging the dust is not toxic. The dust may The pre-tensioner assembly mecha- pre-tensioners cause skin irritation and should not nism may become hot during acti- • Do not hit or strike the pre-ten- be breathed for prolonged periods. vation. Do not touch the pre-ten- sioner assemblies, especially Ventilate the vehicle after impact sioner seat belt assembly for sever- with a tool or heavy object. al minutes after they have been acti- and wash your hands and face thor- • Do not attempt to service or vated. oughly after an accident. repair the pre-tensioners.
WARNING If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat belt must be discarded, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
375 Features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM We strongly recommend the use of a (Continued) child seat or infant seat for small children and babies, and it is required by law in • When the child restraint system almost all states. This child seat or infant is not in use, store it in the lug- seat should be of appropriate size for the gage area or fasten it with a safe- child and should be installed in accor- ty belt so that it will not be thrown dance with the manufacturer's instruc- forward in the case of a sudden tions. stop or an accident. Children riding in the car should sit on • Children who are too large to be the rear seat and must always be proper- in a child restraint should sit in ly restrained to minimize the risk of injury the rear seat and be restrained in an accident, sudden stop or sudden with the available lap/shoulder belts. maneuver. According to accident statis- 1JBH3051 tics, children are safer when properly • When using the vehicles restrained in the rear seats than in the lap/shoulder safety belts, always front seat. WARNING - Child make sure that the shoulder belt restraints Child restraint systems are designed to portion is positioned midway be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts • A child restraint system must be over the shoulder, never across or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder placed in the rear seat. Never the neck or behind the back. The belt or by a LATCH system (if equipped). install a child or infant seat on the lap belt portion of the lap/shoul- front passenger's seat. der belt must always be posi- Children could be injured or killed in a Should an accident occur and tioned as low as possible on the crash if their restraints are not properly cause the passenger air bag to child's hips and as snug as pos- secured. For small children and babies, a deploy, it could severely injure or sible. child seat or infant seat must be used. kill an infant or child seated in the • If the vehicle’s safety belt will not Before buying a particular child restraint front seat. system, make sure it fits your car and properly fit the child, you must • Since a safety belt or child use an appropriate child restraint seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all restraint system can become very the instructions provided by the child or booster seat in the rear. hot if it is in a closed vehicle, be (Continued) seat manufacturer when installing the sure to check the seat cover and child restraint system. buckles before placing a child there. (Continued)
3 76 Features of your vehicle
(Continued) Installing a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend that WARNING - Child seat • Never allow a child to stand up or installation kneel while the vehicle is moving. the child restraint system be used in the • Before installing the child • Never use an infant carrier or rear seats. restraint system, read the instruc- child seat that "hooks" over a tions supplied by the child seatback. It will not provide ade- WARNING restraint system manufacturer. quate protection in an accident. Never place a rear-facing child • If the safety belt does not operate • Never allow a child to be held restraint in the front passenger as described in this section, have while they are in a moving vehi- seat, because of the danger that an the system checked immediately cle, as this could result in serious inflating passenger side air bag by your authorized Kia dealer. injury to the child in the event of could impact the rear-facing child • Failure to observe this manual's an accident or a sudden stop. restraint and kill the child. Holding a child in a moving vehi- instructions regarding child cle does not provide the child restraint system and the instruc- with any protection during an Since all passenger safety belts move tions provided with the child accident, even if the person hold- freely under normal conditions and only restraint system could increase ing the child is wearing a seat lock under extreme or emergency condi- the chance and/or severity of belt. tions (emergency lock mode), you must injury in an accident. manually change these safety belts to • After an accident, have an autho- the auto lock mode to secure a child rized Kia dealer check the child restraint. restraint system, seat belt, tether anchor and lower anchor. • If there is not enough space to place the child restraint system because of the driver's seat, install the child restraint system in the rear right seat.
377 Features of your vehicle
2nd row seat WARNING - Tether strap If the tether strap is secured incor- rectly, the child restraint seat may not be restrained properly in the event of a collision. Do not mount more than one child restraint seat to a tether anchorage, since the anchorage can then fail in a collision.
OVQ036228N 3rd row seat OVQ036230R WARNING - Child restraint check 1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback. Check that the child restraint sys- tem is secure by pushing and For vehicles with adjustable headrest, pulling it in different directions. route the tether strap under the head- Incorrectly fitted child restraints rest and between the headrest posts, may swing, twist, tip or come away otherwise route the tether strap over causing death or injury. the top of the seatback. 2. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder OVQ037229N and tighten to secure the seat. Securing a child restraint seat Tether anchor system Child restraint hook holders are located on the back of the rear seat cushions.
3 78 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Child restraint anchorage • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum- stances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. • The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere OVQ037300N-1 OVQ036231N other than the correct tether Child seat lower anchors LATCH anchors have been provided in anchor. Some child seat manufacturers make your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are child restraint seats that are labeled as located in the left and right outboard rear LATCH or LATCH-compatible child seating positions. Their locations are restraint system. LATCH stands for shown in the illustration. There is no "Lower Anchors and Tethers for LATCH anchor provided for the center Children". These seats include two rigid rear seating position. or webbing mounted attachments that The LATCH anchors are located between connect to two LATCH anchors at specif- the seatback and the seat cushion of the ic seating positions in your vehicle. This rear seat left and right outboard seating type of child restraint seat eliminates the positions. need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.
379 Features of your vehicle
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install child WARNING WARNING - LATCH lower restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH- • When using the vehicle's anchors compatible attachments. "LATCH" system to install a child LATCH lower anchors are only to be Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint system in the rear seat, used with the left and right rear out- restraint, assure that the seat is properly all unused vehicle rear seat belt board seating positions. Never attached to the LATCH and tether metal latch plates or tabs must be attempt to attach an LATCH anchors. Also, test the child restraint seat latched securely in their seat belt equipped seat in the center seating before you place the child in it. Tilt the buckles and the seat belt webbing position. You may damage the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the must be retracted behind the anchors or the anchors may fail and seat forward. Check to see if the anchors child restraint to prevent the child break in a collision. hold the seat in place. from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may CAUTION allow the child to reach the unre- WARNING Do not allow the rear seat belt web- tracted seat belts which may Install the child restraint seat fully bing to get scratched or pinched by result in strangulation and a seri- rearward against the seatback with the Child-seat latch and LATCH ous injury or death to the child in the seatback in a vertical position, anchor during the installation. the child restraint. not reclined. • Do not place anything around the lower anchors. Also make sure that the seat belt is not caught in Placing a passenger safety belt the lower anchors. into the auto lock mode The use of the auto lock mode will ensure that the normal movement of the child in the vehicle does not cause the WARNING safety belt to be pulled out and loosen If the child restraint is not anchored the firmness of its hold on the child properly, there is a significant risk restraint system. To secure a child of a child being seriously injured or restraint system, use the following proce- killed in a collision. dure.
3 80 Features of your vehicle
E2MS103005 E2BLD310 MMSA3028 Installing a child restraint system by 2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into 3. Pull the shoulder portion of the safety lap/shoulder belt the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the safety belt is fully To install a child restraint system on the sound. extended, it will shift the retractor to outboard or center rear seats, do the fol- Position the release button so that it is the “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode. lowing: easy to access in case of an emergency. 1. Place the child restraint system in the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, follow- ing the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted.
381 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Auto lock mode The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the “emergency lock mode” whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully. Therefore, the pre- ceding seven steps must be fol- lowed each time a child restraint is installed. If the safety belt is not placed in the “Auto lock” mode, severe injury or MMSA3029 MMSA3030 death could occur to the child 4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of 5. Remove as much slack from the belt and/or other occupants in the vehi- the safety belt to retract and listen for as possible by pushing down on the cle in a collision, since the child an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” child restraint system while feeding the restraint will not be effectively held sound. This indicates that the retractor shoulder belt back into the retractor. in place. is in the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct 6. Push and pull on the child restraint sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4. system to confirm that the safety belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, When the safety belt is allowed to release the safety belt and repeat retract to its fully stowed position, the steps 2 through 6. retractor will automatically switch 7. Double check that the retractor is in from the “Auto Lock” mode to the the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to emergency lock mode for normal pull more of the safety belt out of the adult usage. retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode. To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the safety belt to retract fully.
3 82 Features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Driver’s air bag Front passenger’s Side air bag Curtain Air bag air bag
Side impact sensor
Front impact sensor Occupant detec- Front seat position SRS control module tion system sensor
OVQ031094N-1/1VQA2076/OVQ028077/OVQ037900N/OVQ036017N/OVQ031700/1VQA2323/1VQA2080/OVQ036096N/OVQ036095N/1VQA2081
383 Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s air bag What your air bag system does The importance of using (2) Front passenger’s air bag Driver’s air bag and front passenger’s air safety belts (3) Side air bag* bag are designed to supplement the pro- There are four very important reasons to tection offered by the safety belt in cer- use safety belts even with an air bag sup- (4) Curtain Air bag* tain frontal collisions. Likewise, side air plemental restraint system. They: (5) Side impact sensor* bag and curtain air bags are designed to • help keep you in the proper position (6) Front impact sensor supplement the protection offered by the (away from the air bag) when it inflates. safety belt in side collisions. Safety belts (7) Occupant detection system • reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side are designed to reduce the injury of the (8) Front seat position sensor impact (vehicles not equipped with driver or passengers in case of impact or side and curtain air bags) or rear (9) SRS Control Module collision. No safety belt or air bag system impact collisions, because an air bag is can completely eliminate injuries that not designed to inflate in such situa- may cause in collisions or impacts. To tions and even a side curtain air bag is ■ Air bag inflation conditions help reduce impact on driver or passen- ■ Air bag non-inflation conditions designed to inflate only in certain side gers in any collision, safety belts must be impact collisions. ■ Air bag warning light correctly worn. • reduce the risk of harm in frontal or ■ SRS care side collisions which are not severe ■ Air bag warning label What your air bag system does enough to actuate the air bag supple- not do mental restraint system. *: if equipped The air bag system is designed to sup- • reduce the risk of being ejected from plement the protection offered by the your vehicle. safety belt system. IT IS NOT A SUB- STITUTE FOR THE SAFETY BELT.
3 84 Features of your vehicle
(Continued) WARNING - Air bags & safety belts • If your vehicle has been subject- ed to flood conditions (e.g. • Even in vehicles with air bags, soaked carpeting/standing water you and your passengers must on the floor of the vehicle, etc.) or always wear the safety belts pro- if your vehicle has become flood vided in order to minimize the risk damaged in any way, do not and severity of injury in the event attempt to start the vehicle or put of a collision or rollover. the key in the ignition before dis- • Always wear your safety belt. It connecting the battery. can help keep you away from the Disregarding this precaution may air bags during heavy braking cause air bag deployment, which OVQ036096N just before a collision. could result in serious personal • If occupants are not wearing safe- injury or death. If your vehicle is Occupant detection system ty belts or correctly seated, they subjected to flooded conditions, The occupant detection system detects cannot be protected, and thus before starting the vehicle, have the presence of a passenger in the front face serious injury or death. the vehicle towed to an autho- passenger's seat and will turn off the front • Driver’s and front passenger’s air rized Kia dealer for inspection passenger's air bag under certain condi- bag are designed to inflate only in and necessary repairs. tions. certain frontal collision, and side The occupant detection system is and curtain air bags are designed designed to detect the presence of a to inflate in certain side impacts. properly-seated occupant and determine Frontal air bags will generally not if the front passenger's air bag should be provide protection in side impacts enabled (may inflate) or not. (vehicles not equipped with side Only the front passenger front air bag is and curtain air bags) or rear controlled by the Occupant Detection impacts, rollovers, less severe System. frontal collisions.They will not pro- vide protection from later impacts in a multi-impact collision. (Continued)
385 Features of your vehicle
Main components of occupant detec- Always be sure that you and all vehicle tion system occupants are seated and restrained • Detection devices located under the properly (sitting upright with the seat in front passenger seat frame. an upright position, centered on the seat • Electronic system to determine cushion, with the person's legs comfort- whether passenger air bag systems ably extended, feet on the floor, and (both front and side) should be activat- wearing the safety belt properly) for the ed or deactivated. most effective protection by the air bag • A indicator light ocated on the instru- and the safety belt. ment panel which illuminates the words • The OCS may not function properly if “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” passen- the passenger takes actions which can ger air bag system is deactivated. defeat the detection system. These • The instrument panel air bag indicator OVQ038012N include: light is interconnected with the occu- If there is no passenger in the front pas- (1) Failing to sit in an upright position. pant detection system. senger seat or if the passenger in the (2) Leaning against the door or center front passenger seat is very light, (such console. as a child), the front PASSENGER AIR (3) Sitting towards the sides or the front BAG OFF indicator may illuminate. of the seat. When this indicator is ON, the front pas- (4) Putting legs on the dashboard or rest- senger’s air bag will not operate. ing them on other locations which If there is no passenger in the front pas- reduce the passenger weight on the senger's seat, the PASSENGER AIR front seat. BAG OFF indicator comes on, and the (5) Improperly wearing the safety belt. system shuts off the front passenger's (6) Reclining the seat back. front air bag.
3 86 Features of your vehicle
• The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system indicator illuminates after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or Indicator/Warning light Devices Condition detected by after the engine is started. If the front "PASSENGER AIR the occupant detection Front passenger passenger seat is unoccupied or is BAG OFF" indicator SRS warning light system air bag occupied by very small person, or is light
occupied by someone who is improp- 1 erly seated, the "PASSENGER AIR 1. Adult * Off Off Activated BAG OFF" indicator will remain illumi- 2. Child*2 or child On Off Deactivated nated. If the front passenger seat is restraint system occupied by someone of adult size and On Off Deactivated body shape, the "PASSENGER AIR 3. Unoccupied BAG OFF" indicator will turn off after *1 The system detects a person who is generally adult size as an adult, thus allowing the pas- approximately 4 seconds. senger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system • If the front passenger's seat is unoccu- may detect their body shape as that of a child, thus preventing air bag deployment. pied, the “PASSENGER AIR BAG *2 When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, OFF” indicator will turn on, and the the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her body shape or seating front passenger's air bag will not position, thus permitting air bag deployment. deploy in frontal crashes. • If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” CAUTION indicator illuminates, the front passen- If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates or blinks continuous- ger’s air bag will not deploy in frontal ly when a person of adult size sits in the front passenger's seat, it could be crashes. because that person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the • If the front passenger’s seat is occu- vehicle off, make sure the seat back is not reclined, have the passenger cen- pied by a person of adult size, the ter on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended, and the safety belt “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indica- properly positioned. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this tor is not illuminated and the front pas- position long enough to allow the system to detect the person and activate the senger’s air bag will deploy in frontal passenger air bag. crashes.
387 Features of your vehicle
CAUTION WARNING (Continued) If the occupant detection system is • If a very low weight adult is seat- • Even though your vehicle is ed in the front passenger seat, the not working properly, the air bag equipped with the occupant warning light on the instrument occupant detection system may detection system, do not install a or may not turn off the right front panel will illuminate because the child restraint system in the front passenger’s air bag is connected passenger air bag, depending passenger seat. The child could upon the person's seating posi- with the occupant detection system. be severely injured or killed if the If there is a malfunction of the occu- tion and body type. Everyone in air bag deploys. Children are your vehicle should wear a safety pant detection system, the afforded the most protection in "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi- belt properly -- whether or not the event of an accident when there is an air bag for that person. cator will not illuminate and the they are restrained by the proper front passenger's air bag will deploy restraint system in the rear seat. • If the front seat passenger changes their seating position in either a side or frontal crashes • If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG even if there is child or no occupant (for example, by not sitting OFF" indicator is illuminated upright, by sitting on the edge of in the front passenger's seat. when the front passenger's seat Have an authorized Kia dealer the seat, or by otherwise being is occupied by a person of adult out of position), the "PASSEN- inspect the occupant detection sys- size who is seated properly, or if tem with the SRS air bag system as GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" be turned on, and the passenger soon as possible if any of following indicator" is not illuminated when occur; air bag may not deploy in a colli- the front passenger's seat is sion. Always be sure to sit prop- • The SRS air bag warning light unoccupied or occupied by a very erly in the front passenger seat does not illuminate when the igni- small person, the occupant detec- and wear the safety belt properly tion key is turned to "ON" posi- tion system is not working prop- and do not do any of the follow- tion. erly. Have your vehicle immedi- ing. • The SRS air bag warning light ately inspected by your Kia dealer (Continued) remains illuminated after illumi- if the occupant detection system nating or blinking for approxi- is not working properly. mately 6 seconds. (Continued) • The SRS air bag warning light illu- minates while the vehicle is being driven.
3 88 Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
OVQ036013N 1KMN3663 1KMN3665 - Never put a heavy load in the - Never sit with hips shifted - Never place feet on the dash- front passenger seat or seatback towards the front of the seat. board. pocket.
OVQ036014N 1KMN3662 1KMN3664 - Never place feet on the front pas- - Never excessively recline the - Never lean on the door or center senger seatback. front passenger seatback. console. - Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat. (Continued) 389 Features of your vehicle
✽ (Continued) (Continued) NOTICE • If luggage or other objects are placed Any other such replacement or on the front passenger's seat or if the modification could adversely temperature of the seat changes while affect the operation of the occu- the seat is unoccupied, the "PASSEN- pant detection system and your GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may advanced air bags. For the same blink. These conditions do not indi- reason, do not attach anything to cate a problem. the seat, dashboard or door, even • Do not put heavy objects on the front temporarily. If the system is passenger's seat. This may cause front adversely affected, it could cause passenger air bag deployment in the event of an accident, thus increasing severe personal injuries or death your repair costs. in a collision. 1KMN3666 • Do not put a heavy load in the front - Always sit in a proper seating passenger seatback pocket or on WARNING position. the front passenger seat. Do not • The front seat passenger air bag • Kia does not endorse nor will it hang onto the front passenger is much larger than the steering support any changes to any part seat. Do not hang any items such wheel air bag and inflates with or structure of the vehicle that as seatback table on the front pas- considerably more force. It can could affect the advanced air bag senger seatback. Do not place feet seriously hurt or kill a passenger on the front passenger seatback. system, including the occupant who is not in the proper position Do not place any items under the detection system. and wearing the safety belt prop- Specifically, the front passenger front passenger seat. Any of these could interfere with proper sensor erly. The front passengers should seat, dashboard or door should always move their seat as far not be replaced except by an operation. authorized Kia dealer using origi- back as practical and sit back in nal Kia parts designed for this their seat. vehicle and model. • It is essential that the front pas- (Continued) senger always wears their safety belts, even when the vehicle is moving in a parking lot or up a dri- veway into garage. (Continued)
3 90 Features of your vehicle
• Emergency power backup in case your (Continued) (Continued) car’s electrical system is disconnected • If the driver brakes the vehicle • Do not put objects or stickers on in a crash. heavily prior to an impact, unbelt- the instrument panel. Do not The SRS uses a collection of sensors to ed occupants will be thrown for- apply any accessory to the front gather information about the driver’s seat ward. If the front passenger is not windshield. Do not install after- position, the driver’s and front passenger’s wearing the safety belts, they will market mirrors or accessories on safety belt usage and impact severity. be directly in front of the storage the factory-installed rearview mir- The driver’s seat position sensor, which compartment when deployment ror. Any of these could interfere is installed on the seat track, determine if occurs. In that situation, serious with the deployment of the air bag the seat is fore or aft of a reference posi- injury or death is possible. or could hit your body at high tion. Similarly, the safety belt usage sen- • Never allow front passenger to speed and cause severe bodily sors determine if the driver and front pas- put their hands, feet or face on or injury and even death. senger’s safety belts are fastened. These close to the instrument panel. In sensors provide the ability to control the the event of air bag deployment, SRS deployment based on how close the such a mispositioned occupant Air bag system components driver’s seat is to the steering wheel, would be likely to suffer severe The main components of your SRS are: whether or not the safety belts are fas- injury or death. • To indicate that your vehicle is tened, and the severity of the impact. • Never allow children, pregnant equipped with air bags, the corre- women or weak persons to sit in sponding air bag covers are marked the front passenger seat. Do not with “SRS AIR BAG”. put child restraint system on the - Driver’s air bag front passenger's seat either. - Passenger’s air bag They may be seriously injured by - Side air bag the air bag inflation when air bag - Curtain air bag deploys. • A diagnostic system that continually (Continued) monitors the system operation. • An indicator light to warn you of a pos- sible problem with the system.
391 Features of your vehicle
The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation with two lev- CAUTION WARNING els. A first stage level is provided for mod- If the seat position sensor is not • Modification to the seat structure erate-severity impacts. A second stage working properly, the SRS air bag can adversely affect the seat level is provided for more severe impacts. warning light on the instrument position sensor and cause the air According to the impact severity, seating panel will illuminate even if there is bag to deploy at a different level position and safety belt usage, the no malfunction of the SRS air bag than should be provided. SRSCM (SRS Control Module) controls system, because the SRS air bag • Failure to properly wear safety the air bag inflation. Failure to properly warning light is connected with the belts can increase the risk or wear safety belts can increase the risk seat position sensor. If the SRS air severity of injury by causing the or severity of injury in an accident. bag warning light does not illumi- air bags to deploy at a different Additionally, your SRS is equipped with nate when the ignition key is turned level than should be provided. to the "ON" position, if it remains an occupant detection system in the front • Do not place any objects under- illuminated after illuminating or passenger’s seat. The occupant detec- neath the front seats which could blinking for approximately 6 sec- tion system detects the presence of a damage the seat position sensor onds, or if it illuminates while the passenger in the front passenger’s seat or interfere with the occupant vehicle is being driven, have an and will turn off the front passenger’s air detection system. bag under certain conditions. For more authorized Kia dealer inspect the seat position sensor and the • Do not place any objects that may detail, see “Occupant Detection System” cause magnetic fields near the in this section. advanced SRS air bag system as soon as possible. front seat. These may cause a malfunction of the seat position sensor. (Continued)
3 92 Features of your vehicle
(Continued) WARNING • Ignoring the SRS indicator light (air bag indicator and passenger • You must always sit as far back air bag off indicator) can result in from the steering wheel air bag as serious or fatal injury if the air possible (chest at least 250 mm bags occupant detection system (10 inches) away from the steer- or pre-tensioners do not work ing wheel), while still maintaining properly. Have your car checked a comfortable seating position for by a dealer as soon as possible if good vehicle control, in order to the SRS warning light alerts you reduce the risk of injury or death in a collision. to a potential problem. 1VQA2076 • Sitting improperly or out of posi- • Never place objects over the air tion can result in serious or fatal bag storage compartments or injury in a crash. All occupants between the air bags and your- should sit upright in their seats self. Due to the speed and force of with their feet on the floor until the air bag inflation, such objects the vehicle is parked and the igni- could hit your body at high speed tion key is removed. and cause severe bodily injury and even death. • Do not put stickers or ornaments on the steering wheel cover. These may interfere with the HLZ2120 deployment of the air bag. Driver’s air bag Your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating position. The driver’s air bag is stored in the cen- ter of the steering wheel.
393 Features of your vehicle
WARNING • Do not use any accessory seat covers for the vehicle equipped with side air bags. Use of seat covers could interfere with side air bag deployment. If seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia OVQ028077 OVQ037900N dealer. Inform them that your vehicle is equipped with side air bags and an occupant detection system. • Do not make modifications or additions to the seats. If inappro- priate seats are used, unexpected injury may result in due to the malfunction of the air bag sys- tem. • Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto HLZ2121 OVQ032310N doors, put their arms on the Front passenger’s air bag Side air bag (if equipped) doors, stretch their arms out of Front passenger’s air bag is stored in the Side air bags are stored in the left side of the window, or place objects instrument panel on the glove box. the driver’s seat, right side of the front between the doors and passen- gers when they are seated on Since you cannot know which air bags passenger’s seat. If air bag inflation conditions are met seats equipped with side and/or will deploy or from what direction, never curtain air bags. put any objects or ornaments on the (side collision), they will inflate. instrument panel.
3 94 Features of your vehicle
• If the curtain air bag deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 (Continued) seconds. The curtain air bag deploy- • When children are seated in the ment occurs only on the side of the rear outboard seats, they must be vehicle affected by the impact. seated in the proper child • The side air bags (side and curtain air restraint system. Make sure to put bags) are not designed to deploy dur- the child restraint system as far ing collisions from the front or rear of away from the door side as possi- the vehicle or in most rollover situa- ble, and secure the child restraint tions. system in a locked position. • The curtain air bags are designed to • Do not allow the passengers to OVQ036017N deploy only during certain side-impact lean their heads or bodies onto collisions, depending on the crash doors, put their arms on the severity, angle, speed and impact. The doors, stretch their arms out of curtain air bags are not designed to the window, or place objects deploy in all side impact situations. between the doors and passen- gers when they are seated on WARNING seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags. • In order for side air bags (side and curtain air bags) to provide • Never try to open or repair any its best protection, both front seat components of the side curtain occupants and both outboard air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized Kia OVQ032093N rear occupants should sit in an dealer. Curtain air bag (if equipped) upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Failure to follow the above men- Curtain air bags are located along both Importantly, children should sit in tioned instructions can result in sides of the roof rails above the front and a proper child restraint system in injury or death to the vehicle occu- rear doors. the rear seat. pants in an accident. It is designed to help protect the heads of (Continued) the front seat occupants and the rear out- board seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.
395 Features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag) There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expect- ed to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.
OVQ031902N-1/1VQA2081/1VQA2080/OVQ031700/1VQA2323 Air bag collision sensors (1) SRS control module (3) Side impact sensor (if equipped) (2) Front impact sensor (4) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
3 96 Features of your vehicle
WARNING (Continued) • Problems may arise if the sensor • Do not hit or allow any objects to installation angles are changed impact the locations where air bag due to the deformation of front or sensors are installed. bumper, body or B/C pillar where This may cause unexpected air side collision sensors are bag deployment, which could installed. Have the vehicle result in serious personal injury checked and repaired by an or death. authorized Kia dealer. • If the installation location or • Your vehicle has been designed angle of the sensors is altered in to absorb impact and deploy the any way, the air bags may deploy air bag(s) in certain collisions. 1VQA2084 when they should not or they may Installing aftermarket bumper not deploy when they should, guards or replacing a bumper Air bag inflation conditions causing severe injury or death. with non-genuine parts may Front air bag Therefore, do not try to perform adversely affect your vehicles Front air bags are designed to inflate maintenance on or around the air collision and air bag deployment when the impact is delivered to front col- bag sensors. Have the vehicle performance. lision sensors depending on the intensity, checked and repaired by an speed or angles of impact of the front authorized Kia dealer. collision - generally from an area a little (Continued) to the left to a little to the right of straight ahead.
397 Features of your vehicle
Although the front air bags (driver’s and front passenger’s air bags) are designed to inflate only in frontal collision, it may inflate in any collision if front impact sen- sors detect a sufficient impact. Side air bags (side and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate only in side impact collision, it may inflate in any collision if side impact sensors detect a sufficient OVQ036018N impact. If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive 1VQA2086 carefully on unimproved roads or on sur- Air bag non-inflation conditions faces not designed for vehicle traffic to • In certain low-speed collisions the air prevent unintended air bag deployment. bags may not deploy. The air bags are To protect occupants, front air bags or designed not to deploy in such cases pre-tensioner seat belts may deploy in because the risk of injuries which can certain side impact collisions. be caused by the air bags exceeds the OVQ032016N benefits they provide in protecting Side air bags (if equipped) occupants. Side air bags (side and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sen- sors depending on the strength, speed or angles of impact of side impact of side impact collision or rollover.
3 98 Features of your vehicle
OUN036087 OVQ036018N 1VQA2089 • Frontal air bags are not designed to • Front air bags may not inflate in side • In a slant or angled collision, the force inflate in rear collisions, because occu- impact collision, because occupants of impact may direct the occupants in a pants are moved backward by the move to the direction of the collision, direction between the front and side air force of the impact. In this case, the air and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag bags, and thus the sensors may not bags do not provide proper protection. deployment does not provide occupant deploy any air bags. protection. However, side or curtain air bags may inflate depending on the intensity, vehi- cle speed and angles of impact.
399 Features of your vehicle
1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092 • Just before impact, drivers often brake • Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci- • Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the dents because air bag deployment collides with objects such as utility front portion of the vehicle causing it to would not provide proper protection to poles or trees, where the point of “ride” under a vehicle with a higher the occupants. impact is concentrated to one area and ground clearance. Air bags may not However, side air bags may inflate the full force of the impact is not deliv- inflate in this "under-ride" situation when the vehicle is rolled over by a ered to the sensors. because deceleration forces that are side impact collision, if the vehicle is detected by sensors may be signifi- equipped with side air bags and cur- cantly altered by such “under-ride” col- tain air bags. lisions.
3 100 Features of your vehicle
Air bag system operation • Air bag deployment depends on a • In order to help provide protection in a • Air bag only operates when the ignition number of factors including vehicle severe collision, the air bags must switch is turned to the ON or START speed, angles of impact and the densi- inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag positions. ty and stiffness of the vehicles or inflation is a consequence of the objects which your vehicle hits in the extremely short time in which a collision • Air bags inflate instantly in the event of collision. However, factors are not limit- occurs and the need to get the air bag serious frontal or side collision (if ed to those mentioned above. between the occupant and the vehicle equipped with side air bag or curtain structures before the occupant impacts air bag) in order to help protect the • The front air bags will completely those structures. This speed of inflation occupants from serious physical injury. inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see reduces the risk of serious or life- • There is no single speed at which the threatening injuries in a severe collision air bags will inflate. the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will sim- and is thus a necessary part of air bag Generally, air bags are designed to ply see the deflated air bags hanging design. inflate by the severity of a collision and out of their storage compartments after However, air bag inflation can also its direction. These two factors deter- the collision. cause injuries which normally can mine whether the sensors send out an include facial abrasions, bruises and electronic deployment/inflation signal. broken bones, and sometimes more serious injuries because that inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal force. • There are even circumstances under which contact with the steer- ing wheel air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel.
3101 Features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke WARNING - Seated When the air bags inflate, they make a WARNING positioning loud noise and they leave smoke and When the air bags deploy, the air • Driver should sit as far back (at powder in the air inside of the vehicle. bag related parts in steering wheel least 250 mm (10 inches) away) This is normal and is a result of the igni- and/or instrument panel and/or in from the steering wheel air bag as tion of the air bag inflator. After the air both sides of the roof rails above possible to reduce the risk of bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis- the front and rear doors are very injury or death in a collision. The comfort in breathing due to the contact of hot. To prevent injury, do not touch front passenger should always your chest to both the safety belt and the the air bag storage areas internal move their seat as far back as air bag, as well as from breathing the components immediately after an possible and sit back in their smoke and powder. We strongly urge air bag has inflated. seat. you to open your doors and/or win- • Air bag inflates instantly in an dows as soon as possible after impact event of collision, passengers in order to reduce discomfort and pre- may be injured by the air bag vent prolonged exposure to the expansion force if they are not in smoke and powder. proper position. Though smoke and powder are non- • Air bag inflation may cause toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin injuries which normally include (eyes, nose and throat etc). If this is the facial or bodily abrasions, injuries case, wash and rinse with the cold water by the broken glasses or burns by immediately and consult the doctor if the the explosives. symptom persists.
3 102 Features of your vehicle
WARNING • Never put child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries. • When children are seated in the rear outboard seats in which side air bags are equipped, be sure to put the child restraint system as far away from the door side as 1JBH3051 possible, and secure the child W7-147 Installing a child restraint on a restraint system to be locked in Air bag warning light position. front passenger’s seat is forbid- The purpose of the air bag warning light den. Inflation of side or curtain air bag in your instrument panel is to alert you of could cause serious injury or Never place a rear-facing child restraint a potential problem with your air bag - death due to the expansion in the front passenger’s seat. If the air Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). impact. bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac- When the ignition switch is turned ON, ing child restraint, causing serious or the indicator light should blink or illumi- fatal injury. nate for approximately 6 seconds, then In addition, do not place front-facing child go off. restraint in the front passenger’s seat Have the system checked if: either. If the front passenger air bag • The light does not turn on briefly when inflates, it would cause serious or fatal you turn the ignition ON. injuries to the child. • The light stays on after the engine starts. • The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
3103 Features of your vehicle
SRS care When repairing or scrapping the Your Supplemental Restraint System is WARNING - No mainte- vehicles virtually maintenance-free. There are no nance or repair • Repairing steering wheel, instrument parts which you can service. • Do not modify your steering panel, center console or roofs, or You must have the system serviced wheel, seat or any other part of installing car audio around center con- under the following circumstances: the Supplemental Restraint sole could disable the air bag system. Have them checked by an authorized • If an air bag ever inflates, the air bag System. Modification could make Kia dealer. must be replaced. Do not try to remove the system inoperable. or discard the air bag by yourself. This • Do not work on the system’s com- • When leaving the vehicle at an autho- must be done by an authorized Kia ponents or wiring. This could rized Kia dealer, inform the facility that dealer. cause the air bags to inflate inad- the vehicle is equipped with air bag system, and leave the owner’s manual • If the air bag warning indicator light vertently, possibly seriously injur- in the vehicle. alerts you to a problem, have the air ing someone. Working on the sys- bag system checked as soon as possi- tem could also disable the sys- • Since air bag system contains explo- ble. Otherwise, your air bag system tem so that the air bags would not sive chemical substances, contact an may be ineffective. deploy in a collision. authorized Kia dealer when scrapping • Any work on the SRS system, the vehicle. such as removing, installing, WARNING - No modifica- repairing, or any work on the tion steering wheel must be per- Do not modify any part of the air formed by a qualified Kia techni- bag system. Modification could cian. Improper handling of the air make the air bag system ineffective bag system may result in serious or could cause unnecessary personal injury or death. deployment.
3 104 Features of your vehicle
(if equipped)
OVQ039411/OVQ039020N/1VQA2096 Air bag warning label Air bag warning labels which are now required by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) are attached to alert dri- ver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system. Note that these government warnings focus on the risk to children, Kia also wants you to be aware of the risks which adults are exposed to. Those have been described in previous pages.
3105 Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL Power steering ✽ NOTICE CAUTION Power steering uses energy from the If the vehicle is parked for extended engine to assist you in steering the vehi- • Never hold the steering wheel periods outside in cold weather (below - cle. If the engine is off or if the power against a stop (extreme right or 10 °C/14 °F), the power steering may steering system becomes inoperative, left turn) for more than 5 seconds require increased effort when the engine the vehicle may still be steered, but it will with the engine running. Holding is first started. This is caused by require increased steering effort. the steering wheel for more than increased fluid viscosity due to the cold 5 seconds in either position may Should you notice any change in the weather and does not indicate a mal- cause damage to the power steer- effort required to steer during normal function. ing pump. vehicle operation, have the power steer- When this happens, increase the engine ing checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer. • If the power steering drive belt RPM by depressing accelerator until the breaks or if the power steering RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or pump malfunctions, the steering let the engine idle for two or three min- effort will greatly increase. utes to warm up the fluid.
3 106 Features of your vehicle
Tilt steering A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust WARNING the steering wheel before you drive. You • Never adjust the angle of the can also raise it to the highest level to steering wheel while driving. You give your legs more room when you exit may lose your steering control and enter the vehicle. and cause an accident that gives rise to severe personal injury or The steering wheel should be positioned death. so that it is comfortable for you to drive, • After adjusting, push the steering while permitting you to see the instru- wheel both up and down to be ment panel warning lights and gauges. certain it is locked in position.
OVQ036021N To change the steering wheel angle, pull up the lock release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2), then release the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.
3107 Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS Outside rearview mirror CAUTION Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving. Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface Your vehicle is equipped with both left- of the glass. If ice should restrict hand and right-hand outside rearview movement of the mirror, do not mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted force the mirror for adjustment. To remotely with the remote switch. The mir- remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a ror heads can be folded back to prevent sponge or soft cloth with very warm damage during an automatic car wash or water. when passing in a narrow street.
WARNING - Rearview mir- CAUTION OVQ040110 rors If the mirror is jammed with ice, do Folding the outside rearview • The right outside rearview mirror not adjust the mirror by force. Use mirror is convex. Objects seen in the an approved spray de-icer (not radi- To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the mirror are closer than they ator antifreeze) to release the housing of mirror and then fold it toward appear. frozen mechanism or move the the rear of the vehicle. • Use your interior rearview mirror vehicle to a warm place and allow or direct observation to deter- the ice to melt. mine the actual distance of fol- lowing vehicles when changing lanes.
3 108 Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) CAUTION The outside rearview mirror heater is • The mirrors stop moving when actuated in connection with the rear win- they reach the maximum adjust- dow defroster. To heat the outside ing angles, but the motor contin- rearview mirror glass, push the button for ues to operate while the switch is the rear window defroster. depressed. Do not depress the The rearview mirror heater (and rear win- switch longer than necessary, the dow defroster) will not operate unless the motor may be damaged. engine is running. • Do not attempt to adjust the out- The outside rearview mirror glass will be side rearview mirror by hand. heated for defrosting or defogging and Doing so may damage the parts. will give you improved rear vision in 1VQA2108 inclement weather conditions. Push the Electric remote control button again to turn the heater off. The The electric remote control mirror switch outside rearview mirror heater automati- allows you to adjust the position of the cally turns off after 20 minutes. left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror, move the lever (1) to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point ( ) on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right. After adjustment, put the lever into neu- tral position to prevent the inadvertent adjustment.
3109 Features of your vehicle
Inside rearview mirror Electric chromic mirror (ECM) Adjust the rearview mirror to center on (if equipped) the view through the rear window. Make Day/Night lever The electric rearview mirror automatical- this adjustment before you start driving. ly controls the glare from the headlights of the car behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor WARNING - Rear visibility mounted in the mirror senses the light Do not place objects in the rear seat level around the vehicle, and through a or cargo area which would interfere Day chemical reaction, automatically controls with your vision out the rear win- the headlight glare from vehicles behind dow. you. Night When the engine is running, the glare is OVQ028105 automatically controlled by the sensor Day/night rearview mirror mounted in the rearview mirror. WARNING Make this adjustment before you start Whenever the shift lever is shifted into Do not adjust the rearview mirror driving and while the day/night lever is in reverse (R), the mirror will automatically while the vehicle is moving. This the day position. go to the brightest setting in order to could result in loss of control, and Pull the day/night lever toward you to improve the drivers view behind the vehi- an accident which could cause reduce glare from the headlights of vehi- cle. death, serious injury or property cles behind you during night driving. damage. Remember that you lose some rearview CAUTION clarity in the night position. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material WARNING dampened with glass cleaner. Do Do not modify the inside mirror and not spray glass cleaner directly on do not install a wide mirror. It could the mirror as that may cause the liq- result in injury, during an accident uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous- or deployment of the air bag. ing.
3 110 Features of your vehicle
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn rearview display off while vehicle is in reverse,. Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn Rearview display rearview display on while vehicle is in reverse.
Indicator Sensor
1KMA3084 OVQ020601N Type A Type B To operate the electric rearview mirror To operate the electric rearview mirror • The mirror defaults to the ON position • The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned whenever the ignition switch is turned on. on. • Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn • Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. the automatic dimming function off The mirror indicator light will turn off. unless vehicle is in reverse. Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn The mirror indicator light will turn off. the automatic dimming function on. Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn The mirror indicator light will illuminate. the automatic dimming function on unless vehicle is in reverse. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
3111 Features of your vehicle
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn Compass display rearview display off while vehicle is in reverse. Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn rearview display on while vehicle is in reverse.
Rearview display
OVQ036025N OVQ032360N Type C Type D To operate the electric rearview mirror To operate the electric rearview mirror (with homelink wireless control sys- (with homelink wireless control sys- tem) tem, rearview display and compass) Press the I button (1) to turn the auto- • The mirror defaults to the ON position matic- dimming function on. The mirror whenever the ignition switch is turned indicator light will illuminate. on. Press the O button (2) to turn the auto- • Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn matic- dimming function off. The mirror the automatic dimming function off indicator light will turn off. unless vehicle is in reverse. The mirror indicator light will turn off. • Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on unless vehicle is in reverse. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
3 112 Features of your vehicle
Compass (if equipped) Calibration procedure Setting the compass zone To operate Compass feature Press and hold the button (2) between 9 1.Determine the desired Zone Number Press and release the button (2), then and 12 seconds. Release the button based upon your current location on the vehicle's directional heading will be when a "C" appears in the display, which the Zone Maps below. displayed. indicates the compass needs calibration. 2.Press and hold the button (2) for more Pressing and releasing the button again 1. Driving the vehicle in a circle at less than 6 but less than 9 seconds, the will turn off the display. than 8km/h 2 times or until the com- current Zone Number will appear on pass heading appears. the display. 2. Driving in a circle in right-handed 3.Pressing and holding the button (2) Heading display direction and opposite direction are again will cause the numbers to incre- - E : East possible, and if the calibration is com- ment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14, - W : West pleted, the compass heading will 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button - S : South appear. when the desired Zone Number - N : North 3. Keep driving in a circle until a compass appears on the display will set the new ex) NE : North East heading appears. Zone. 4.Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.
3113 Features of your vehicle
Re-calibrating the Compass. There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle's magnetic field. Items such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna or even some body repair work on the vehicle can cause changes to the vehicle's magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct for these changes. To re-calibrate the compass: 1.Press and hold the button (2) between 9 and 12 seconds. Release the button when a "C" appears in the display, which indicates the compass needs calibration. 2.To re-calibrate the compass, drive the vehicle is 2 complete circles at less than 5 MPH.
B520C05NF
3 114 Features of your vehicle
WARNING Do not adjust the mirror angle or talk with rear passengers for a long time while driving. You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.
OVQ028107 Conversation mirror The mirror is a convenient feature to help the front passenger talk with rear pas- sengers without turning the head or body rearward. To use the mirror, push the cover and open it. Adjust mirror angle to the desired posi- tion. Close the cover after use.
3115 Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer 2. Turn signal indicators 3. Speedometer 4. Engine temperature gauge 5. Warning and indicator lights 6. Shift position indicator (Automatic transaxle only) 7. Odometer/Trip odometer ■ Type B 8. Fuel gauge
OVQ030026C/OVQ030027C
3 116 Features of your vehicle
GAUGES
OVQ036404N OVQ039032N OVQ022124K Speedometer Odometer/Trip odometer Odometer The speedometer indicates the forward You can choose the odometer, trip The odometer indicates the total dis- speed of the vehicle. odometer A and trip odometer B by tance the vehicle has been driven. pressing the reset button.
odometer ➝ TRIP A➝ TRIP B
ECOMINDERTM INDICATOR (ECO ON/OFF)* * : if equipped
3117 Features of your vehicle
OVQ022125 OVQ020125 OVQ036406N Trip odometer ECOMINDERTM INDICATOR Tachometer TRIP A: Trip odometer A ECO ON/OFF mode (if equipped) The tachometer indicates the approxi- TRIP B: Trip odometer B You can turn the ECOMINDERTM indica- mate number of engine revolutions per The trip odometer indicates the distance tor (which is identified on your instrument minute (rpm). of individual trips selected by the driver. dashboard by the “ECO” name) on/off on Use the tachometer to select the correct Trip odometer A and B can be reset to 0 the instrument cluster in this mode. shift points and to prevent lugging and/or by pressing the reset button for 1 second If you push the TRIP button more than 1 over-revving the engine. TM or more, and then releasing. second in the ECOMINDER indicator The tachometer pointer may move slight- ECO ON mode, then ECO OFF is dis- ly when the ignition switch is in ACC or played in the screen and the ECO indica- ON position with the engine OFF. This tor turns off. movement is normal and will not affect If you want to display the ECOMINDERTM the accuracy of the tachometer once the indicator ECO again, press the TRIP but- engine is running. ton more than 1 second in the ECO OFF mode and then ECO ON mode is dis- CAUTION played in the screen. Do not operate the engine within When you press the TRIP button less the tachometer's RED ZONE. than 1 second in the ECO mode, the This may cause severe engine dam- mode is changed to odometer. age.
3 118 Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Fuel gauge Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger. You must stop and obtain addition- al fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the E level.
OVQ039031N OVQ036033N CAUTION Engine temperature gauge Fuel gauge Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If you run out of fuel, it could This gauge shows the temperature of the The fuel gauge indicates the approxi- case the engine to misfire and engine coolant when the ignition switch mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel result in damage to the catalytic is ON. tank. converter. Do not continue driving with an overheat- Fuel tank capacity : 80 liters (21 US gallons) ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low to “Overheating” in the Index. fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty. CAUTION If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the “H” position, it indicates overheat- ing that may damage the engine.
3119 Features of your vehicle
1VQA2126 Instrument panel illumination When the vehicle’s parking lights or head- lights are on, rotate the illumination con- trol knob to adjust the instrument panel illumination intensity. The instrument cluster (Type B) illumina- tion intensity can be adjusted by rotating the control knob with the headlight switch in any position when the ignition switch is in ON position.
3 120 Features of your vehicle
TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED) Mode selection The compass is always displayed until the display is turned off. Push the MODE button to select distance to empty, driving time, average fuel con- sumption and outside temperature func- tions.
Distance to empty (RANGE)
OVQ020318 1VQA2211 The trip computer is a microcomputer- Driving time (ET) Compass (if equipped) controlled driver information system that The vehicle compass displays the direc- displays information related to driving, tion the vehicle is heading. including compass, distance to empty, Heading display driving time, average fuel consumption Average fuel consumption and outside temperature on the display (AVG) - E : East when the ignition switch is in ON posi- - W : West tion. All stored driving information is reset - S : South if the battery is disconnected. - N : North Outside temperature ex) NE : North East ✽ OFF NOTICE If new vehicle is first driven, perform calibration procedure as follows.
3121 Features of your vehicle
Calibration procedure 5. Press and hold the MODE button The compass may not indicate the cor- again for 2~4.5 seconds until the “turn” rect compass direction when you are dri- appears and “DIR” blinks in the display ving in certain areas (tunnel, parking and release the button. garage, underground parking lot, near 6. Drive your vehicle in at least 1 com- transformer substation, etc.), and the fol- plete (either clockwise or counter- lowing may occur: clockwise) circle at less than 5 km/h (3 • The compass headings become inac- mph) within 10 minutes until the com- curate. pass heading appears. • The compass heading doesn't change 7. If the vehicle’s compass headings when the vehicle changes direction. become inaccurate again, repeat • Some compass headings are not dis- steps 1 through 6 above. played. 1VQA2316 • The compass headings are inaccurate 1. Move the vehicle away from any large ✽ NOTICE in long distance driving. steel structures or power generating If you press the MODE button before If the vehicle's compass headings cables or equipment. the calibration is completed or the vehi- become inaccurate continuously, the 2. Check the terrestrial deviation angle cle is not rotated within 10 minutes after compass should be manually calibrated value by pressing and holding the “turn” appears and “DIR” blinks, the as follows: MODE button for 4.5 seconds until the correction will be cancelled. current terrestrial deviation angle value appears in the display. 3. If the terrestrial deviation angle value is different for your country, set the cor- rect angle referring to “Setting the compass zone” and perform the “Calibration procedure” again. 4. Make sure the vehicle windshield wipers are turned off.
3 122 Features of your vehicle
3. Release the MODE button and press ✽ NOTICE the RESET button repeatedly until the 1. Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc. correct terrestrial deviation angle value that is attached to the vehicle using a for your location appears in the display. magnet as anything attached to the 4. Press and hold the MODE button for roof of the vehicle with a magnet will more than 1 second, and then the dis- effect compass operation. play will show a compass direction. 2. If the compass deviates from the cor- rect indication after repeated adjust- ✽ NOTICE ment, have the compass checked at an If you press the MODE button for less authorized dealer. than 1 second before new compass zone 3. The compass may not indicate the is set, the correction is cancelled. correct compass point in tunnels or 1VQA2317 Also, if the correction is not completed while driving up or down a steep hill. Setting the compass zone within 30 seconds, the current terrestri- (The compass returns to the correct This compass must be set to compen- al deviation angle value will blink for 2 compass point when the vehicle moves sate for the variation between true north seconds and the correction is cancelled. to an area where the geomagnetism is and magnetic north. To set variation: stabilized.) 1. Find your current location and terres- trial deviation angle value on the zone map. 2. Press and hold the MODE button for 4.5 seconds. The current terrestrial deviation angle value will appear in the display.
3123 Features of your vehicle
Compass zone map
3 124 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE • If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupt- ed, the “Distance to empty” function may not operate correctly. The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi- cle. • The fuel consumption and distance to empty values may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving OVQ020319 habits, and condition of the vehicle. OVQ020320 Distance to empty (“RANGE” • The distance to empty value is an esti- Driving time (“ET” shown on dis- shown on display) mate of the available driving distance. play) This value may differ from the actual This mode indicates the estimated dis- driving distance available. This mode indicates the total time trav- tance to empty based on the current fuel eled since the last driving time reset. in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the delivered to the engine. When the driving time keeps going while the engine remaining distance is below 50 km (30 is running. miles), a blinking “----” symbol will be dis- The meter’s working range is from played. 0:00~99:59. The meter’s working range is from 50 to Pressing the RESET button for less than 1500 km (30 to 1500 miles). 4 seconds, when the driving time is being displayed, clears the driving time to zero.
3125 Features of your vehicle
OVQ020321 OVQ020322 OVQ020323 Average fuel consumption (“AVG” Outside temperature Unit conversion shown on display) This mode indicates the outside temper- The unit on each mode can be changed This mode calculates the average fuel ature around the vehicle. by pushing the RESET button for more consumption from the total fuel used and The meter’s working range is from than 4 seconds as follows: the distance since the last average con- -40°C to 60°C (-40°F~140°F). • Distance to empty: km ↔ MI sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal- • Average fuel consumption: l/100km ↔ culated from the fuel consumption input. MPG For an accurate calculation, drive more • Outside temperature: °C ↔ °F than 500 m (0.3 miles). The units on the mode of distance to The meter's working range is from 0.0 to empty and average fuel consumption are 99.9 l/100 km (0.0 to 99.9 miles per gal- changed together. However, the outside lon). temperature mode display units are Pressing the RESET button for less than changed separately. 4 seconds, when the average fuel con- sumption is being displayed, clears the average fuel consumption to “- -” until the vehicle is moved to 500 m (0.3 miles).
3 126 Features of your vehicle
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Checking operation ECOMINDERTM indica- TM All warning lights are checked by turning tor (if equipped) ECO ECOMINDER WARNING the ignition switch ON (do not start the Don't keep watching the “ECO” ECOMINDERTM indicator while dri- engine). Any light that does not illuminate The ECOMINDERTM indicator is a system ving. It may distract you while dri- should be checked by an Authorized Kia that illuminates “ECO” when the driver ving and cause an accident that Dealer. has reached optimum fuel efficiency. could result in severe personal After starting the engine, check to make TM • The ECOMINDER indicator will turn injury. sure that all warning lights are off. If any the ECO light green on the instrument are still on, this indicates a situation that panel when you are driving fuel effi- needs attention. When releasing the ciently in the ECO ON mode. parking brake, the brake system warning If you don't want the indicator dis- light should go off. The fuel warning light played, you can turn the ECO ON will stay on if the fuel level is low. mode to OFF mode by pressing the TRIP button. For ECO ON/OFF Mode operation, please refer to the previous page. • Fuel efficient driving can be influenced by driving habits and road conditions. • The indicator will not display while in P (Park), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse).
3127 Features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light Electronic brake force Safety belt warning light distribution (EBD) sys- tem warning light This warning light will illuminate for If two warning lights illumi- If the driver's safety belt is not fastened approximately 6 seconds each time you nate at the same time while when the key is turned ON or if it is turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- driving, your vehicle has a unfastened after the key is turned ON, tion. problem with ABS and EBD the safety belt warning light blinks until If this indicator does not go out, or if it illu- system. the belt fastened. minates while the vehicle is being driven, In this case, your ABS system and regu- see an authorized Kia Dealer for immedi- lar brake system may not work normally. Safety belt warning chime ate service. Have the vehicle checked by an (if equipped) Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as possi- If the driver's safety belt is not fastened ble. Anti-lock brake system when the ignition key is turned ON or if it (ABS) warning light is unfastened after the key is ON, the WARNING safety belt warning chime will sound for This light illuminates if the key is turned If the both ABS and Brake warning approximately 6 seconds. At this time, if to ON and goes off in approximately 3 lights are ON and stay ON, your the safety belt is fastened, the chime will seconds if the system is operating nor- vehicle’s brake system will not work stop at once. mally. normally. So you may experience an If the light stays on, you may have a unexpected and dangerous situa- High beam indicator problem with your ABS system. Contact tion during sudden braking. In this an authorized Kia dealer as soon as pos- case, avoid high speed driving and sible. abrupt braking. Have your vehicle checked by Authorized Kia Dealer This indicator illuminates when the head- as soon as possible. lights are on and in the high beam posi- tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.
3 128 Features of your vehicle
Engine oil pressure Parking brake & brake To check bulb operation, check whether warning fluid warning the parking brake and brake fluid warning Parking brake warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. This warning light indicates the engine oil This light is illuminated when the parking pressure is low. brake is applied with the ignition switch in If the warning light illuminates while dri- the START or ON position. The warning WARNING light should go off when the parking ving: Driving the vehicle with a warning brake is released while engine is run- 1. Drive safely to the side of the road and light on is dangerous. If the brake ning. stop. warning light remains on, have the Low brake fluid level warning 2. With the engine off, check the engine brakes checked and repaired imme- oil level. If the level is low, add oil as If the warning light remains on, it may diately by an authorized Kia Dealer. required. indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low. If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, call an If the warning light remains on: Parking start warning chime 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe Authorized Kia Dealer. If you drive over 10 km/h (6 mph) with the location and stop your vehicle. parking brake applied, the parking start 2. With the engine stopped, check the warning chime will sound. CAUTION brake fluid level immediately and add If the engine is not stopped imme- fluid as required. Then check all brake diately after the engine oil pressure components for fluid leaks. Front fog light indicator warning light is illuminated, severe 3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are (if equipped) damage could result. found, the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly. This light comes on when the front fog Have it towed to any Authorized Kia lights are ON. Dealer for a brake system inspection and necessary repairs. Shift pattern indicators (if equipped)
The individual indicators illuminate to show the automatic transaxle shift lever selection.
3129 Features of your vehicle
Taillight indicator Tailgate open Immobilizer indicator (if equipped) warning light
This light comes on when the taillights This warning light comes on when the This light illuminates when the immobiliz- are ON. tailgate is not closed securely. er key is inserted and turned to the ON position to start the engine. Door ajar warning light At this time, you can start the engine. The Charging system light goes out after the engine is running. warning If this light blinks when the ignition switch is in the ON position before starting the This warning light indicates a malfunction This warning light illuminates when a engine, have the system checked by an of either the generator or electrical door is not closed securely with the igni- authorized Kia Dealer. charging system. tion in any position. If the warning light comes on while the Low fuel level vehicle is in motion: Door ajar warning chime warning 1. Drive to the nearest safe location. If a door or tailgate is opened while dri- 2. With the engine off, check the genera- ving the vehicle over 10 km/h (6 mph), This warning light indicates the fuel tank tor drive belt for looseness or break- the warning chime will sound. is nearly empty. When it comes on, you age. should add fuel as soon as possible. 3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob- Driving with the fuel level warning light on lem exists somewhere in the electrical or with the fuel level below “E” can cause charging system. Have an Authorized the engine to misfire and damage the Kia Dealer correct the problem as catalytic converter. soon as possible.
3 130 Features of your vehicle
Malfunction indicator ESC indicator lamp (MIL) (check CAUTION (Electronic Stability ESC engine light) • Prolonged driving with the Control) Emission Control System This indicator light is part of the Engine The ESC indicator will illuminate when Malfunction Indicator Light Control System which monitors various the ignition switch is turned ON, but ( ) illuminated may cause dam- emission control system components. If should go off after approximately 3 sec- age to the emission control sys- this light illuminates while driving, it indi- onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors tems which could effect drivabili- cates that a potential problem has been the driving conditions and under normal ty and/or fuel economy. detected somewhere in the emission driving conditions, the ESC indicator will control system. • If the Emission Control System remain off. When a slippery or low trac- Malfunction Indicator Light ( ) Generally, your vehicle will continue to be tion condition is encountered, the ESC Illuminates, potential catalytic drivable, but have the system checked by will operate, and the ESC indicator will converter damage is possible an authorized Kia Dealer promptly. blink to indicate the ESC is operating. If which could result in loss of the ESC system malfunctions the indica- ✽ engine power. Have the Engine tor illuminates and stays on. Take your NOTICE Control System inspected as soon vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and A loose fuel filler cap may cause the On as possible by an authorized Kia have the system checked. Board Diagnostic System Malfunction Dealer. Indicator Light ( ) in the instrument panel to illuminate unnecessarily. ESC OFF indicator Low washer fluid level ESC Always make sure that the fuel filler cap OFF is tight. warning indicator (if equipped) The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate This warning light indicates the washer when the ignition switch is turned ON, fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the but should go off after approximately 3 washer fluid as soon as possible. seconds. To switch to ESC function off, press the ESC OFF button. The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated.
3131 Features of your vehicle
Cruise indicator (if equipped) Lights on warning chime CRUISE indicator The lights on warning chime will sound if CRUISE the headlight switch is left in the 1st or 2nd position and the driver’s door is opened. The indicator light illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled. Key reminder warning chime If the driver’s door is opened while the Cruise SET indicator ignition key is left in the ignition switch SET (ACC or LOCK position), the key reminder warning chime will sound. This The indicator light illuminates when the is to prevent you from locking your keys cruise function switch (COAST/SET or in the vehicle. RES/ACCEL) is ON.
3 132 Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHTS Map light WARNING The lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the doors, main control switch Do not use the interior lights when and corresponding light switch. driving in the dark. Accidents could happen because the view may be obscured by interior lights. Map lights operating logic Main control Door open/ Map light switch Main control switch switch status close status ON (depressed) DOOR (not depressed) OFF Any ON OFF Open or Lamp turns ON, ON then turns OFF after Close ➜ Open about 20 minutes*1) DOOR Close ON OFF*2) Lamp dims gradually over Open ➜ Close ON a 5-second period*3)
1VQA2141 ON ( ) Any Map light ON *1) If other door is opened while the light stays off after about 20 minutes, the light stays on again for about 20 minutes. *2) When a door is unlocked by the transmitter, the light stays on for about 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. When the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 15 seconds. *3) If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the light turns off immediately.
1VQA2140
3133 Features of your vehicle
Main control switch Dome light The lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the doors, main control switch and corresponding light switch.
Dome lights operating logic
Main control Door open/ Dome light switch switch status close status ON DOOR OFF 1VQA2141 OFF Any OFF Dome light - center/rear (if equipped) • Type A • Type B Lamp turns ON, Open or then turns OFF ON OFF Close ➜ Open after about 20 minutes*1) DOOR Close ON OFF*2) OFF Lamp dims Open ➜ Close ON gradually over OFF 1VQA2142/OUN026245 a 5-second Dome light - center (if equipped) period*3) ON ( ) Any ON
*1) If other door is opened while the light stays off after about 20 minutes, the light stays on again for about 20 minutes. *2) When a door is unlocked by the transmitter, the light stays on for about 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. When the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 15 seconds. *3) If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the light turns off immediately. 1VQA2333
3 134 Features of your vehicle
Main control switch Tailgate light The lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the tailgate, main control switch and corresponding light switch.
Tailgate light operating logic
Main control Tailgate open/ Tailgate light switch switch status close status DOOR OFF Open ON OFF 1VQA2141 OFF Tailgate light Close OFF
Lamp turns ON, Open or then turns OFF after OFF Close ➜ Open DOOR about 20 minutes Close or OFF Open ➜ Close
ON ( ) Any ON
1VQA2311
3135 Features of your vehicle
Front
OVQ036041N Rear OVQ036043N Glove box lamp The glove box lamp comes ON when the glove box is opened. The parking lights or headlights must be ON for the glove box lamp to function.
OVQ036042N Door courtesy lamp (if equipped) The door courtesy lamp comes ON when the door is opened to assist entering or exiting the vehicle. It also serves as a warning to passing vehicles that the vehi- cle door is open.
3 136 Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING Battery saver function Rescue mode function • The purpose of this feature is to pre- If your vehicle has any problem on the vent the battery from being dis- vehicle network system, the headlights charged. The system automatically (low beam) and parking lights turn on turns off the parking lights when the automatically with the ignition switch in driver removes the ignition key and the ON position even though the head- opens the driver- side door. light switch is not turned on. At this time, • With this feature, the parking lights will the emergency lighting is not turned off be turned off automatically if the driver when the headlight switch is turned off. parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, per- CAUTION form the following : If the rescue mode occurs, have OVQ041129 1) Open the driver-side door. your vehicle checked by an autho- Lighting control 2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON rized Kia dealer as soon as possi- The light switch has a Headlight and a again using the light switch on the ble. Parking light position. steering column. To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the fol- CAUTION lowing positions: (1) OFF position If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except dri- (2) Parking light position ver's door), the battery saver func- (3) Headlight position tion does not operate. Therefore, it causes the battery to be dis- charged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.
3137 Features of your vehicle
OVQ041130 OVQ041131 OVQ041134 Parking light position ( ) Headlight position ( ) High - beam operation When the light switch is in the parking When the light switch is in the headlight To turn on the high beam headlights, light position (1st position), the tail, posi- position (2nd position) the head, tail, push the lever away from you. Pull it back tion, license and instrument panel lights position, license and instrument panel for low beams. are ON. lights are ON. The high-beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched ✽ NOTICE on. The ignition switch must be in the ON To prevent the battery from being dis- position to turn on the headlights. charged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.
3 138 Features of your vehicle
Lane change signals (B) To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position. The lever will return to the OFF position when released. If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.
✽ NOTICE OVQ041132 OVQ041133 If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, bulb may be burned out or have Flashing headlights Turn signals (A) a poor electrical connection in the cir- To flash the headlights, pull the lever The ignition switch must be on for the cuit. towards you. It will return to the normal turn signals to function. To turn on the (low-beam) position when released. The turn signals, move the lever up or down. headlight switch does not need to be on Green arrow indicators on the instrument to use this flashing feature. panel indicate which turn signal is oper- ating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position.
3139 Features of your vehicle
Daytime running light (if equipped) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be help- ful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system will make your high- beam headlights turn OFF when: 1. The head light switch is ON. OVQ041135 2. The parking brake engaged. Front fog light (if equipped) 3. Engine stops. Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility and avoid accidents when visibil- ity is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn on when fog light switch (1) is turned to ON after the head- light is turned on. To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch to OFF.
CAUTION When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor or unnecessary battery and generator drain could occur.
3 140 Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield wiper/washer A : Wiper speed control · MIST – Single wipe · OFF – Off · INT/AUTO – Intermittent wipe or AUTO control wipe · LO – Low wiper speed · HI – High wiper speed
B :Intermittent or Auto control wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes OKM040902N D : Rear wiper/washer control Windshield wipers · – Spraying washer fluid Operates as follows when the ignition Rear window wiper/washer · OFF – Off switch is turned ON. (if equipped) · INT – Intermittent wipe (if equipped) MIST: For a single wiping cycle, push the · ON – Continuous wipe lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position. The · – Wash with brief wipes wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held. OFF : Wiper is not in operation INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in a light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).
OKM040900N/OKM040901N LO : Normal wiper speed HI : Fast wiper speed
3141 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE If there is heavy accumulation of snow CAUTION or ice on the windshield, defrost the When washing the vehicle, set the windshield for about 10 minutes, or wiper switch in the OFF position to until the snow and/or ice is removed stop the auto wiper operation. before using the windshield wipers to Wiper may operate and be damaged ensure proper operation. if the switch is set in AUTO mode while washing vehicle. Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the pas- senger side windshield glass. Damage to system parts could OVQ038052N-1 occur and may not be covered by Auto control (if equipped) you vehicle warranty. The rain sensor located on the upper end When the starting the vehicle in win- of windshield glass senses the amount of ter, set the wiper switch in the OFF rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for position. Otherwise, wipers may the proper intervals. The more it rains, operate and ice may damage the the faster the wiper operates. When the windshield wiper blades. Always rain stops, the wiper stops. To vary the remove all snow and ice and defrost speed setting, turn the speed control the windshield properly prior to knob (1). operating the windshield wipers. If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is ON, or the speed control knob is turned toward the upward position when the wiper switch is in AUTO mode, wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set the wiper to OFF position when the wiper is not in use.
3 142 Features of your vehicle
Variable intermittent wipers CAUTION Set the lever to the INT/AUTO position When the ignition switch is ON and and choose the desired wiper interval by the windshield wiper switch is turning the ring(1). placed in the AUTO mode, use cau- tion in the following situations to One - touch wiper avoid any injury to the hands or other parts of the body: For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward and release it with the lever in the • Do not touch the upper end of the OFF position. windshield glass facing the rain sensor. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held. • Do not wipe the upper end of the windshield glass with a damp or OKM040903N wet cloth. CAUTION Windshield washers • Do not put pressure on the wind- • To prevent possible damage to In the OFF position, pull the lever gently shield glass. the wipers or windshield, do not toward you to spray washer fluid on the operate the wipers when the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 windshield is dry. cycles. • To prevent damage to the wiper Use this function when the windshield is blades, do not use gasoline, dirty. kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them. • To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.
3143 Features of your vehicle
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropri- ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir. The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.
OKM040904N CAUTION Rear window wiper and washer To prevent possible damage to the switch (if equipped) washer pump, do not operate the The rear window wiper and washer washer when the fluid reservoir is switch is located at the end of the wiper empty. and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer. WARNING - Spraying washer fluid and wiping Do not use the washer in freezing OFF - Wiper is not in operation temperatures without first warming INT - Intermittent wiper operation the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on ON - Normal wiper opertion contact with the windshield and - Wash with brief wipes obscure your vision.
3 144 Features of your vehicle
HORN DEFROSTER Type A CAUTION • To prevent damage to the con- ductors bonded to the inside sur- face of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window. • If you want to defrost and defog on the front windshield, refer to “Windshield Defrosting and OVQ049343 Defogging” in this section. Type B OVQ036055N To sound the horn, press the horn sym- To activate the rear window defroster, bol on your steering wheel. press the rear window defroster button Check the horn regularly to be sure it located in the center console switch operates properly. panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the CAUTION defroster is ON. If there is heavy accumulation of snow on • To sound the horn, press the area the rear window, brush it off before oper- indicated by the horn symbol on ating the rear defroster. your steering wheel (see illustra- OVQ049344 The rear window defroster automatically tion). The horn will operate only The defroster heats the window to when this area is pressed. turns off after 20 minutes or when the remove frost, fog and thin ice from the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the • Do not strike the horn severely to interior and exterior of the rear window, defroster, press the rear window operate it, or hit it with your fist. while engine is running. defroster button again. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.
3145 Features of your vehicle
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER Outside mirror defroster Type A (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the out- side mirror defroster, it will be operating at the same time when you operate the rear window defroster.
OVQ049031 Type B OVQ041030L ❈ The location of the front windshield deicer button may be different depending on your model. Front windshield deicer (if equipped) The engine must be running to enable this feature. To activate the front wind- shield deicer, press the front windshield deicer button. The indicator on the button OVQ049032 illuminates when the deicer is ON. The The hazard warning flasher causes the front windshield deicer automatically front and rear turn signal lights to flash turns off after 20 minutes or when the on and off, which serves as a warning to ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the other drivers to exercise caution when deicer, press the front windshield deicer approaching or passing your vehicle. button again. To activate the flasher, depress the haz- ard warning flasher switch. This switch operates in any ignition switch position. To turn the flashers off, depress the switch again. 3 146 Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Type A
1. Front temperature control knob 2. Rear temperature control knob* Type B 3. Front fan speed control knob 4. Air conditioning button* 5. Rear window defroster button 6. Mode selection knob 7. Air intake control button 8. Rear climate control selection button* or Outside (fresh) air position button 9. Rear fan speed control knob* *: if equipped
Type C
OVQ049301/OVQ049304/OVQ049305 3147 Features of your vehicle
OVQ049306 OVQ043313B OVQ049307 Front fan speed control knob To turn off the blowers Temperature control knob The ignition switch must be in the ON To turn off the blowers, turn the fan The temperature control knob allows you position for fan operation. speed control knob to the "0" position. to control the temperature of the air flow- The fan speed control knob allows you to ing from the ventilation system. To control the fan speed of the air flowing change the air temperature in the pas- from the ventilation system. To change senger compartment, turn the knob to the fan speed, turn the knob to the right the WARM (red) position for warm and for higher speed or left for lower speed. hot air or COOL (blue) position for cool- To turn off the fan, turn the knob to the er air. OFF (0) position.
3 148 Features of your vehicle
OVQ049308 Mode selection knob The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the venti- lation system.
1VQA2147 Outlet port locations
3149 Features of your vehicle
MAX/ A/C position (if equipped) Face position Floor - defrost position When you select the MAX Air flow is directed toward the Most of the air flow is direct- MAX A/C mode while the fan upper body and face. ed to the floor and the wind- A/C speed is on, the following Additionally, each outlet can shield with a small amount system settings will be made be controlled to direct the air directed to the side window automatically; discharged from the outlet. defrosters. • the air conditioning system (outlet port: B, E) (outlet port: A, C, D, E, F) will be turned on. • the recirculated air position Face - floor position Defrost position will be selected. Air flow is directed towards Most of the air flow is directed • the face mode will be the face and the floor. to the windshield with a small selected. (outlet port: B, C, E, F) amount of air directed to the If you select MAX A/C mode, side window defrosters. (outlet port: A, D, E) you will not be able to cancel Floor position the A/C system operation, or change the recirculated air Most of the air flow is direct- mode position. ed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being Set the fan speed control directed to the windshield knob to the desired speed and side window defroster. and rotate the temperature (outlet port: A, C, D, E, F) control knob to the COOL (blue) position for maximum cooling. (outlet port : B, E)
3 150 Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position With the recirculated air position selected, air from passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters 1VQA2148 OVQ049309 the vehicle from outside and Instrument panel vents Air intake control button is heated or cooled accord- If air flow control is not satisfactory, check This is used to select outside (fresh) air ing to the function selected. the instrument panel vents. The outlet position or recirculated air position. port (B, E) can be opened or closed sep- To change the air intake control position, arately using the horizontal thumbwheel. push the control button. To close the vent, rotate it left to the max- imum position. To open the vent, rotate it right to the desired position. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.
3151 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE It should be noted that prolonged oper- WARNING ation of the heating in recirculated air • Continued climate control system position will cause fogging of the wind- operation in the recirculated air shield and side windows and the air position may allow humidity to within the passenger compartment will increase inside vehicle which become stale. may fog the glass and obscure In addition, prolonged use of the air visibility. conditioning with the “recirculated air • Do not sleep in a vehicle with air position” selected, will result in exces- conditioning or heating system sively dry air in the passenger compart- on. It may cause serious harm or ment. death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature. OVQ049310 • Continued climate control system Air conditioning button operation in the recirculated air (if equipped) position can cause drowsiness or Push the A/C button to turn the air condi- sleepiness, and loss of vehicle tioning system on (indicator light will illu- control. Set the air intake control minate). Push the button again to turn the to the outside (fresh) air position air conditioning system off. as much as possible while driv- ing.
3 152 Features of your vehicle
Rear climate control ■ Front (if equipped) 1. Rear fan speed control knob To turn on the rear climate control sys- (from front seat) tem; 2. Rear temperature control knob* From the front seat (from front seat) 3. Rear climate control selection button* 1. Set the rear climate control selection (from front seat) (REAR CONTROL) button in the front 4. Rear fan speed control knob* climate control panel to the OFF posi- (from rear seat) tion. (if equipped) 5. Rear mode selection button* 2. Set the rear fan speed control knob in (from rear seat) the front climate control panel to the 6. Rear temperature control button* desired position. (from rear seat) 3. Set the rear temperature control knob *: if equipped in the front climate control panel to the desired position. (if equipped) ■ Rear (if equipped) 4. The rear mode is controlled according to the front mode control. (if equipped Type A Type B with both of the rear heater and air conditioner) If not equipped with either of the rear heater or air conditioner, rear air blows only from one side of lower or upper vents. 5. To turn on the rear air conditioning system (if equipped), turn on the air conditioning button in the front climate control panel.
OVQ049311/1VQA2168/OVQ049312
3153 Features of your vehicle
From the rear seat (if equipped) 1. Set the rear climate control selection (REAR CONTROL) button in the front climate control panel to the ON posi- tion. 2. Set the rear fan speed control knob on the rear climate control panel to the desired position. 3. Set the rear temperature control knob on the rear climate control panel to the desired position. (if equipped) 4. Select the desired rear mode button on the rear climate control panel. (if OVQ049313 OVQ043313A equipped) Rear fan speed control To turn off the blowers If not equipped with either of the rear From front seat To turn off the blowers, turn the fan heater or air conditioner, rear air blows Set the rear climate control selection speed control knob to the "0" position. only from one side of lower or upper (REAR CONTROL) button (if equipped) vents. to the OFF position and turn the rear fan 5. To turn on the rear air conditioning speed control (REAR) knob in the front system (if equipped), turn on the air climate control panel to the desired posi- conditioning button in the front climate tion. control panel. To change the rear fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed. Setting the knob to the OFF(0) position turns off the rear fan.
3 154 Features of your vehicle
OVQ049314 OVQ049315 OVQ049316 From rear seat (if equipped) Rear temperature control From rear seat (if equipped) Set the rear climate control selection (if equipped) Set the rear climate control selection (REAR CONTROL) button in the front cli- From front seat (REAR CONTROL) button in the front cli- mate control panel to the ON position Set the rear climate control selection mate control panel to the ON position and turn the rear fan speed control knob (REAR CONTROL) button (if equipped) and turn the rear temperature control on the rear control panel to the desired to the OFF position and turn the rear knob on the rear control panel to the position. temperature control (REAR TEMP) knob desired position. To change the rear fan speed, turn the in the front climate control panel to the To change the rear air temperature, turn knob to the right for higher speed or left desired position. the knob to the right for warmer air or left for lower speed. To change the rear air temperature, turn for cooler air. Setting the knob to the OFF(0) position the knob to the WARM (red) position for turns off the rear fan. warm and hot air or COOL (blue) posi- tion for cooler air.
3155 Features of your vehicle
with rear air conditioner • Front climate control is MAX A/C, : Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling. • Front climate control is : Rear air blows from the upper vents on OVQ028338 the rear ceiling and the lower vents on with rear heater the right rear trim together. • Front climate control is , , : Rear air blows from the lower vents on the right rear trim. ❇ If the rear air conditioner is not equipped, rear air blows only from the 1VQA2174 lower vents. OVQ049317 Rear mode selection (if equipped) ❇ If the rear heater is not equipped, rear When the rear climate control selection When the rear climate control selection air blows only from the upper vents. (REAR CONTROL) button in the front cli- (REAR CONTROL) button in the front cli- mate control panel is in the ON position, mate control panel is in the OFF position the rear mode is selected by pushing the or the button is not equipped, the rear rear mode selection button on the rear mode is controlled automatically depend- control panel as follows: ing on the mode of the front climate con- • : Rear air blows from the upper trol as follows: vents on the rear ceiling. • : Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling and the lower vents on the right rear trim together. • : Rear air blows from the lower vents on the right rear trim.
3 156 Features of your vehicle
System operation Air conditioning (if equipped) Ventilation Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled 1. Set the mode to the position. with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant. 2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position. 1. Start the engine. Push the air condi- tioning button. 3. Set the temperature control to the desired position. 2. Set the mode to the position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the 3. Set the air intake control to the outside desired speed. air or recirdulation air position. 4. Set the temperature control to the desired position. Heating 5. Set the fan speed control to the OVQ028339 1. Set the mode to the position. desired speed. Rear vents (if equipped) 2. Set the air intake control to the outside 6. Adjust the fan speed control and tem- (fresh) air position. The vent can be adjusted by rotating the perature control to maintain maximum blade. 3. Set the temperature control to the comfort. desired position. • When maximum cooling is desired, set ✽ NOTICE 4. Set the fan speed control to the the temperature control to the COOL If all the vents are closed, it may cause desired speed. (blue) position, set the air intake con- some noise. Always open 2 vents or 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn trol to the recirculated air position, then more. the air conditioning system (if set the fan speed control to the highest equipped) on. speed. • If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the , position.
3157 Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system opera- Checking the amount of air con- CAUTION tion tips ditioner refrigerant and compres- • When using the air conditioning • If the vehicle has been parked in direct sor lubricant system, monitor the temperature sunlight during hot weather, open the When the amount of refrigerant is low, gauge closely while driving up windows for a short time to let the hot the performance of the air conditioning is hills or in heavy traffic when out- air inside the vehicle escape. reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ- side temperatures are high. Air ence on the air conditioning system. conditioning system operation • To help reduce moisture inside of win- may cause engine overheating. dows on rainy humid days, decrease Therefore, if abnormal operation is Continue to use the blower fan the humidity inside the vehicle by oper- found, have the system inspected by an but turn the air conditioning sys- ating the air conditioning system. authorized Kia dealer. tem off if the temperature gauge • During air conditioning system opera- indicates engine overheating. tion, you may occasionally notice a CAUTION • When opening the windows in slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles on. The air conditioning system should humid weather air conditioning be serviced by an authorized Kia may create water droplets inside This is a normal system operation characteristic. dealer. Improper service may cause the vehicle. Since excessive serious injury. water droplets may cause dam- • Use the air conditioning system every age to electrical equipment, air month if only for a few minutes to conditioning should only be run ensure maximum system perform- with the windows closed. ance. CAUTION • When using the air conditioning sys- When the performance of the air tem, you may notice clear water drip- conditioning system is reduced it is ping (or even puddling) on the ground important that the correct type and under the passenger side of the vehi- amount of oil and refrigerant is cle. This is a normal system operation used. Otherwise, damage to the characteristic. compressor and abnormal system • Operating the air conditioning system operation may occur. in the recirculated air position does provide maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.
3 158 Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Type A
1. AUTO (automatic control) button 2. Driver’s temperature control button 3. A/C display 4. Passenger’s temperature control button 5. Dual temperature control selection button 6. Front fan speed control knob 7. OFF button 8. Mode selection button 9. Air conditioning button 10. Front windshield defrost button Type B 11. Rear window defrost button 12. Recirculated air position button 13. Rear climate control selection button 14. Rear temperature control button* 15. Rear fan speed control knob *: if equipped
OVQ049320/OVQ049321
3159 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE • To turn the automatic operation off, select any button or knob of the fol- lowing: - Mode selection button - Air conditioning button - Front windshield defrost button - Air intake control button - Fan speed control knob The selected function will be con- trolled manually while other functions operate automatically. OVQ049322 OVQ042422 • For your convenience and to improve Automatic heating and air condi- 2. Push the TEMP button to set the the effectiveness of the climate con- tioning desired temperature. trol, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 73°F (23°C). 1. Press the AUTO button. It is indicated • Regardless of the temperature setting, by AUTO on the display. when using automatic operation, the The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air conditioning system can automat- air-conditioning will be controlled auto- ically turn on to decrease the humidi- matically according to the temperature ty inside the vehicle, even if the tem- setting. perature is set to warm.
3 160 Features of your vehicle
Manual operation The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons select- ed. When pressing any button except AUTO button while automatic operation, the functions of the buttons not selected will be controlled automatically. Press the AUTO button in order to con- OVQ049156 vert to full automatic control of the sys- OVQ049323 tem. Temperature control button CAUTION The temperature will increase to the Never place anything over the sen- maximum 32°C/90°F (HI) by pushing the sor located on the instrument up button. Each push of the button will panel to ensure better control of the cause the temperature to increase by heating and cooling system. 0.5°C/1°F. The temperature will decrease to the mini- mum 17°C/62°F (LO) by pushing the down button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to decrease by 0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature set- ting, the air conditioning will operate con- tinuously.
3161 Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally 1. Press the DUAL button again to deac- tivate DUAL mode. The passenger side temperature will be set to the same as the driver side temperature. 2. Press the left temperature control but- ton. The driver and passenger side temperature will be adjusted equally.
Temperature conversion If the battery has been discharged or dis- OVQ049324 connected, the temperature mode dis- OVQ049325 Dual temperature control selec- play will reset to Centigrade. Front fan speed control knob tion button This is normal condition and you can The fan speed can be set to the desired Adjusting the driver and passenger side switch the temperature mode between speed by turning the fan speed control temperature individually Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows; knob. 1. Press the DUAL button to operate the While depressing the AUTO button, The higher the fan speed is, the more air driver and passenger side temperature depress the OFF button for 3 seconds or is delivered. individually. Pressing the right temper- more. The display will change from Pressing the OFF button turns off the ature control button will automatically Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from fan. switch to the DUAL mode as well. Fahrenheit to Centigrade. 2. Press the left temperature control to adjust the driver side temperature. Press the right temperature control to adjust the passenger side tempera- ture.
3 162 Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position With the recirculated air posi- WARNING tion selected, air from pas- • Continued climate control system senger compartment will be operation in the recirculated air drawn through the heating position may allow humidity to system and heated or cooled increase inside vehicle which according to the function may fog the glass and obscure selected. visibility. • Do not sleep in a vehicle with air Outside (fresh) air position conditioning or heating system With the outside (fresh) air on. It may cause serious harm or position selected, air enters death due to a drop in the oxygen OVQ049326 the vehicle from outside and level and/or body temperature. Air intake control button is heated or cooled according • Continued climate control system This is used to select outside (fresh) air to the function selected. operation in the reciruclated air position or recirculated air position. position can cause drowsiness or To change the air intake control position, ✽ NOTICE sleepiness, and loss of vehicle push the control button. control. Set the air intake control It should be noted that prolonged oper- to the outside (fresh) air position ation of the heating in recirculated air as much as possible while driving. position will cause fogging of the wind- shield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the “recirculated air position” selected, will result in exces- sively dry air in the passenger compart- ment.
3163 Features of your vehicle
OVQ049327 Mode selection button The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the venti- lation system. The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:
1VQA2147 Outlet port locations
3 164 Features of your vehicle
Face position Floor position Air flow is directed toward the Most of the air flow is direct- upper body and face. ed to the floor, with a small Additionally, each outlet can amount of the air being be controlled to direct the air directed to the windshield discharged from the outlet. and side window defroster. (outlet port: B, E) (outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)
Face - floor position Floor - defrost position Air flow is directed towards Most of the air flow is direct- the face and the floor. ed to the floor and the wind- (outlet port: B, C, E, F) shield with a small amount directed to the side window OVQ049328 defrosters. Defrost button (outlet port: A, C, D, E, F) Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters. (outlet port: A, D, E)
3165 Features of your vehicle
1VQA2148 OVQ049329 OVQ049330 Instrument panel vents Air conditioning button OFF button If air flow control is not satisfactory, check Push the A/C button to turn the air condi- Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli- the instrument panel vents. The outlet tioning system on (indicator light will illu- mate control system. However you can port (B, E) can be opened or closed sep- minate). still operate the mode and air intake but- arately using the horizontal thumbwheel. Push the button again to turn the air con- tons as long as the ignition switch is ON. To close the vent, rotate it left to the max- ditioning system off. imum position. To open the vent, rotate it right to the desired position. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.
3 166 Features of your vehicle
Rear climate control (if equipped) ■ Front To turn on the rear climate control sys- 1. Rear fan speed control knob tem; (from front seat) From the front seat 2. Rear temperature control button* (from front seat) 1. Set the rear climate control selection 3. Rear climate control selection button (REAR) button in the front climate con- (from front seat) trol panel to the OFF position. 4. Rear fan speed control knob 2. Set the rear fan speed control knob in (from rear seat) the front climate control panel to the 5. Rear mode selection button desired position. (from rear seat) 3. Set the rear temperature control button 6. Rear temperature control button in the front climate control panel to the (from rear seat) desired position. (if equipped) *: if equipped 4. The rear mode is controlled according to the front mode control. (if equipped ■ Rear (if equipped) with both of the rear heater and air conditioner) Type A Type B If not equipped with either of the rear heater or air conditioner, rear air blows only from one side of lower or upper vents. 5. To turn on the rear air conditioning system (if equipped), turn on the air conditioning button in the front climate control panel.
OVQ049331/1VQA2168/OVQ049312
3167 Features of your vehicle
From the rear seat (if equipped) 1. Set the rear climate control selection (REAR) button in the front climate con- trol panel to the ON position. 2. Set the rear fan speed control knob on the rear climate control panel to the desired position. 3. Set the rear temperature control knob on the rear climate control panel to the desired position. (if equipped) 4. Select the desired rear mode button on the rear climate control panel. (if equipped) OVQ049332 OVQ049334 If not equipped with either of the rear Rear fan speed control From rear seat (if equipped) heater or air conditioner, rear air blows From front seat Set the rear climate control selection only from one side of lower or upper Set the rear climate control selection (REAR) button in the front climate control vents. (REAR) button to the OFF position and panel to the ON position and turn the 5. To turn on the rear air conditioning turn the rear fan speed control (REAR) rear fan speed control knob on the rear system (if equipped), turn on the air knob in the front climate control panel to control panel to the desired position. conditioning button in the front climate the desired position. To change the rear fan speed, turn the control panel. To change the rear fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed. for lower speed. Setting the knob to the OFF position Setting the knob to the OFF position turns off the rear fan. turns off the rear fan.
3 168 Features of your vehicle
with rear air conditioner
OVQ028338 with rear heater
OVQ049333 OVQ049335 1VQA2174 Rear temperature control From rear seat (if equipped) Rear mode selection (if equipped) (if equipped) Set the rear climate control selection When the rear climate control control From front seat (REAR) button in the front climate control selection (REAR) button in the front cli- Set the rear climate control selection panel to the ON position and turn the mate control panel is in the OFF position, (REAR) button to the OFF position and rear temperature control knob on the rear the rear mode is controlled automatically set the rear temperature control (REAR control panel to the desired position. depending on the mode of the front cli- TEMP) button in the front climate control To change the rear air temperature, turn mate control as follows: panel to the desired position. the knob to the right for warmer air or left To change the rear air temperature, push for cooler air. the upper part ▲ of the button for warmer air or push the lower part ▼ of the button for cooler air.
3169 Features of your vehicle
• Front climate control is : Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling. • Front climate control is : Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling and the lower vents on the right rear trim together. • Front climate control is , , : Rear air blows from the lower vents on the right rear trim together. ❇ If the rear air conditioner is not equipped, rear air blows only from the OVQ049336 OVQ028339 lower vents. When the rear climate control selection Rear vents (if equipped) ❇ If the rear heater is not equipped, rear (REAR) button in the front climate control The vent can be adjusted by rotating the air blows only from the upper vents. panel is in the ON position, the rear blade. mode is selected by pushing the rear mode selection button on the rear control ✽ NOTICE panel as follows: If all the vents are closed, it may cause • : Rear air blows from the upper some noise. Always open 2 vents or vents on the rear ceiling. more. • : Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling and the lower vents on the right rear trim together. • : Rear air blows from the lower vents on the right rear trim.
3 170 Features of your vehicle
System operation Air conditioning CAUTION Ventilation Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled • When using the air conditioning 1. Set the mode to the position. with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant. system, monitor the temperature 2. Set the air intake control to the outside gauge closely while driving up (fresh) air position. 1. Start the engine. Push the air condi- tioning button. hills or in heavy traffic when out- 3. Set the temperature control to the 2. Set the mode to the position. side temperatures are high. Air desired position. conditioning system operation 4. Set the fan speed control to the 3. Set the air intake control to the outside may cause engine overheating. desired speed. air or recirculated air position. Continue to use the blower fan 4. Set the temperature control to the but turn the air conditioning sys- Heating desired position. tem off if the temperature gauge 1. Set the mode to the position. 5. Set the fan speed control to the indicates engine overheating. desired speed. 2. Set the air intake control to the outside • When opening the windows in (fresh) air position. 6. Adjust the fan speed control and tem- humid weather air conditioning perature control to maintain maximum 3. Set the temperature control to the may create water droplets inside comfort. desired position. the vehicle. Since excessive • When maximum cooling is desired, set water droplets may cause dam- 4. Set the fan speed control to the the temperature control to the minimum age to electrical equipment, air desired speed. LO (17°C/62°F) and set the air intake conditioning should only be run 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn to the recirculated air position, then set with the windows closed. the air conditioning system on. the fan speed control to the highest • If the windshield fogs up, set the mode speed. to the , position.
3171 Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system opera- • Operating the air conditioning system tion tips in the recirculated air position does CAUTION • If the vehicle has been parked in direct provide maximum cooling, however, The air conditioning system should sunlight during hot weather, open the continual operation in this mode may be serviced by an authorized Kia windows for a short time to let the hot cause the air inside the vehicle to dealer. Improper service may cause air inside the vehicle escape. become stale. serious injury. • To help reduce moisture inside of win- dows on rainy humid days, decrease Checking the amount of air con- the humidity inside the vehicle by oper- ditioner refrigerant and compres- CAUTION sor lubricant ating the air conditioning system. When the performance of the air • During air conditioning system opera- When the amount of refrigerant is low, conditioning system is reduced it is tion, you may occasionally notice a the performance of the air conditioning is important that the correct type and slight change in engine speed as the reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ- amount of oil and refrigerant is air conditioning compressor cycles on. ence on the air conditioning system. used. Otherwise, damage to the This is a normal system operation Therefore, if abnormal operation is compressor and abnormal system characteristic. found, have the system inspected by an operation may occur. • Use the air conditioning system every authorized Kia dealer. month if only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system perform- ance. • When using the air conditioning sys- tem, you may notice clear water drip- ping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehi- cle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
3 172 Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The dif- ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind- shield could cause the outer sur- face of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob to the position and fan speed OVQ049337 OVQ049338 control knob to the lower speed. Manual climate control system To defrost outside windshield To defog inside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest 1. Select any fan speed except “OFF (0)”. (extreme right) position. 2. Select desired temperature. 2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position. 3. Select the or position. 3. Select the position. 4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi- tioning will be selected automatically. 4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi- tioning will be selected automatically. If the air-conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatical- ly, press the corresponding button manu- ally.
3173 Features of your vehicle
WARNING Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The dif- ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind- shield could cause the outer sur- face of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob to the position and fan speed OVQ049339 OVQ049340 control knob to the lower speed. Automatic climate control system To defrost outside windshield To defog inside windshield 1. Set fan speed to the highest (extreme • For maximum defrosting, set the tem- 1. Select desired temperature. right) position. perature control to the extreme 2. Press the defrost button ( ). 2. Set temperature to the extreme hot right/hot position and the fan speed (HI) position. 3. The air-conditioning will be turned on control to the highest speed. according to the detected ambient tem- 3. Press the defrost button ( ). • If warm air to the floor is desired while perature, outside (fresh) air position 4. The air-conditioning will be turned on defrosting or defogging, set the mode and higher fan speed will be selected according to the detected ambient to the floor-defrost position. automatically. temperature and outside (fresh) air • Before driving, clear all snow and ice If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically. from the windshield, rear window, out- position and higher fan speed are not side rear view mirrors, and all side win- selected automatically, adjust the corre- dows. sponding button or knob manually. • Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield.
3 174 Features of your vehicle
Defogging logic Automatic climate control system Manual climate control system To reduce the probability of fogging up To reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield, the air intake the inside of the windshield, the air intake control is set to outside (fresh) air posi- control is set to the outside (fresh) air tion automatically if any of following position automatically if any of following occur. occur. • The ignition switch is turned on while • The mode is selected to the or the mode is selected to the , . while the system is activated. • The OFF button is pushed. • The mode is selected to the or • The ignition switch is turned on while the position. mode is selected to the or . In this case, the air conditioning will auto- In this case, the air conditioning will auto- OVQ049341 matically operate if the mode is selected matically operate if the mode is selected How to cancel or return defogging logic to the (while the fan is operated) or to the or (while the fan is operat- of manual climate control system . ed). 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- If you don’t want the air-conditioning or If you don’t want the air-conditioning or tion. outside (fresh) air position, press the cor- outside (fresh) air position, press the cor- 2. Turn the fan speed control knob to the responding button to cancel the opera- responding button to cancel the opera- OFF (0) position. tion. tion. 3. Turn the mode selection knob to the If the mode is selected to the posi- defrost position ( ). tion, higher fan speed will be selected 4. Push the air intake control button automatically regardless of the fan speed ( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec- control knob adjustment. onds. The indicator light in the air intake control button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the pro- grammed status. If the battery has been discharged or dis- connected, it is reset as the defog logic status. 3175 Features of your vehicle
CLUSTER IONIZER LUGGAGE NET HOLDER (IF EQUIPPED) (IF EQUIPPED) When the ignition switch is ON, the clus- ter ionizer turns on automatically as fol- lows:
Clean mode ION mode (CLEAN) (ION)
OVQ049342 How to cancel or return defogging logic OVQ036085N of automatic climate control system To keep items from shifting in the cargo 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- area, you can use the four holders locat- tion. ed in the cargo area to attach the lug- 2. Select the defrost position pressing gage net. defrost button ( ). Contact your authorized Kia dealer to 3. While holding the air conditioning but- obtain a luggage net. ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intake control button ( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds. The display panel blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status. If the battery has been discharged or dis- connected, it is reset as the defog logic status.
3 176 Features of your vehicle
ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED)
(Continued) (Continued) • When carrying cargo on the roof • Always drive slowly and turn cor- rack, take the necessary precau- ners carefully when carrying tions to make sure the cargo does items on the roof rack. Severe not damage the roof of the vehicle. wind updrafts, caused by passing • When carrying large objects on vehicles or natural causes, can the roof rack, make sure they do cause sudden upward pressure not exceed the overall roof length on items loaded on the roof rack. or width. This is especially true when car- rying large, flat items such as wood panels or mattresses. This could cause the items to fall off OVQ069206 WARNING the roof rack and cause damage If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can • The following specification is the to your vehicle or those around load cargo on top of your vehicle. maximum weight that can be you. loaded onto the roof rack. Crossbars and fixing components need- • To prevent damage or loss of Distribute the load as evenly as ed to install the roof rack on your vehicle cargo while driving, check fre- possible across the crossbars may be obtained from an authorized Kia quently before or while driving to and roof rack and secure the load dealer. make sure the items on the roof firmly. rack are securely fastened. CAUTION ROOF 165 lbs. (75 kg) • The crossbars should be placed RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED in the proper load carrying posi- • The vehicle center of gravity will CAUTION tions prior to placing items onto be higher when items are loaded • If the vehicle has a sunroof, do the roof rack. onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden not position the roof rack loads • If the vehicle is equipped with a starts, braking, sharp turns, so that they could interfere with sunroof, be sure not to position abrupt maneuvers or high speeds the sunroof. cargo onto the roof rack in such a that may result in loss of vehicle • Loading cargo or luggage above way that it could interfere with control or rollover causing an specification on the roof rack may sunroof operation. accident. damage your vehicle. (Continued) (Continued)
3177 Features of your vehicle
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Glare detection sensor Indicator light WARNING (Continued) • Retain the original transmitter for • When programming the ® future programming procedures HomeLink Wireless Control (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is System, you may be operating a also suggested that upon the sale garage door or gate operator. of the vehicle, the programmed Make sure that people and objects HomeLink® buttons be erased for are out of the way of the moving security purposes (follow step 1 door or gate to prevent potential in the “Programming” portion of harm or damage. this text). • Do not use HomeLink® with any Homelink® buttons garage door opener that lacks the OVQ036305N safety stop and reverse feature as Programming Your new mirror comes with an integrat- required by federal safety stan- ed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, dards. (This includes any garage Your vehicle may require the ignition which allows you to program the mirror to door opener model manufactured switch to be turned to the ACC position before April 1, 1982.) A garage for programming and/or operation of activate your garage door(s), estate gate, ® home lighting, etc. The mirror actually door opener which cannot detect HomeLink . It is also recommended that learns the codes from your various exist- an object, signaling the door to a new battery be replaced in the hand- ing transmitters. stop and reverse, does not meet held transmitter of the device being pro- current federal safety standards. grammed to HomeLink® for quicker train- * HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Using a garage door opener with- ing and accurate transmission of the Johnson Controls, Inc out these features increases risk radio-frequency. of serious injury or death. For Follow these steps to train your more information, call 1-800-355- HomeLink® mirror: 3515 or on the internet at www.homelink.com. (Continued)
3 178 Features of your vehicle
Flashing ✽ NOTICE Flashing For non rolling code garage door open- ers, follow steps 2 - 3. For rolling code garage door openers, follow steps 2 - 6. For Canadian Programming, please fol- low the Canadian Programming section. For help with determining whether your garage is non-rolling code or rolling code, please refer to the garage door openers owner’s manual or contact 1-3inches ® HomeLink customer service at 1-800- Transmitter OVQ036306N 355-3515. OVQ036307N 1. When programming the buttons for the 2. Press and hold the button on the first time, press and hold the left and HomeLink® system you wish to train center buttons ( , ) simultane- and the button on the transmitter while ously until the indicator light begins to the transmitter is approximately 1 to 3 flash after approximately 20 seconds. inches away from the mirror. Do not (This procedure erases the factory-set release the buttons until step 3 has default codes. Do Not perform this step been completed. to program additional hand-held trans- 3. The HomeLink® indicator light will mitters.) flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing light indicates successful programming of the new frequency sig- nal.) ✽ NOTICE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace step #3 with the “cycling” procedure noted in the “Canadian Programming” section of this document. 3179 Features of your vehicle
Rolling code programming Operating HomeLink® Flashing To train a garage door opener (or other To operate, simply press the pro- rolling code equipped devices) with the grammed HomeLink® button. Activation rolling code feature, follow these instruc- will now occur for the trained product tions after completing the “Programming” (garage door, security system, entry door portion of this text. (A second person lock, estate gate, or home or office light- may make the following training proce- ing). For convenience, the hand-held dures quicker & easier.) transmitter of the device may also be 4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on used at any time. The HomeLink® the device’s motor head unit. Exact Wireless Controls System (once pro- location and color of the button may grammed) or the original hand-held vary by product brand. If there is diffi- transmitter may be used to activate the culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but- device (e.g. garage door, entry door lock, OVQ036306N ton, reference the device’s owner’s etc.). In the event that there are still pro- Erasing programmed HomeLink® manual or contact HomeLink® at 1- gramming difficulties, contact buttons 800-355-3515 or on the internet at HomeLink® at 1-800-355-3515 or on the www.homelink.com. internet at www.homelink.com. To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased): 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button on the device’s motor • Press and hold the left and center head unit. You have 30 seconds to buttons simultaneously, until the indi- complete step number 6. cator light begins to flash (approxi- mately 20 seconds). Release both but- 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press tons. Do not hold for longer than 30 and release the programmed ® seconds. HomeLink button up to three times. ® The rolling code equipped device HomeLink is now in the train (or learn- should now recognize the HomeLink® ing) mode and can be programmed at signal and activate when the any time. HomeLink® button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not previously been done. Refer to the “Programming” portion of this text.
3 180 Features of your vehicle
Reprogramming a single Gate operator programming & Accessories HomeLink® button canadian programming If you would like additional information on To program a device to HomeLink® using During programming, your hand-held the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, a HomeLink® button previously trained, transmitter may automatically stop trans- HomeLink® compatible products, or to follow these steps: mitting. Continue to press and hold the purchase other accessories such as the 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® HomeLink® button (note steps 2 through HomeLink® Lighting Package, please button. Do NOT release until step 4 4 in the “Programming” portion of this contact HomeLink® at 1-800-355-3515 has been completed. text) while you press and re-press or on the internet at www.homelink.com. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter every slowly (after 20 seconds), position the two seconds until the frequency signal This device complies with Part 15 of hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches has been learned. The indicator light will the FCC rules. Operation is subject to away from the HomeLink® surface. flash slowly and then rapidly after sever- the following two conditions: 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans- al seconds upon successful training. 1. This device may not cause harmful mitter button (or press and “cycle” - as interference, and described in “Canadian Programming” CAUTION 2. This device must accept any interfer- above). If programming a garage door ence received, including interference 4. The HomeLink® indicator light will opener or gate, it is advised to that may cause undesired operation. flash, first slowly and then rapidly. unplug the device during the When the indicator light begins to flash “cycling” process to prevent possi- rapidly, release both buttons. ble motor burn-up. WARNING The previous device has now been The HomeLink® transmitter has erased and the new device can be acti- been tested and complies with FCC vated by pushing the HomeLink® button and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or that has just been programmed. This pro- modifications not expressly cedure will not affect any other pro- approved by the party responsible grammed HomeLink® buttons. for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC: 4112104541A Gentex MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3
3181 Features of your vehicle
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM WITH REARVIEW DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING (Continued) • Retain the original transmitter for Compass display • When programming the ® future programming procedures HomeLink Wireless Control (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is System, you may be operating a also suggested that upon the sale garage door or gate operator. of the vehicle, the programmed Make sure that people and objects HomeLink® buttons be erased for are out of the way of the moving security purposes (follow step 1 door or gate to prevent potential in the “Programming” portion of harm or damage. this text). ® OVQ032360N • Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks the Indicator light Glare detection sensor safety stop and reverse feature as Programming required by federal safety stan- Rearview display dards. (This includes any garage Your vehicle may require the ignition door opener model manufactured switch to be turned to the ACC position before April 1, 1982.) A garage for programming and/or operation of ® door opener which cannot detect HomeLink . It is also recommended that an object, signaling the door to a new battery be replaced in the hand- stop and reverse, does not meet held transmitter of the device being pro- ® current federal safety standards. grammed to HomeLink for quicker train- Using a garage door opener with- ing and accurate transmission of the Homelink® buttons OVQ032305N out these features increases risk radio-frequency. Follow these steps to train your Your new mirror comes with an integrat- of serious injury or death. For HomeLink® mirror: ed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, more information, call 1-800-355- which allows you to program the mirror to 3515 or on the internet at activate your garage door(s), estate gate, www.homelink.com. home lighting, etc. The mirror actually (Continued) learns the codes from your various exist- ing transmitters.
* HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc 3 182 Features of your vehicle
Flashing ✽ NOTICE Flashing For non rolling code garage door open- ers, follow steps 2 - 3. For rolling code garage door openers, follow steps 2 - 6. For Canadian Programming, please fol- low the Canadian Programming section. For help with determining whether your garage is non-rolling code or rolling code, please refer to the garage door openers owner’s manual or contact 1-3inches ® HomeLink customer service at 1-800- Transmitter OVQ032306N 355-3515. OVQ032307N 1. When programming the buttons for the 2. Press and hold the button on the first time, press and hold the left and HomeLink® system you wish to train center buttons ( , ) simultane- and the button on the transmitter while ously until the indicator light begins to the transmitter is approximately 1 to 3 flash after approximately 10 seconds. inches away from the mirror. Do not Release both buttons. Do not hold for release the buttons until step 3 has been longer than 20 seconds. (This proce- completed. dure erases the factory-set default 3. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, codes. Do Not perform this step to pro- first slowly and then rapidly. When the gram additional hand-held transmit- indicator light flashes rapidly, both but- ters.) tons may be released. (The rapid flash- ing light indicates successful program- ming of the new frequency signal.) ✽ NOTICE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace step #3 with the “cycling” procedure noted in the “Canadian Programming” section of this document. 3183 Features of your vehicle
Rolling code programming Operating HomeLink® Flashing To train a garage door opener (or other To operate, simply press the pro- rolling code equipped devices) with the grammed HomeLink® button. Activation rolling code feature, follow these instruc- will now occur for the trained product tions after completing the “Programming” (garage door, security system, entry door portion of this text. (A second person lock, estate gate, or home or office light- may make the following training proce- ing). For convenience, the hand-held dures quicker & easier.) transmitter of the device may also be 4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on used at any time. The HomeLink® the device’s motor head unit. Exact Wireless Controls System (once pro- location and color of the button may grammed) or the original hand-held vary by product brand. If there is diffi- transmitter may be used to activate the culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but- device (e.g. garage door, entry door lock, OVQ032306N ton, reference the device’s owner’s etc.). In the event that there are still pro- Erasing programmed HomeLink® manual or contact HomeLink® at 1- gramming difficulties, contact buttons 800-355-3515 or on the internet at HomeLink® at 1-800-355-3515 or on the www.homelink.com. internet at www.homelink.com. To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased): 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button on the device’s motor • Press and hold the left and center head unit. You have 30 seconds to buttons simultaneously, until the indi- complete step number 6. cator light begins to flash (approxi- mately 10 seconds). Release both but- 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press tons. Do not hold for longer than 30 and release the programmed ® seconds. HomeLink button up to three times. ® The rolling code equipped device HomeLink is now in the train (or learn- should now recognize the HomeLink® ing) mode and can be programmed at signal and activate when the any time. HomeLink® button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not previously been done. Refer to the “Programming” portion of this text.
3 184 Features of your vehicle
Reprogramming a single Gate operator programming & Accessories HomeLink® button canadian programming If you would like additional information on To program a device to HomeLink® using During programming, your hand-held the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, a HomeLink® button previously trained, transmitter may automatically stop trans- HomeLink® compatible products, or to follow these steps: mitting. Continue to press and hold the purchase other accessories such as the 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (note steps 2 through HomeLink® Lighting Package, please HomeLink® button. Do NOT release 4 in the “Programming” portion of this contact HomeLink® at 1-800-355-3515 until step 4 has been completed. text) while you press and re-press or on the internet at www.homelink.com. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter every slowly (after 10 seconds), position the two seconds until the frequency signal This device complies with Part 15 of hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches has been learned. The indicator light will the FCC rules. Operation is subject to away from the HomeLink® surface. flash slowly and then rapidly after sever- the following two conditions: 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans- al seconds upon successful training. 1. This device may not cause harmful mitter button (or press and “cycle” - as interference, and described in “Canadian Programming” CAUTION 2. This device must accept any interfer- above). If programming a garage door ence received, including interference 4. The HomeLink® indicator light will opener or gate, it is advised to that may cause undesired operation. flash, first slowly and then rapidly. unplug the device during the When the indicator light begins to flash “cycling” process to prevent possi- rapidly, release both buttons. ble motor burn-up. WARNING The previous device has now been The HomeLink® transmitter has erased and the new device can be acti- been tested and complies with FCC vated by pushing the HomeLink® button and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or that has just been programmed. This pro- modifications not expressly cedure will not affect any other pro- approved by the party responsible grammed HomeLink® buttons. for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC: 4112104541A Gentex MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3
3185 Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT These compartments can be used to store small items required by the driver or passengers.
CAUTION • To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment. • Always keep the storage com- partment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover can not close securely.
WARNING - Flammable materials Do not store cigarette lighters, 1VQA2197/OVQ049403/OVQ039003 propane cylinders, or other flamma- ble/explosive materials in the vehi- cle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.
3 186 Features of your vehicle
CAUTION If key is not fully inserted into the glove box key set, do not apply excessive force. Doing so may dam- age the parts.
WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in an accident or sudden stop, always OVQ023191 keep the glove box door closed OVQ028198 while driving. Glove box Sunglass holder (if equipped) The glove box can be locked and To open the sunglass holder, press the unlocked with a master key. CAUTION cover and the holder will slowly open. To open the glove box, make sure it is Place your sunglasses in the compart- Do not keep food in the glove box unlocked, then pull the handle (1) and ment door with the lenses facing out. for a long time. the glove box will automatically open (2). Push to close. Close the glove box after use.
3187 Features of your vehicle
WARNING • Do not keep objects except sun- glasses inside the sunglass hold- er. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, pos- sibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle. • Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sun- OVQ03339A OVQ033700N glass holder. Side table (if equipped) To use the storage compartment of side • Do not put the glasses forcibly The side table is located on the inner por- table, push the cover. Do not fold the into a sunglass holder to prevent tion of the passenger’s seat. table when some items be placed in the breakage of deformation of glass- storage compartment, since those may To use the table, pull the table all the way es. It you try to open it forcibly damage the items. up until it locks into place. Verify the table when the glasses are jammed in is locked by trying to push it down. If the holder. table moves down, it is not locked prop- erly. To fold down the table, pull up the release lever and press down the edge of the table.
3 188 Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION • Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat. • Only a genuine Kia lighter should be used in the cigarette lighter socket. The use of plug-in acces- sories (shavers, hand-held vacu- ums, and coffee pots, for exam- ple) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure. OVQ040401 • If the lighter does not pop out OVQ049402 Cigarette lighter (if equipped) within 30 seconds, remove it to Ashtray (if equipped) prevent overheating. To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in To use the ashtray, press the cover and and release it. When it is heated, it auto- release it. matically pops out ready for use. To remove the ashtray to empty or clean If the engine is not running, the ignition it, lift it upward and pull it out. switch must be in the ACC or ON position for the lighter to operate. WARNING - Ashtray use • Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays as waste receptacles. • Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other com- bustible materials may cause a fire.
3189 Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
WARNING - Hot liquids • Do not place uncovered cups of hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. • To reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of sudden stop 1VQA2199 OVQ036234N or collision, do not place uncov- Front (if equipped) Center (if equipped) ered or unsecured bottles, glass- To use the cup holders, pull the cup hold- Cups or small beverage cans may be es, cans, etc., in the cup holder er cover out. Push the cover to close after placed in the cup holders. while the vehicle is in motion. use. The storage can be removed and rein- stalled. CAUTION To remove the storage, pull up the rear WARNING Do not place heavy cups or cans in portion slightly after moving the locking Keep cans or bottles out of direct cup holders. Cup holders could be tap to the unlock position and move it sun light and do not put them in a damaged. rearward. vehicle that is heated up. To reinstall the storage, insert the front The can or bottle may burst. tap on the bottom of the storage into the front hole on the floor, put the rear por- tion on the floor and move the locking tap to the lock position. Make sure the com- partment is locked in place.
3 190 Features of your vehicle
OVQ037090N OVQ036308N OVQ028201 Rear Shopping bag holder Clothes hanger (if equipped) Cups or small beverage cans may be ✽ NOTICE placed in the cup holders. Do not hang heavy bags, since those may CAUTION damage the holder. Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook.
3191 Features of your vehicle
Front (Type A) CAUTION - Vanity mirror (if equipped) Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use. If the vanity mirror is not closed securely, the lamp will stay on and could result in battery discharge and pos- sible sunvisor damage. 1VQA2188A Front (Type B)
OVQ036233N WARNING Sunvisor For your safety, do not obstruct your Use the sunvisor to shield direct light vision when using the sunvisor. through the front or side windows. To use a sunvisor, pull it downward. To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket OVQ040188 (1) and swing it to the side (2). Rear Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward (3). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and pull up the mirror cover (4).
1VQA2190
3 192 Features of your vehicle
(1) :It can be used when the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position. CAUTION (2), (3) : It can be used regardless of the • Use power outlet only when the ignition switch position. engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using Power outlet the accessory plug for prolonged The power outlets are designed to pro- periods of time with the engine vide power for mobile telephones or off could cause the battery to dis- other devices designed to operate with charge. vehicle electrical systems. The devices • Only use 12V electric accessories should draw less than 10 amps with the which are less than 10A in elec- engine running. tric capacity. • Adjust the air-conditioner or OVQ038092N heater to the lowest operating Digital clock level when using the power outlet. Whenever the battery terminals, related • Close the cover when not in use. fuses are disconnected, you must reset • Some electronic devices can the time. cause electronic interference When the ignition switch is in the ACC or when plugged into a vehicle’s ON position, the clock buttons operate as power outlet. These devices may follows: cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.
3193 Features of your vehicle
• HOUR: ■ Type A ■ Type B Pressing the “H” button with your fin- WARNING ger, a pencil or similar object will The following must be observed advance the time displayed by one when installing ANY floor mat to hour. the vehicle. • Ensure that the floor mats are • MINUTE: securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving Pressing the “M” button with your fin- the vehicle. ger, a pencil or similar object will • Do not use ANY floor mat that advance the time displayed by one cannot be firmly attached to the minute. vehicle's floor mat anchors. OXM049228 • Do not stack floor mats on top of To change the 12 hour format to the 24 Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped) one another (e.g. all-weather rub- hour format, press the “H” and “M” but- ber mat on top of a carpeted floor tons for more than 3 seconds. When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat). Only a single floor mat For example, if the “H” and “M” buttons is mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps should be installed in each posi- pressed for more than 3 seconds while the floor mat from sliding forward. tion. the time is 10:15 p.m., the display will be changed to 22:15. IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was man- ufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recom- mends that only the Kia floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.
3 194 Features of your vehicle
ANTENNA
CAUTION • Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged. • When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tight- ened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper recep- tion. But it could be removed OHM048154 when parking the vehicle or when OVQ029448 Roof antenna loading cargo on the roof rack. Aux, USB and iPod® port • When cargo is loaded on the roof If your vehicle has an audio system, an (if equipped) rack, do not place the cargo near amplifying antenna is installed in your the antenna pole to ensure proper If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB(uni- vehicle. ® reception. versal serial bus) port or iPod port, you This antenna can be removed from the can use an aux port to connect audio vehicle when you wash your vehicle. devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod® port to plug in an iPod® . ✽ NOTICE When using a portable audio device con- nected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device. * iPod® is registered trademarks of Apple Inc. iPod® is mobile digital devices sold sepa- rately, and connectivity requires the Kia accessory cable.
3195 Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) MODE Press the button to change audio source. FM(1~2)➟ AM➟ SAT(1~3)➟ CD➟ USB ➟AUX(iPod)➟FM(1~2)...
VOL (▲/▼) • Press the VOL (▲) button to increase volume. • Press the VOL (▼) button to decease volume.
KMC_VQ11_ADO_HR(EU) CALL( ) The steering wheel mounted controls Places and transfers calls. help to reduce driver distractions.
✽ NOTICE END( ) Do not operate audio remote control Ends calls or cancels functions. buttons simultaneously. TALK( ) CAUTION Activates voice recognition. Driving while distracted is danger- ous and should be avoided. Drivers should remain attentive to driving and always exercise caution when using the steering wheel mounted controls while driving.
3 196 Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM ✽ NOTICE FM radio reception AM radio reception • If you install an after market HID head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and electronic device may malfunction. • Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.
JBM001 JBM002 How vehicle audio works AM broadcasts can be received at AM and FM radio signals are broadcast greater distances than FM broadcasts. from transmitter towers located around This is because AM radio waves are your city. They are intercepted by the transmitted at low frequencies. These radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal long, low frequency radio waves can fol- is then received by the radio and sent to low the curvature of the earth rather than your vehicle speakers. travelling straight out into the atmos- phere. In addition, they curve around When a strong radio signal has reached obstructions so that they can provide bet- your vehicle, the precise engineering of ter signal coverage. your audio system ensures the best pos- sible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the dis- tance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the pres- ence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.
3197 Features of your vehicle
FM radio station
JBM003 JBM004 JBM005 FM broadcasts are transmitted at high • Fading - As your vehicle moves away • Station Swapping - As a FM signal frequencies and do not bend to follow the from the radio station, the signal will weakens, another more powerful sig- earth's surface. Because of this, FM weaken and sound will begin to fade. nal near the same frequency may broadcasts generally begin to fade at When this occurs, we suggest that you begin to play. This is because your short distances from the station. select another stronger station. radio is designed to lock onto the clear- Also, FM signals are easily affected by • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or est signal. If this occurs, select another buildings, mountains, or other obstruc- large obstructions between the trans- station with a stronger signal. tions. These can result in certain listening mitter and your radio can disturb the • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals conditions which might lead you to signal causing static or fluttering nois- being received from several directions believe a problem exists with your radio. es to occur. Reducing the treble level can cause distortion or fluttering. This The following conditions are normal and may lessen this effect until the distur- can be caused by a direct and reflect- do not indicate radio trouble: bance clears. ed signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.
3 198 Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception • If you are driving on a mountain road NOTE: You may experience difficulties in receiv- where the signal is blocked by moun- There may be other unforeseen cir- TM ing SIRIUSXM satellite radio signals in tains. cumstances leading to reception the following situations. problems with the SIRIUSXMTM satel- lite radio signal. SiriusXM service requires a subscrip- tion, sold separately, after 3 month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your SiriusXM service at the end of your trial sub- scription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SATELITE2 Programming subject to change. SATELITE1 Sirius satellite service is available • If you are driving in an area with tall only to those at least 18 and older in • If you are driving next to a tall vehi- trees that block the signal (10m or the 48 contiguous USA, D.C., and PR cle(such as a truck or a bus) that block more), for example, on an road through (with coverage limitations). Traffic the signal. a dense forest. information not available in all mar- • If you are driving beneath the top level • The signal can become weak in some kets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for of a multi-level freeway. areas that are not covered by the SIR- details. SiriusXM and all related marks • If you drive under a bridge. IUSXMTM repeater network. and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM • If you are driving next to a tall vehicle Radio Inc. (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal. • If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.
3199 Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way Care of discs • Keep CDs in their cases after use to radio • If the temperature inside the vehicle is protect them from scratches or dirt. When a cellular phone is used inside the too high, open the vehicle windows for • Depending on the type of CD-R/CD- vehicle, noise may be produced from the ventilation before using your vehicle RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate audio equipment. This does not mean audio. normally according to manufacturing that something is wrong with the audio • It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA companies or making and recording equipment. In such a case, use the cellu- files without permission. Use CDs that methods. In such circumstances, if you lar phone at a place as far as possible are created only by lawful means. still continue to use those CDs, they from the audio equipment. may cause the malfunction of your • Do not apply volatile agents such as vehicle audio system. benzene and thinner, normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for ana- WARNING logue disc onto CDs. ✽ NOTICE - Playing an Do not use a cellular phone while • To prevent the disc surface from get- Incompatible Copy driving. Stop at a safe location to ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by Protected Audio CD use a cellular phone. the edges or the edges of the center Some copy protected CDs, which do not hole only. comply with the international audio CD • Clean the disc surface with a piece of standards (Red Book), may not play on soft cloth before playback (wipe it from your vehicle audio. Please note that if the center to the outside edge). you try to play copy protected CDs and • Do not damage the disc surface or the CD player does not perform correct- attach pieces of sticky tape or paper ly the CDs maybe defective, not the CD onto it. player. • Make sure objects other than CDs are not inserted into the CD player (Do not insert more than one CD at a time).
3 200 Features of your vehicle
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME and AUDIO CONTROL CD Player : PA710S
1. FM/AM Button 2. SEEK Button 3. POWER Button & VOLUME Knob 4. SCAN Button 5. MUTE Button 6. SETUP Button 7. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob 8. PRESET Buttons CD Changer : PA760S
VQ_PA710S_RADIO / VQ_760S_RADIO
3201 Features of your vehicle
Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME 4. SCAN Button • SDVC and AUDIO CONTROL • When the button is pressed, it auto- Select this item to turn the SDVC(Speed matically scans the radio stations Dependent Volume Control) feature ON 1. FM/AM Button upwards. or OFF. If it is turned ON, volume level is adjusted automatically according to the The FM/AM button toggles between FM • The SCAN feature steps through each station, starting from the initial station, vehicle speed. and AM. Listed below are the paths as for 5 seconds. the system switches from FM to AM and • Press the [SCAN] button again to stop • SIRIUS back to FM. the scan feature and to listen to the Select default display of SIRIUS mode. • FM/AM : FM1➟FM2➟AM➟FM1... currently selected channel. “Category/Channel name” or “Artist/Song Title” can be selected. 2. SEEK Button 5. MUTE Button • When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it will When the button is pressed, stops sound • PHONE ® automatically tune to the next lower and “Audio Mute” is displayed on LCD. Select this item to enter Bluetooth station. Wireless Technology setup mode. Refer ® • When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it will to “Bluetooth Wireless Technology automatically tune to the next higher 6. SETUP Button PHONE OPERATION” section for station. Press this button to enter SETUP mode, detailed information. If no action is taken for 8 seconds, it will 3. POWER Button & VOLUME Knob return to previous mode. NOTE: • Turns the audio system on/off when In “SETUP” mode, rotate the TUNE knob The Bluetooth® word mark and logos the IGNITION SWITCH is on ACC or to move the cursor between items, and are registered trademarks owned by ON. push the TUNE knob to select. Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of • If the knob is turned clockwise/counte such marks by Kia is under license. clockwise, the volume will increase Other trademarks and trade names • SCROLL /decrease. are those of their respective owners. Select whether long file names are A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is scrolled continuously (“ON”) or just once required to use Bluetooth® wireless (“OFF”). technology.
3 202 Features of your vehicle
7. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob • TREBLE Control 8. PRESET Buttons Rotate the knob clockwise or counter To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob • Press [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec- clock wise to increase or decrease from clockwise, while to decrease the TRE- onds to play the station saved in each current frequency. BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise. button. (AM 10 kHz, FM 200 kHz) • Press [1]~[6] buttons more than 0.8 Pressing the button changes the BASS, • FADER Control seconds or longer to save the current MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL- Turn the control knob clockwise to station to the respective button with a ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected emphasize rear speaker sound (front beep. is shown on the display. After selecting speaker sound will be attenuated). When each mode, rotate the Audio control knob the control knob is turned counterclock- clockwise or counterclockwise. wise, front speaker sound will be empha- Press this button while holding [SETUP] sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu- button to activate / inactivate the item to. ated). Select SETUP item using left and right function of the Tune button. • BALANCE Control Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize • BASS Control right speaker sound (left speaker sound To increase the BASS, rotate the knob will be attenuated). When the control clockwise, while to decrease the BASS, knob is turned counter clockwise, left rotate the knob counterclockwise. speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated). • MIDDLE Control To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the MID- DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
3203 Features of your vehicle
CD CD Player : PA710S
1. CD Slot 2. CD Indicator 3. CD Eject Button 4. CD LOAD Button 5. TRACK Button 6. INFO Button 7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button 8. REPEAT Button CD Changer : PA760S 9. RANDOM Button 10. SCAN Button 11. DISC Button 12. CD Button 13. FOLDER Button
VQ_PA710S_CD / VQ_760S_CDC
3 204 Features of your vehicle
Using CD Player 3. CD Eject Button ✽ NOTICE Press button to to eject the CD. This • The disc can be only inserted while the 1. CD Slot button works regardless of ignition green light is blinking on the slot. switch status. • This CD player is suitable only for Insert a CD label side up and gently push 12cm discs, do not use irregular in while ignition switch is on ACC or ON. • ALL EJECT(CD Changer :PA760S) shaped CDs. The audio automatically switches to CD Press this button for more than 0.8 mode and begins to play the CD. If the seconds to eject all discs inside the To insert multiple discs: audio was turned off, audio power will deck in respective order. automatically turned on as the CD is • Press and hold the [LOAD] button for inserted. one second or more. You will then hear a beep sound and the green light on • This audio only recognizes 12cm-size, 4. CD LOAD Button This compact disc player will accommo- the slot will be illuminated, and the CD-DA (Audio CD) or ISO data-CD numbers of empty disc will blink on the (MP3 CD). date up to six compact discs.To insert discs into the player, perform the follow- display. • If UDF data-CD or non-CD (e.g. DVD) • After “Wait” is displayed on the LCD is inserted, "Reading Error" message ing: • Press and release the [LOAD] Button. with the lowest number of empty slot will be displayed and the disc will be blinking, the slot will open with “Insert ejected. • Green light on the slot will be illuminat- CD” displayed on the LCD. ed and the lowest number of empty slot will blink on the display. After “Wait” • Insert a disc partway into the slot, label CAUTION is displayed on the LCD, the slot will side up. The player will pull the disc in. Do not insert a CD if CD indicator open with “Insert CD” displayed on the Once the disc is loaded, the numbers is lit. LCD. of the empty disc will blink on the dis- play continuously. • Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the disc in. If the next “Insert CD” is displayed when the slot is illuminated, you can 2. CD Indicator(CD Player :PA710S) When the disc is inserted, the disc will then load another disc. begin to play automatically. When car ignition switch is ACC or ON • Load the remaining disc by following and if the CD is loaded, this indicator is lit. procedures 1 and 2. When you finished If the CD is ejected the Icon is off. loading 6 discs, the CD player will begin to play the last CD loaded.
3205 Features of your vehicle
• To load more than one disc but less 6. INFO Button 9. RANDOM Button than six, complete Steps 1 and 2. Displays the information of the current Press this button for less than 0.8 sec- When you have finished loading discs, song. onds to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more press LOAD button to cancel the loading • CDDA : DISC TITLE ➟ DISC ARTIST ➟ than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’ function or wait for 10 seconds. The CD TRACK TITLE ➟ TRACK ARTIST ➟ mode. player will begin to play the last CD TOTAL TRACK ➟ DISC TITLE... • RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc loaded. As each CD starts to play, the • MP3/WMA : FILE NAME➟TITLE➟ARTIST are played back in a random sequence. DISC number will appear on the display. ➟ALBUM➟FOLDER➟TOTAL FILE... • ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in (Not displayed if the information is a disc are played back in the random ✽ NOTICE unavailable on the CD or file.) sequence. The disc player takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more than six. 7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button 10. SCAN Button • Turn this knob clockwise to browse Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds. 5. TRACK Button songs after current song, or counter- To cancel SCAN Play, press this button • Press [TRACK ] button for less than clockwise to browse songs before cur- again. 0.8 seconds to play from the beginning rent song. To play the displayed song, of current song. press the knob. 11. DISC Buttons • Press [TRACK ] button for less than • Pressing this knob without turning • [DISC ] Change Button Changes 0.8 seconds and press again within 1 enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode. disc to the previous disc. second to play the previous song. • [DISC ] Change Button Changes • Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec- 8. REPEAT Button disc to the next disc. onds or longer to initiate reverse direc- Press this button for less than 0.8 sec- tion high speed sound search of cur- onds to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more 12. CD Button rent song. than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘FLD RPT’ If there is a CD in the CD DECK it switch- • Press [TRACK ] button for less than mode. es to CD mode. 0.8 seconds to play the next song. • RPT : Only a track (file) is repeatedly If there is no CD, then the message “NO • Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec- played back. CD” will become displayed on the LCD onds or longer to initiate forward direc- • FLD RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files for 3 seconds and returns to the previous tion high speed sound search of cur- are repeatedly played back. mode. rent song.
3 206 Features of your vehicle
13. FOLDER Button NOTE: 2. Folder playing order: • Press [FOLDER ] button to move to Order of playing files(folders): child folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder. Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed. It will play the first song in the folder. • Press [FOLDER ] button to move to ✽ If no song file is contained in the parent folder of the current folder and folder, that folder is not displayed. display the first song in the folder. Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed.
1. Song playing order : to sequentially.
3207 Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING (Continued) (Continued) USB DEVICE • An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not • If you disconnect the external USB recognizable. device during playback in USB • To use an external USB device, mode, the external USB device can make sure the device is not con- • Depending on the condition of be damaged or may malfunction. nected when starting up the vehi- the external USB device, the con- Therefore, disconnect the external cle. Connect the device after nected external USB device can USB device when the audio is starting up. be unrecognizable. • When the formatted byte/sector turned off or in another mode. (e.g, • If you start the engine when the Radio, SIRIUS or CD) USB device is connected, it may setting of External USB device is • Depending on the type and capacity damage the USB device. (USB not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, of the external USB device or the flashdrives are very sensitive to then the device will not be recog- type of the files stored in the device, electric shock.) nized. • Use only a USB device formatted there is a difference in the time • If the engine is started up or taken for recognition of the device. turned off while the external USB to FAT 12/16/32. • Do not use the USB device for pur- device is connected, the external • USB devices without USB I/F poses other than playing music files. USB device may not work. authentication may not be recog- • Playing videos through the USB is • It may not play inauthentic MP3 or nizable. not supported. WMA files. • Make sure the USB connection • Use of USB accessories such as 1) It can only play MP3 files with terminal does not come in contact rechargers or heaters using USB the compression rate between with the human body or other I/F may lower performance or 8Kbps~320Kbps. objects. cause trouble. 2) It can only play WMA music • If you repeatedly connect or dis- • If you use devices such as a USB files with the compression rate connect the USB device in a short hub purchased separately, the between 8Kbps~320Kbps. period of time, it may break the device. vehicle’s audio system may not • Take precautions for static electrici- • You may hear a strange noise recognize the USB device. In that ty when connecting or disconnect- case, connect the USB device ing the external USB device. when connecting or disconnect- ing a USB device. directly to the multimedia termi- (Continued) (Continued) nal of the vehicle. (Continued)
3 208 Features of your vehicle
(Continued) (Continued) • If the USB device is divided by • Please avoid using USB memory logical drives, only the music files products which can be used as on the highest-priority drive are key chains or cellular phone recognized by car audio. accessories as they could cause • Devices such as MP3 Player/ damage to the USB jack. Please Cellular phone/Digital camera can make certain only to use plug type be unrecognizable by standard connector products as shown USB I/F can be unrecognizable. below. • Charging through the USB may not be supported in some mobile devices. ❋ A car exclusive cable (Provided or sold separately) is required to use the iPod. • Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable. • Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable. • Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable. • The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio. Always back up important data on a personal storage device. (Continued)
3209 Features of your vehicle
AUX/USB CD Player : PA710S
1. AUX/USB Button 2. TRACK Button 3. INFO Button 4. FOLDER Button 5. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button 6. RANDOM Button 7. REPEAT Button 8. SCAN Button CD Changer : PA760S
VQ_PA710_AUX,USB / VQ_PA760_AUX,USB
3 210 Features of your vehicle
Using USB device song. Press the button for 0.8 seconds rent song. To play the displayed song, Using a USB that is connected to the or longer to play the song in forward press the knob. multiple terminal inside the console on direction in fast speed. • Pressing this knob without turning the right hand side of the driver’s seat. enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode. When USB is connected, the ‘USB’ icon 3. INFO Button will be displayed on the top right corner Displays the information of the file current- 6. RANDOM Button of the display screen. ly played in the order of FILE NAME➟ • Press this button for less than 0.8 sec- TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟FOLDER➟TO onds to play songs randomly in current 1. AUX/USB Button TAL FILE➟PLAY SCREEN➟FILE NAME folder. If the auxiliary device is connected, it … (Displays no information if the file has • Press this button for 0.8 seconds or switches to AUX or USB mode to play the no song information.) longer to play songs randomly in entire sound from the auxiliary player. USB device. If there is no auxiliary device, then the 4. FOLDER Button • To cancel RANDOM play, press this message “No Media” will become dis- • Press [FOLDER ] button to move to button again. played on the LCD for 3 seconds and child folder of the current folder and returns to previous mode. display the first song in the folder. 7. REPEAT Button Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to • Press this button for less than 0.8 sec- 2. TRACK Button the folder displayed. It will play the first onds to repeat current song. • Press the [TRACK ] button for less song in the folder. • Press this button for 0.8 seconds or than 0.8 seconds to play from the • Press [FOLDER ] button to move to longer to repeat all songs in current beginning of the current song. parent folder display the first song in folder. Press the button for less than 0.8 sec- the folder. • To cancel REPEAT, press this button onds and press it again within 1 sec- Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to again. ond to move to and play the previous the folder displayed. song. 8. SCAN Button Press the button for 0.8 seconds or 5. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button Plays each song in the USB device for longer to play the song in reverse 10 seconds. direction in fast speed. • Turn this knob clockwise to browse To cancel SCAN Play, press this button • Press the [TRACK ] button for less songs after current song, or counter clockwise to browse songs before cur- again. than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
3211 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE FOR USING THE (Continued) iPod® DEVICE CAUTION IN USING THE iPod® DEVICE • When the iPod cable is connected, • Some iPod models might not support the system can be switched to AUX • The Kia iPod Power Cable is the communication protocol and the mode even without iPod device needed in order to operate iPod files will not be played. and may cause noise. Disconnect Supported iPod models: with the audio buttons on the the iPod cable when you are not - iPod Mini audio system. The USB cable pro- using the iPod device. - iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic) vided by Apple may cause mal- generation function and should not be used • When not using iPod with car - iPod Nano 1st~4th generation for Kia vehicles. audio, detach the iPod cable from - iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation iPod. Otherwise, iPod may remain ❋ The Kia iPod Power Cable may • The order of search or playback of in accessory mode, and may not be purchased through your Kia songs in the iPod can be different work properly. from the order searched in the audio Dealership. system. • When connecting iPod with the • If the iPod disabled due to its own iPod Power Cable, insert the con- Detachable USB/AUX All-in-one USB/AUX malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset: nector to the multimedia socket Refer to iPod manual) completely. If not inserted com- • An iPod may not operate normally on pletely, communications between low battery. iPod and audio may be interrupted. • Some iPod devices, such as the iPhone®, can be connected through • When adjusting the sound effects of the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the iPod and the audio system, the interface. The device must have audio sound effects of both devices will • When connecting the iPod, use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology overlap and might reduce or distort USB/AUX terminals. capability (such as for stereo head- the quality of the sound. • When disconnecting the iPod, phone Bluetooth® Wireless • Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer disconnect both the USB/AUX ter- Technology). The device can play, but function of an iPod when adjust- minal. it will not be controlled by the audio ing the audio system’s volume, • The iPod exclusive cable must be system. and turn off the equalizer of the connected to both the USB/AUX * iPod® and iPhone® are registered trade- audio system when using the terminals for iPod charging and marks of Apple Inc. iPod® and iPhone® equalizer of an iPod. operations to be supported. are mobile digital devices sold separately, (Continued) and connectivity requires the Kia accesso- ry cable. 3 212 Features of your vehicle
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® CD Player : PA710S
1. iPod Button 2. TRACK Button 3. INFO Button 4. MENU Button 5. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button 6. RANDOM Button 7. REPEAT Button
CD Changer : PA760S
VQ_PA710S_iPod / VQ_PA760S_iPod
3213 Features of your vehicle
Using iPod Press the button for 0.8 seconds or Also, when you rotate the knob counter- Using an iPod when the exclusive cable longer to play the song in forward clockwise, it will display the songs (cate- is connected to the multiple terminal direction in fast speed. gory) before the song currently played inside the console on the right hand side (category in the same level). of the driver’s seat. When the iPod is con- 3. INFO Button To listen to the song displayed in the song category, press the button to skip to nected, the ‘iPod’ icon will be displayed Displays the information of the file cur- on the top right corner of the display rently played in the order of and play the selected song. screen. TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ PLAY Pressing the button changes the BASS, SCREEN DISPLAY ➟ TITLE... MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL- 1. iPod Button (Displays no information if the file has no ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected If iPod is connected, it switches to the song information.) is shown on the display. After selecting iPod mode from the previous mode to each mode, rotate the Audio control knob play the song files stored in the iPod. 4. MENU Button clockwise or counterclockwise. If there is no iPod connected, then it dis- Moves to the upper category from cur- plays the message “No Media” for 3 sec- rently played category of the iPod. 6. RANDOM Button onds and returns to the previous mode. To move to (play) the category (song) • Press this button for less than 0.8 sec- displayed, press TUNE Knob & ENTER onds to shuffle order of all songs in 2. TRACK Button Button. current category. (Song Random) • Press the [TRACK ] button for less You will be able to search through the • Press this button for 0.8 seconds or than 0.8 seconds to play from the lower category of the selected category. longer to shuffle order of albums in cur- beginning of the song currently played. The standard order of iPod’s category is rent category. (Album Random) Press the button for less than 0.8 sec- Songs➟Albums➟Artists➟Genres➟iPod. • To cancel RANDOM Play, press this onds and press it again within 1 sec- button again. ond to move to and play the previous 5. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button track. Press the button for 0.8 seconds or When you rotate the knob clockwise, it 7. REPEAT Button longer to play the song in reverse will display the songs (category) ahead Repeats the song currently played. direction in fast speed. of the song currently played (category in • Press the [TRACK ] button for less the same level). than 0.8 seconds to move to the next track.
3 214 Features of your vehicle
SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (if equipped) Satellite Radio channels: SIRIUS Satellite Radio service: NOTE: SIRIUS Satellite Radio has over 130 chan- SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription- SiriusXM service requires a subscrip- nels, including 69 channels of 100% com- based satellite radio service that broad- tion, sold separately, after 3 month trial mercial-free music, plus sports, news, talk casts music, sports, news and entertain- included with vehicle purchase. If you and entertainment available nationwide in ment programming to radio receivers, decide to continue your SiriusXM serv- your vehicle. For more information and a which are available for installation in ice at the end of your trial subscription, complete list of SIRIUS Satellite Radio motor vehicles or factory installed, as the plan you choose will automatically channels, visit sirius.com in the United renew and bill at then current rates until well as for the home, portable and wire- you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 to States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, or call less devices, and through an Internet SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. cancel. See our Customer Agreement connection on personal computer. for complete terms at Satellite Radio reception factors: Vehicles that are equipped with a factory www.siriusxm.com. Programming sub- installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system ject to change. Sirius satellite service is To receive the satellite signal, your vehi- include: available only to those at least 18 and cle has been equipped with a satellite • Hardware and an introductory trial sub- older in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C., radio antenna located on the roof of your and PR (with coverage limitations). vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the scription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle. Traffic information not available in all best location for an unobstructed, open markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for view of the sky, a requirement of a satel- • For a small upgrade fee, access to details. SiriusXM and all related marks lite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are SIRIUS music channels, and other and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM several factors that can affect satellite select channels over the Internet using Radio Inc. Subscriptions governed by radio reception performance: any computer connected to the the SIRIUS Terms & Conditions available • Antenna obstructions: For optimal Internet (U.S. customers only). at www.sirius.com / serviceterms. For information on extended subscrip- Available only in the 48 contiguous reception performance, keep the United States and the District of antenna clear of snow and ice build-up tion terms, contact SIRIUS at 1-888- 539-7474. Columbia. Service available in Canada; and keep luggage and other material see www.siriuscanada.ca as far away from the antenna as possi- Kia shall not be responsible for any such ble. programming changes. • Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, Satellite Radio Electronic Serial parking garages, dense tree foliage Number (ESN): This 12-digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to re-activate, and thunderstorms can interfere with modify or track your satellite radio account. your reception. You will need this number when communi- cating with SIRIUS. 3215 Features of your vehicle
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO CD Player : PA710S
1. SAT RADIO Button (SIRIUS Satellite Radio) 2. SEEK Button 3. PRESET Buttons 4. SCAN Button 5. TUNE Knob & ENTER button 6. CAT(Category) Button 7. INFO Button CD Changer : PA760S
VQ_PA710S_SATELLITE RADIO / VQ_PA760S_SATELLITE RADIO
3 216 Features of your vehicle
Using SIRIUS Satellite Radio 1. SAT Button 4. SCAN Button Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3 (SIRIUS Satellite Radio) • When the [SCAN] button is pressed, it month complimentary period of SIRIUS Press the [SAT] button to switch to SIR- automatically scans the radio stations Satellite Radio so you have access to over IUS Satellite Radio. It cycles through the upwards. 130 channels of music, information, and different bands as noted below. • The SCAN feature steps through every entertainment programming. SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3 ➟ SAT1... channel, starting from the initial chan- nel, for ten seconds. Activation 2. SEEK Button • Press the [SCAN] button again to stop In order to extend or reactivate your sub- the scan feature and to listen to the • Press [ SEEK ] button for less currently selected channel. scription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you than 0.8 seconds to select previous or will need to contact SIRIUS Customer next channel. • If "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at the top of the screen, channel chang- Care at 1-888-539-7474. Have your 12 • Press [ SEEK ] button for 0.8 digit SID (Sirius Identification Number)/ESN ing is done through the channels with- seconds or longer to continuously in current category. (Electronic Serial Number) ready. To move to previous or next channel. retrieve the SID/ESN, turn on the radio, • If "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at press the [SAT] button and tune to chan- the top of the screen, channel up/down 5. TUNE knob & ENTER button nel zero. Please note that the vehicle will is done through the channels within • Rotate clockwise to increase the chan- need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and current category. nel number or to scroll down the cate- have an unobstructed view of the sky in gory list. order for the radio to receive the activa- tion signal. 3. PRESET Buttons • Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the channel number or to scroll up the • Press [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec- category list. onds to play the channel saved in each button. • Press this to make selection of chan- nels or items. • Press [1]~[6] buttons for 0.8 seconds or longer to save current channel to the respective button with a beep.
3217 Features of your vehicle
6. CAT(Category) Button ✽ Troubleshooting • Press [CAT ] or [CAT ] button to 1. Antenna Error enter the Category List Mode, it dis- If this message is displayed, the anten- plays category items and highlights the na or antenna cable is broken or category that currently tuned channel unplugged. Please consult with your belongs to. Kia dealership. • On Category List Mode, press these 2. Acquiring Signal buttons to navigate category list. If this message is displayed, it means • Press [ENTER] Button to select the that the antenna is covered and that lowest channel in highlighted category. the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal is • If channel is selected by selecting cate- not available. Ensure the antenna is gory "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at uncovered and has a clear view of the the top of the screen. sky.
7. INFO Button Displays the information of the current channel as below when the button is pressed each time. • When default display is CAT(Category)/CH(Channel) ➟ Artist/Title ➟ Composer (if available) ➟ Category/Channel... • When default display is ART(Artist)/TITLE(Title) ➟ Category/Channel ➟ Composer(if available) ➟ Artist/Title...
3 218 Features of your vehicle
RSE(Rear Seat Entertainment System) (if equipped) CD Player : PA710S
1. RSE Button
CD Changer : PA760S
VQ_PA710S_RSE / VQ_PA760_RSE
3219 Features of your vehicle
1. RSE Button CAUTION IN USING (Continued) Play the RSE, and "RSE" Icon is dis- BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS • If the cellular phone signal is poor played. After pressing the RSE button, TECHNOLOGY CELLU- or the vehicles interior noise is you can enjoy the RSE audio through the too loud, it may be difficult to hear speakers in RSE mode and "Connected" LAR PHONE the other person’s voice during a is appeared at the same time. • Do not use a cellular phone or call. perform Bluetooth® Wireless At the state of NO RSE Icon, the RSE • Do not place the phone near or Technology settings (e.g. pairing inside metallic objects, otherwise button is pressed and "RSE Not Ready" a phone) while driving. is appeared at the window. communications with Bluetooth® • Some Bluetooth® Wireless Wireless Technology system or The speaker volume level is adjustable Technology-enabled phones may cellular service stations can be by VOLUME(+,-) knob on HEAD unit, not be recognized by the system disturbed. RSE unit and remote controller. or fully compatible with the sys- • Refer to the "RSE" in this section for tem. • While a phone is connected through Bluetooth® Wireless details RSE operation. • Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology your phone may dis- Technology related features of • RSE : Rear Seat Entertainment System charge quicker than usual for the audio system, refer your (A/V). additional Bluetooth® Wireless phone’s User’s Manual for phone- Technology-related operations. side Bluetooth® Wireless Technology operations. • Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference • The phone must be paired to the noise or malfunction to audio audio system to use Bluetooth® system. In this case, store the Wireless Technology related fea- device in a different location may tures. resolve the situation. • You will not be able to use the • Please save your phone name in hands-free feature when your English, or your phone name may phone (in the car) is outside of not be displayed correctly. the cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a (Continued) mountainous area, etc.). (Continued)
3 220 Features of your vehicle
® (Continued) (Continued) BLUETOOTH WIRELESS TECH- • If Priority is set upon vehicle igni- 4) Reboot the Audio and try to NOLOGY PHONE OPERATION tion (IGN/ACC ON), the connect again. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology 5) Delete all paired devices from phone will be automatically con- the mobile phone and Audio nected. and re-pair for use. Even if you are outside, the • The hands-free call volume and Bluetooth® Wireless Technology quality may differ depending on phone will be automatically con- 1 the mobile phone. 3 2 nected once you are in the vicini- 4 ty of the vehicle. 5 If you do not want automatic NOTE: Bluetooth® Wireless Technology If you need more information about ® power off. Kia’s Bluetooth Wireless Technology. 1.MODE button : Press the button to ® • Bluetooth Wireless Technology Contact Kia website “www.Kia.com” change audio source. ® connection may become intermit- (OWNERS>General Info>Bluetooth - FM(1~2)➟AM➟SAT(1~3)➟CD➟USB tently disconnected in some Wireless Technology). ➟AUX(iPod)➟FM(1~2)... mobile phones. Follow the follow- 2.VOLUME button : Raises or lowers ing steps to try again. speaker volume. 1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless 3. button : Places and transfers calls. Technology Function within the mobile phone ON/OFF and 4. button : Ends calls or cancels functions. try to connect again. 5. button : Activates voice recognition. 2) Turn the mobile phone power NOTE: ON/OFF and try to connect ® again. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by 3) Completely remove the mobile Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such phone battery, reboot, and then marks by Kia is under license. Other try to connect again. trademarks and trade names are those (Continued) of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® wireless technology. 3221 Features of your vehicle
■ General Features (Continued) WARNING • This audio system supports Bluetooth® • The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Wireless Technology hands-free and word mark and logos are registered Driving while distracted can result ® in a loss of vehicle control that may stereo-headset features. trademarks owned by Bluetooth lead to an accident, severe person- - HANDS-FREE feature: Making or Wireless Technology SIG, Inc. and any al injury, and death. use of such marks by Kia is under receiving calls wirelessly through license. A Bluetooth® Wireless The driver's primary responsibility voice recognition. Technology enabled cell phone is is in the safe and legal operation of - STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing required to use Bluetooth® Wireless a vehicle, and use of any handheld music from cellular phones (that sup- Technology. devices, other equipment, or vehi- ports A2DP feature) wirelessly. cle systems which take the driver • Voice recognition engine of the ■ Receiving a Phone Call eyes, attention and focus away from Bluetooth® Wireless Technology sys- When receiving a phone call, a ringtone the safe operation of a vehicle or tem supports 3 types of languages: is audible from speakers and the audio which are not permissible by law English system changes into telephone mode. should never be used during opera- Canadian French When receiving a phone call, “Incoming tion of the vehicle. US Spanish call” message and incoming phone num- ber (if available) are displayed on the ✽ ■ What is Bluetooth® Wireless NOTICE audio. • The phone must be paired to the sys- Technology? ® ® tem before using Bluetooth Wireless • To Answer a Call: Bluetooth Wireless Technology that Technology features. allows multiple devices to be connected • Only one selected (linked) cellular - Press button on the steering wheel. in a short range, low-powered devices phone can be used with the system at • To Reject a Call: like hands-free, stereo headset, steering a time. - Press button on the steering wheel. remote control, etc. For more informa- • Some phones are not fully compatible • To Adjust Ring Volume: tion, visit the Bluetooth® Wireless with this system. - Use VOLUME buttons on the steering Technology website at (Continued) wheel. www.Bluetooth.com • To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Secret Call): - Press and hold button on the steering wheel until the audio system transfers a call to the phone.
3 222 Features of your vehicle
■ Talking on the Phone ■ Bluetooth® Wireless NOTE: When talking on the phone, “Active Call” Technology Audio Music • In addition to streaming MP3 files, message and the other party’s phone Streaming all music and sound files your cellu- number (if available) are displayed on the The audio system supports Bluetooth® lar phone supports can be played audio. Wireless Technology enabled A2DP by the audio system. (Audio Advanced Distribution Profile) and • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • To Finish a Call AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control enabled compatible cellular phones - Press button on the steering wheel. Profile) technologies. must include A2DP and AVRCP Both profiles provide steaming of music capabilities. ✽ NOTICE via compatible “PAIRED” Bluetooth® • Some A2DP and AVRCP compatible ® In the following situations, you or the Wireless Technology enabled Cellular Bluetooth Wireless Technology other party may have difficulty hearing phone. enabled cellular phones may not each other: To stream music from the Bluetooth® play music through the audio sys- Wireless Technology enabled cellular tem initially. These cellular phones 1. Speaking at the same time, your voice ® may not reach each other parties. (This phone, play your music files on your cel- may need to have the Bluetooth is not a malfunction.) Speak alternate- lular phone according to your cellular Wireless Technology streaming ly with the other party on the phone. phone user’s manual and press the enabled, for example; 2. Keep the Bluetooth® Wireless AUX button on the audio system until i.e : Menu➟Filemanager➟Music➟ Technology volume to a low level. “MP3 play” is displayed on the LCD. Option➟Play via Bluetooth High-level volume may result in dis- The audio system head unit displays • Please refer to User’s Guide for your tortion and echo. ‘MP3 MODE’. cellular phone for more information. 3. When driving on a rough road. To cancel Bluetooth® Wireless 4. When driving at high speeds. Technology enabled cellular phone 5. When the window is open. music streaming, stop music play- 6. When the air conditioning vents are back on the cellular phone or facing the microphone. change the audio mode to AM/FM, 7. When the sound of the air condition- SIRIUS, CD, iPod, ect. ing fan is loud.
3223 Features of your vehicle
■ Phone Setup • Pairing a phone NOTE: All Bluetooth® Wireless Technology relat- Before using Bluetooth® Wireless • If the phone is paired with two or ed operations can be performed in Technology features, the phone must be more vehicles of the same model, PHONE menu. paired (registered) with the audio sys- some phones may not handle 1) Push the SETUP button to enter tem. Up to 5 phones can be paired with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology SETUP mode. the system. devices of that name correctly. In this case, you may need to change NOTE: the name displayed on your phone. • The pairing procedure of the phone For example, if the vehicles' name is varies according to each phone KMC CAR, you may need to change model. Before attempting to pair the name displayed on you phone phone, please see your phone’s from KMC_CAR to JOHNS_CAR or User’s Guide for instructions. KMC CAR_1 to avoid ambiguity. • Once pairing with the phone is com- Refer to your phone User’s Guide, or 2) Rotate the TUNE knob to move the pleted, there is no need to pair with contact your cellular carrier or phone cursor between items push the that phone again unless the phone manufacturer for instructions. ENTER button to select “PHONE”. is deleted manually from the audio 3) Rotate the TUNE knob to move the system (refer “Deleting a Phone” • Connecting a phone cursor between items and push the section) or the vehicle’s information When the Bluetooth® Wireless ENTER button to select a desired item. is removed from the phone. Technology system is enabled, the phone previously used is automatically ➀ Press SETUP button to enter SETUP selected and re-connected. If you want to mode. select different phone previously paired, ➁ Select “PHONE”, then “PAIR” in the phone can be selected through PHONE menu. “Select Phone” menu. ➂ The audio displays “Device : [Name] Only a selected phone can be used with passkey: 0000” the hands-free system at a time. ➃ Search and select the device name in your mobile phone to starting the pair- ing process.
3 224 Features of your vehicle
➀ Press SETUP button to enter SETUP • Changing Priority • Deleting a Phone mode. If several phones are paired with the The paired phone can be deleted. ➁ Select “PHONE”, then “SELECT” in audio system, the system attempts to - When the phone is deleted, all the infor- PHONE menu. connect following order when the mation associated with that phone is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system also deleted (including phonebook). is enabled: - If you want to use the deleted phone with 1) “Priority” checked phone. the audio system again, pairing proce- 2) Previously connected phone dure must be completed once more. 3) Gives up auto connection. ➀ Press SETUP button to enter SETUP ➀ Press SETUP button to enter SETUP mode. ➁ ➂ mode. Select “PHONE”, then “DELETE” in Select desired phone name from the list ➁ Select “PHONE”, then “PRIORITY” in PHONE menu. shown. PHONE menu. ➂ Select desired phone name from the list ➃ ® The Bluetooth Wireless Technology ➂ Select desired phone name from the shown. icon appears on the upper side of audio list shown. display when a phone is connected.
• ADVANCED Menu After pressing the SETUP button, select the “Phone” menu. while in PHONE menu, select the “Advanced” menu to make Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Phone settings.(The ADVANCED menu may differ according to audio specifica- tions.)
3225 Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology sys- • At any time if you say “help”, the system tem off will announce what commands are While in ADVANCED menu, select available. “BT Off” to turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology System. ■ Menu tree The menu tree identifies available voice ■ Voice Recognition Activation recognition Bluetooth® Wireless Incoming Volume (Bluetooth® Wireless • The voice recognition engine contained Technology functions. Technology call volume adjustments) in the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology System can be activated in the follow- While in ADVANCED menu, press “In. Vol” Call [Name] Ex) Call John(at Home) Use the knob key to set the desired vol- ing conditions: ume and select the ENTER button. - Button Activation The voice recognition system will be Dial [Number] Ex) Dial 911 Contacts Sync (Automatic Phonebook active when the button is pressed download setting) and after the sound of a Beep. Call By name - Active Listening While in ADVANCED menu, select By number “Contacts” To automatically save the The voice recognition system will be active for a period of time when the contacts and call history in your mobile Redial phone each time you connect a mobile Voice Recognition system has asked device, select ON. If you do not wish for for a customer response. automatic download, select OFF. Call Back It’s not available to make a phone call by • The system can recognize single digits ® from zero to nine while number greater Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio Phonebook Add entry By voice system while the phonebook is being than ten will not be recognized. downloaded. By phone • The system shall cancel voice recogni- tion mode in following cases : When Change name Language of Bluetooth® Wireless pressing the button and saying Delete name Technology voice recognition “cancel” following the beep. When not While in ADVANCED menu, select making a call and pressing the “Language”. To change the language, button. When voice recognition has select the desired language and press failed 3 consecutive times. the ENTER button. 3 226 Features of your vehicle
■ Making a Phone Call • Calling by Name ✽ Tip • Direct Calling A phone call can be made by speaking ■ Voice Operation ➀ Press button. names registered in the audio system. To get the best performance out of the ➁ Voice Recognition System, observe the Say the following command. - Call
3227 Features of your vehicle
• Dialing by Number ■ Phone Book (In-Vehicle) ✽ NOTICE A phone call can be made by dialing the • Adding entry by voice - The system can recognize single digits spoken numbers. The system can recog- Phone numbers and voice tags can be from zero to nine. Numbers that are nize single digits from zero to nine. registered. Entries registered in the ten or greater cannot be recognized. phone can also be transferred. - You can enter each digit individually ➀ Press button. or group digits together in preferred ➁ Say “Call”. ➀ Press button. string lengths. - To speed up input, it is a good idea to ➂ Say “By number” when prompted. ➁ Say "Phonebook". group all digits into a continuous string. ➃ Say desired phone numbers. - The system replies with all available ➄ - Recommend to enter the numbers Say “Dial” to complete the number and commands. constituted an grouping within all make a call. - To skip the information message, digit numbers to dial 995 / 734 / 0000 press again and then a beep is - The display corresponding to each ✽ Tip heard. operation appears on the screen as fol- A shortcut to each of the following func- ➂ Say “Add Entry”. lows: tions is available: ➃ Say “By Voice” to proceed. Input operation example: ➀ Say “Dial Number” ➄ Say the name of the entry when 1. Say: “Nine, nine, five” ➁ Say “Dial
3 228 Features of your vehicle
• Adding Entry by Phone • Deleting Name ■ Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ➀ Press button. The registered names can be deleted. Audio Speaker Adaptation ➁ Say "Phonebook". Speaker adaptation will improve perform- ➂ Say "Add Entry" after prompt. ➀ Press button. ance of voice recognition system to a ➃ Say "By Phone" to proceed. ➁ Say “Phonebook”. particular user voice. ➄ Say “Yes” to confirm. ➂ Say “Delete Name” after prompt. This will degrade the performance for ➅ Your phone will start to transfer ➃ Say the name of the entry (voice tag). other users. phone/contact list to the audio system. ➄ Say “Yes” to confirm. This process may take over 10 min- • Record utes depending on the phone model ➀ Press button for 10sec. and number of entries ➁ Say “Record profile”. ➆ Wait till the audio displays “Transfer ➂ Say “Yes”. Complete” message. ➃ Say the word displayed on Radio.
• Delete • Changing Name ➀ Press button for 10sec. The registered names can be modified. ➁ Say “Delete profile”. ➂ Say “Yes”. ➀ Press button. ➁ Say “Phonebook”. ➂ Say “Change Name” after prompt. ➃ Say the name of the entry (voice tag). ➄ Say “Yes” to confirm. ➅ Say new desired name.
3229 Features of your vehicle
■ Key matrix
Class No. KEY Paired H/P Connected Disconnected Incoming Call Outgoing Call Active Call 2nd Call Empty Normal mode BT SETUP menu
2nd call 2nd Call SHORT Not Paired Not Connecting --Accept Call - 1st Call:waiting 2nd Call:waiting 2nd Call:active 1st Call:active 1
LONG ------Transfer call:secret call
VR VR VR VR SHORT Reject Call End Call End Call End Call MODE Cancel MODE Cancel MODE Cancel MODE Cancel
2 Speaker Speaker LONG - - Adaptation Adaptation - - - - [10sec] (Only English) (Only English)
SHORT Active Active Active Active - - - -
3
LONG Change Change Change Change - - -- [10sec] language language language language
3 230 Features of your vehicle
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Welcome Connections / Setup CAUTION The Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) The RSE system is designed to make System is a compact, built-in, easy-to-use your time on the road more enjoyable. Disclaimer: The RSE system is pro- entertainment system designed to provide Please follow these instructions carefully grammed to the regional display family fun while you are on the road. Enjoy to get the most out of your RSE. formats for your region (NTSC or great quality sound from the vehicle PAL). Please note that your RSE will speakers, or have a private, quiet viewing not read DVDs from a different with the wireless headphones. CAUTION region. The display unit is mounted to the ceiling • Refrain from using food or drinks near the RSE, the wireless head- in the rear passenger area of the vehicle, ✽ allowing rear-seat passengers to play phones or the remote control. NOTICE DVD movies, video CDs or music CDs. • Direct sunlight may interfere with RSE operation is prevented during the Users may also plug in a game platform or the headphone's operation and first 2 seconds after the ignition switch is VHS player. Headphones, game car- performance. turned to ignition on or accessory mode. tridges and other accessories can be kept • Normal RSE operation cannot be neatly out of the way in the 3rd-row arm- guaranteed with unofficial dupli- The RSE system is already set up and rest compartment. cated discs. ready for use. The system is always • In order to prevent inadvertent “awake” when the vehicle's ignition is System Overview battery discharge, the RSE will turned on or when the vehicle is in remain in standby mode when “accessory power mode.” The RSE System includes a mounted ignition switch is turn to ignition color monitor with a built-in audio/video ON or accessory mode. control panel and a DVD player. It also includes a remote control and two (2) • Use of rear seat entertainment sets of battery-operated wireless head- system without the engine run- phones (batteries are included). ning will reduce battery power.
3231 Features of your vehicle
Close To close the monitor, pull the bottom Folded edge forward and push it up until it clicks into the stow-away position.
RES_CLOSED_8111 HEADPHONE8111 Open Spread
RES_OPEN_8111 HEADPHONE8112 Viewing/Adjusting the Monitor Headphones To view the monitor, locate the latch on The RSE comes with two (2) sets of wire- the bottom center of the mounted unit less headphones and four (4) AAA 1.5V and pull it forward. This will release the batteries. Install the batteries by opening monitor from its locked, stow-away posi- the compartment on the right side of the tion. Use your hands to adjust the moni- headphones. Each set of headphones tor into optimal viewing position. Do not requires two (2) AAA 1.5V batteries. touch the LCD panel itself to avoid dam- age or smudging.
3 232 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE • Conserve the energy of your batteries by turning the headphones off when they are not in use. The on/off button is located on the left side of the head- phones. • The headphone has an automatic shutoff feature if an IR signal from the RSE units is not received after 20 seconds. This feature is used to pre- vent inadvertent battery discharging of the headphones. HEADPHONE8112 • The life cycle of headphone's battery ICDX_VQ-465_1 To turn the headphones on, push the but- is usually 48 hours. Audio Via Vehicle Speakers ton (➊) once. Push the button again to • In case of poor reception perform- To hear the audio from the RSE through turn the headphones off. The red LED ance, please check the battery condi- the vehicle's speakers, the RSE must be indicator on the headphone identifies the tion. selected by the Head Unit in the front of On/Off status. The power status indicator • The headphones are best used within the vehicle. To select the RSE, press is located on the left headphone. 2-6 feet (0.6-1.8 m) of the RSE unit. AUX button. To end the RSE audio trough The sound level of the headphones is Getting too close or too far away will the vehicle’s speakers, press AUX button controlled by the volume up[down] knob cause poor audio reception. again. When RSE is de-selected by the (➋) located on the side of the head- • Audio from the vehicle's CD/radio Head Unit, the headphones can still be phones. cannot be heard through the head- used to hear audio. The headphones can be stored by fold- phones. ing the headphones.
3233 Features of your vehicle
The RSE unit has an automatic video detection feature that will automatic switch CAUTION to external device when the device is Connect only appropriate input plugged into the auxiliary jacks in the vehi- sources to the RSE jacks. cle. Connecting an incorrect input may Once the RSE has switched to the exter- cause damage to the player and/or nal device, you can make your selections the external electronic device. by using the buttons on the external device. The RSE controls will not work for external devices. For example, to select a ✽ NOTICE RCA plug video game after the RSE has recognized Only external devices that have an the source, you must use the game con- active video source - such as video game AUX-INPUT-8111A trols, not the RSE controls, to choose a systems or VHS players - can be read by Connecting Other Devices to the RSE selection. the RSE. The RSE will not play an Electronic devices such as video game The RSE unit will automatically switch to external device that only has an audio systems, VHS players, Camcorder or etc, the RSE mode when the external device is source, such as a cassette player or other can be played through the RSE. These unplugged from the auxiliary jacks. CD player. external devices can be connected to the The display mode can be changed by unit via RCA plugs available throughout DISP( ) button. ✽ NOTICE the vehicle. DC power for additional elec- When using an external device connect- tronic equipment is provided by one of the ed to the power outlet, noise may occur 12-volt power outlets located in the dash. during playback. If this happens, use Additional information can be found in the the power source of the external device. vehicle manual. Press the SOURCE (SRC) Button to Cleaning of Display switch to the externally connected device. If the LCD display becomes dusty or (AUX mode) dirty, clean it by wiping gently with a soft, dry, clean cloth.
3 234 Features of your vehicle
Using the DVD player The player is only capable of reading the Disc Protection Disc compatibility bottom side of a disc. When inserting a The player has an Auto-Reload Disc single-sided disc, the label side should be Your RSE player accepts and plays all Protection feature to protect discs from up. When inserting a two-sided disc, the DVDs in 4:3 (normal) and 16:9 (wide accidental damage. If an ejected disc is desired play side should be down. screen) video formats. With DVDs that not removed within 25 seconds after being offer multiple formats, the default format ejected, it will be pulled back into the play- is 16:9 and will stay that way unless the ✽ NOTICE er.The disc will not begin playing. Disc can user changes the format. (See “Display” be played by the SRC or • Because there is no universal standard PLAY/PAUSE( ) buttons. to learn how to adjust the format.) for DVD programming, your disc may behave differently than below. Some ✽ NOTICE DVDs may present warning messages DVD Controls • The DVD player has the capability to about unauthorized duplication, some You can control your DVD by using the play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, will go directly to a menu and others buttons on the unit's control panel or by CD-DA, CD-R, CD-RW and Video- may start playing the movie immedi- using the remote control. Instructions for CD. ately. the controls listed below are the same • The DVD player has the capability to • When the vehicle's ignition is active, whether you are using the control panel play CD-DA, DVD, VCD, PCM, the loading of any playable disc will or the remote control. However, there are Dolby Digital and DTS formats. cause the player to initialize and auto- functions that are only available from the • Please refer to the appendix for the matically play the disc. If a disc was remote control. These buttons and their error messages. playing prior to the ignition being functionality are discussed in the turned off, it will not automatically “REMOTE CONTROL” section begin- Loading a Disc replay once the ignition is turned on ning. Insert the disc part way into the load slot. again. Instead, it will go into standby The player will automatically grip the disc mode. Press the SRC or and pull it in the rest of the way. The player PLAY/PAUSE( ) button to “wake will display “reading” on the screen and up” the unit and resume disc play. show the “Kia Motors” logo before begin- ning the DVD.
3235 Features of your vehicle
VIDEO MODE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
1. STOP/EJECT 2. SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL 3. PLAY/PAUSE 4. DISPLAY 5. FORWARD 6. REVERSE 7. NEXT CHAPTER 8. PREVIOUS CHAPTER 9. ENTER 10. MENU 11. SOURCE
RES_OPEN_8111
3 236 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE 2. Speaker Volume Control 4. Display The RSE will enter standby mode when You can adjust the volume one of two When the player is in DVD mode, press the the vehicle ignition is turned off and ways. First, if you are adjusting the vol- DISP button to view the DVD title, chapter back on. Press the SRC or ume for audio through the vehicle speak- number and elapsed time and other infor- PLAY/PAUSE( ) button to “wake ers, you can use the VOLUME button on mation about the DVD currently playing. up” the unit and resume disc play. the control panel or the remote control. It will also display brightness. There are This button is reserved for sending a sig- “Day Time” brightness with brightest level nal to the vehicle speakers only, and will and “Night Time” brightness which has 70% 1. Stop/Eject not adjust the headphone volume. Press level of “Day Time” brightness. Adjust the While the disc is playing, press the “+” to increase the volume and “-” to level of brightness by pressing the STOP/EJECT ( ) button to stop disc decrease the volume. REV(dimmer) or FWD(brighter) buttons. play. When the disc has stopped, press Second, the volume on the wireless The next time the player is turned on, it will the button again to eject the disc. headphones can be adjusted by turning return to the brightness level it was adjusted the VOL knob located on the left side of to when last used. ✽ NOTICE the headphones. The RSE unit has two presets of display The player has an Auto-Reload Disc brightness. When the headlamp is turned Protection feature to protect discs from 3. Play/Pause on, the display brightness level will be accidental damage. If an ejected disc is You do not need to press the play button dimmed as the preset. However, when the not removed within 25 seconds after after first loading a DVD or VCD; it will headlamp is turned off, the display bright- being ejected, it will be pulled back into start automatically by playing the first ness will return to the daytime brightness. the player. This is to protect the disc track or bringing up the disc menu. Press DISP to adjust the image format. The from accidental damage. If the disc does not automatically load, image format, also known as the aspect press PLAY/PAUSE( ) to play the DVD. ratio, is a ratio of the height to width of the While playing a DVD, press PLAY image on the screen. For example, a 4:3 /PAUSE( ) to pause the DVD. Press ratio would mean an image that is 4 units by the button again to resume play. 3 units.
3237 Features of your vehicle
You have two options: 4:3 (normal) and 16:9 6. Reverse 8. Previous Chapter (widescreen). Press the display button to There are three DVD and VCD fast Press the PREV button to skip to the select the preferred aspect ratio. reverse speeds. Press and hold the REV beginning of the previous chapter. Press When the RSE unit receives video signals button for up to 2 seconds and the player and hold the PREV button to move quick- from the AUX, the aspect ratio can be will reverse through the DVD at 4 times ly through the chapters. changed to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISP button. the normal speed (8 times for VCDs). Depending on your DVD, if the PREV The aspect ratio information will auto- Hold the button for more than 2 seconds button is pressed during the first 8 sec- matically disappear if no button is but less than 4 seconds and the player onds of the first chapter, the player will pressed for three seconds. will reverse at about 8 times the normal skip to the beginning of the last chapter speed (20 times for VCDs). Hold the but- of the DVD. 5. Forward ton for more than 4 seconds and the reverse will increase to 32 times the nor- 9. Enter There are three DVD and VCD fast for- mal speed for both DVDs and VCDs. ward speeds. Press and hold the FWD A momentary press shall initiate a select button for up to 2 seconds and the player Press the REV button again to stop or enter function of a selected menu will fast forward at 4 times the normal reversing and return to normal speed item. speed (8 times for VCDs). Hold the but- play. ton for more than 2 seconds but less than 10. Menu 7. Next Chapter 4 seconds and the player will fast forward DVDs may contain special programming at about 8 times the normal speed (20 While a DVD is playing, press the NEXT or features that are accessed by using the times for VCDs). Hold the button for more button to skip to the next chapter. The menu. To use the menu with a DVD that is than 4 seconds and the fast forward will current chapter number is shown on the playing, press the MENU button once to increase to about 32 times the normal screen. Press and hold the NEXT button display the DVD disc menu. Press the but- speed for both DVDs and VCDs. Press to move quickly through the chapters. ton a second time to exit the menu and the FWD button again to stop fast for- return to the DVD program. warding and return to normal speed play. ✽ NOTICE The menu is not available during disc ini- Depending on the DVD, if NEXT is tialization, the beginning credits or any pressed during the last chapter on a copyright FBI warnings. DVD, a red circle with a “Invalid icon[:]” may be displayed, indicating an invalid button press.
3 238 Features of your vehicle
When viewing a menu, pressing the Pressing the SRC button will switch Using the CD Player MENU button again will automatically between the following RSE states: The RSE will play audio CDs in both the return to the movie at the point it was Playback state - will play DVDs, VCDs, and standard (12 cm) and mini-disc (8 cm) being viewed.You can also select “play” or format. any other option by using the NEXT, CDs PREV, FWD and REV buttons. Auxiliary (AUX) state - will play video ✽ Press the NEXT button to move the cursor games and other external devices NOTICE up and the PREV button to move the cur- While the player will accept DVD sor down the menu. When an external source is selected, the ROMs and CD ROMs discs, the RSE RSE’s internal DVD player turns off. Press the FWD button to move the cursor cannot play discs in these formats and Press the SRC button to switch back will eject them. to the right, and the REV button to move from the external source to the internal the cursor to the left. DVD player. With power applied to your unit, insert ✽ If a disc is present in the DVD player, the the disc part way into the load slot. The NOTICE disc will begin to play. If another source player will automatically grip the CD disc, You must repeatedly push any button to has been detected, such as a VCR or pull it the rest of the way in and begin move through several items. Pressing video game, the RSE will enter the AUX playing. and holding any button will not advance mode automatically and shall remain so the cursor beyond the position just until a disc is inserted or until the PLAY/ moved. SRC button is pressed on the RSE's front CD Controls panel or on the remote control. If the The following functions are available Press ENTER to select the desired menu vehicle ignition is on but the player isn't when playing audio CDs. choice. being used, the display will power off. The DVD mechanism will be in sleep 11. Source mode, but the main RSE's controller will stay up to accept commands from the Press the SOURCE button to switch from front panel controls or the remote control. the RSE’s internal DVD player to an external device such as a VCR or video game. The sound and images from the ✽ NOTICE external source will be presented The external device must be correctly through the RSE. connected to the RSE in order to play properly.
3239 Features of your vehicle
AUDIO MODE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
1. STOP/EJECT 2. VOLUME CONTROL 3. PLAY/PAUSE 4. DISPLAY 5. FORWARD 6. REVERSE 7. NEXT TRACK 8. PREVIOUS TRACK
RES_CLOSED_8111
3 240 Features of your vehicle
1. Stop/Eject 3. Play/Pause 4. Display While the disc is playing, press the When an audio CD is inserted, the RSE When the player is in DVD mode, press the STOP/EJECT( ) button to stop disc will display the Kia logo, then automati- DISP button to view the DVD title, chapter play. cally begin playing the first track. The number and elapsed time and other infor- While the disc is stopped, press the track number and time elapsed for the mation about the DVD currently playing. STOP/EJECT( ) button again to eject current track is displayed. The next time the player is turned on, it will the disc. If a CD is loaded and playing, press the return to the brightness level it was adjusted PLAY/PAUSE( ) button to pause the to when last used. 2. Volume Control CD. Press the button again to resume The RSE unit has two presets of display You can adjust the volume one of two play. brightness. When the headlamp is turned ways. First, if you are adjusting the vol- If a CD is already loaded, stopping and on, the display brightness level will be ume for audio through the vehicle speak- playing the CD by pressing dimmed as the preset. However, when the ers, you can use the VOLUME ( PLAY/PAUSE( ) button on the remote headlamp is turned off, the display bright- )button on the control panel or the control; cycling the ignition and pressing ness will return to the daytime brightness. remote control. Press “+” to increase the play; or changing the source will cause the Press DISP to adjust the image format. The volume and “-” to decrease the volume. CD to begin playing at the point where it image format, also known as the aspect The volume level will be displayed on the was stopped during the previous play. The ratio, is a ratio of the height to width of the head-unit, when the RSE unit volume player will automatically play this previous image on the screen. For example, a 4:3 level is adjusted from its control panel or play position unless the ratio would mean an image that is 4 units by remote control. This button does not STOP/EJECT( ) button is pressed. 3 units. You have two options: 4:3 (normal) affect headphone volume. At the end of the CD, the player will auto- and 16:9 (widescreen). Press the display Second, you can adjust the volume on matically return to the first track and con- button to select the preferred aspect ratio. the wireless headphones by locating the tinue playing. When the RSE unit receives video signals VOL control wheel on the left side of the from the AUX, the aspect ratio can be headphones. Roll the control wheel to changed to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISP button. adjust the volume. The aspect ratio information will auto- matically disappear if no button is pressed for three seconds.
3241 Features of your vehicle
5. Forward 7. Next Track There are two CD fast forward speeds. Press the NEXT button to skip to the Press and hold the FWD button for up to beginning of the next track. The next 2 seconds and the player will fast forward track number is displayed on the screen. at 3 times the normal speed. Hold the Press and hold the NEXT button for 2 button for more than 2 seconds and the seconds or more to move quickly through player will fast forward at about 10 times the tracks. the normal speed. When the holding but- ton is released, the RSE unit will auto- 8. Previous Track matically return to a play mode. Press the PREV button to skip to the beginning of the current track. 6. Reverse Press the PREV button during the first 8 There are two fast reverse speeds. The seconds of the current track to skip to the RSE unit will fast reverse at 3 times the beginning of the previous track. normal speed, if the REV button is Press the PREV button during the first 8 pressed. Hold the button for more than 2 seconds of the first track to skip to the seconds and the RSE unit will fast beginning of the last track on the CD. reverse at about 10 times the normal Press and hold the PREV button for 2 speed. When the button is released, the seconds or more to move quickly through RSE unit will automatically return to a the tracks. play mode.
3 242 Features of your vehicle
REMOTE CONTROL
1. STOP 2. SPEAKER VOL (+, -) 3. PLAY/PAUSE 4. DISPLAY 5. FORWARD 6. REVERSE 7. NEXT 8. PREVIOUS 9. ENTER 10. MENU 11. SOURCE 12. ANGLE 13. SUBSCRIPT 14. LANGUAGE 15. SLOW PLAY 16. ON/OFF
REMOTE_CONTROL_8111
3243 Features of your vehicle
Using the Remote Control 3. Play/Pause It will also display brightness. There are In addition to having all the buttons and When an audio CD(VCD/DVD) is insert- “Day Time” brightness with brightest level functionality listed in the DVD and CD ed, the RSE will display the Kia logo, and “Night Time” brightness which has 70% Controls section, the remote control has then automatically begin playing the first level of “Day Time” brightness. Adjust the several other buttons that offer additional track. The track number and time elapsed level of brightness by pressing the functions. It is an infrared remote control, for the current track is displayed. REV(dimmer) or FWD(brighter) buttons. and must be pointed at the face of the If a CD(VCD/DVD) is loaded and playing, The next time the player is turned on, it will RSE at a 45° angle for best results. It press the PLAY/PAUSE( ) button to return to the brightness level it was adjusted requires a CR2025 battery (included). pause the CD(VCD/DVD). Press the but- to when last used. The remote control has the following ton again to resume play. The RSE unit has two presets of display additional buttons: If a CD(VCD/DVD) is already loaded, stop- brightness. When the headlamp is turned ping and playing the CD(VCD/ DVD) by on, the display brightness level will be ✽ NOTICE pressing PLAY/PAUSE( ) button on dimmed as the preset. However, when the the remote control; cycling the ignition and headlamp is turned off, the display bright- The RSE system is always “awake” ness will return to the daytime brightness. when the vehicle's ignition is turned on pressing play; or changing the source will or when the vehicle is in “accessory cause the CD(VCD/DVD) to begin playing Press DISP to adjust the image format. The power mode.” at the point where it was stopped during image format, also known as the aspect the previous play. The player will automati- ratio, is a ratio of the height to width of the cally play this previous play position unless image on the screen. For example, a 4:3 1. Stop the STOP/EJECT( ) button is pressed. ratio would mean an image that is 4 units by Pressing this button once will stop DVD At the end of the CD(VCD/DVD), the 3 units. You have two options: 4:3 (normal) or CD play. To eject a disc, you must use player will automatically return to the first and 16:9 (widescreen). Press the display the eject button on the control panel. track and continue playing. button to select the preferred aspect ratio. When the RSE unit receives video signals 2. Speaker Volume “+” and “-” 4. Display from the AUX, the aspect ratio can be These buttons control the volume of the When the player is in DVD mode, press the changed to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISP button. audio of a DVD or CD through the vehicle DISP button to view the DVD title, chapter The aspect ratio information will auto- speakers, not the volume from head- number and elapsed time and other infor- matically disappear if no button is phones. Press “+” to turn the volume up mation about the DVD currently playing. pressed for three seconds. and “-” to turn the volume down.
3 244 Features of your vehicle
5. Forward 7. Next 9. Enter There are three DVD and VCD fast for- While a DVD is playing, press the NEXT A momentary press shall initiate a select ward speeds. Press and hold the FWD button to skip to the next chapter. The or enter function of a selected menu button for up to 2 seconds and the player current chapter number is shown on the item. will fast forward at 4 times the normal screen. Press and hold the NEXT button speed (8 times for VCDs). Hold the but- to move quickly through the chapters. 10. Menu ton for more than 2 seconds but less than DVDs may contain special programming 4 seconds and the player will fast forward ✽ NOTICE or features that are accessed by using the at about 8 times the normal speed (20 Depending on the DVD, if NEXT is menu. To use the menu with a DVD that is times for VCDs). Hold the button for more pressed during the last chapter on a playing, press the MENU button once to than 4 seconds and the fast forward will DVD, a red circle with a “Invalid display the DVD disc menu. Press the but- increase to about 32 times the normal icon[:]” may be displayed, indicating ton a second time to exit the menu and speed for both DVDs and VCDs. Press an invalid button press. return to the DVD program. the FWD button again to stop fast for- warding and return to normal speed play. The menu is not available during disc ini- 8. Previous tialization, the beginning credits or any Press the PREV button to skip to the copyright FBI warnings. 6. Reverse beginning of the previous chapter. Press When viewing a menu, pressing the There are three DVD and VCD fast and hold the PREV button to move quick- MENU button again will automatically reverse speeds. Press and hold the REV ly through the chapters. return to the movie at the point it was button for up to 2 seconds and the player Depending on your DVD, if the PREV being viewed.You can also select “play” or will reverse through the DVD at 4 times button is pressed during the first 8 sec- any other option by using the NEXT, the normal speed (8 times for VCDs). onds of the first chapter, the player will PREV, FWD and REV buttons. Hold the button for more than 2 seconds skip to the beginning of the last chapter Press the NEXT button to move the cursor but less than 4 seconds and the player of the DVD. up and the PREV button to move the cur- will reverse at about 8 times the normal sor down the menu. speed (20 times for VCDs). Hold the but- ton for more than 4 seconds and the Press the FWD button to move the cursor reverse will increase to 32 times the nor- to the right, and the REV button to move mal speed for both DVDs and VCDs. the cursor to the left. Press the REV button again to stop reversing and return to normal speed play.
3245 Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE When an external source is selected, the 12. Angle You must repeatedly push any button to RSE’s internal DVD player turns off. Some DVDs offer different scene angles. move through several items. Pressing Press the SRC button to switch back If available on the DVD, the ANGLE but- and holding any button will not advance from the external source to the internal ton will show you the other available the cursor beyond the position just DVD player. scene angles. If angle scenes are not moved. If a disc is present in the DVD player, the available, then “Invalid icon[:]” will be disc will begin to play. If another source displayed. Pressing the ANGLE button Press ENTER to select the desired menu has been detected, such as a VCR or during CD play will do nothing. choice. video game, the RSE will enter the AUX mode automatically and shall remain so 13. Subscript until a disc is inserted or until the PLAY/ 11. Source The SUBSC button allows you to display SRC button is pressed on the RSE’s front or remove language subtitles. If no lan- Press the SOURCE button to switch from panel or on the remote control. If the the RSE’s internal DVD player to an guage subtitles are available, the display vehicle ignition is on but the player isn't will show an invalid icon[:]. Pressing the external device such as a VCR or video being used, the display will power off. game. The sound and images from the SUBSC button during CD play will do The DVD mechanism will be in sleep nothing. external source will be presented mode, but the main RSE's controller will through the RSE. stay up to accept commands from the 14. Language Pressing the SRC button will switch front panel controls or the remote control. between the following RSE states: Pressing the LANG button will allow you ✽ NOTICE to select your preferred language, if avail- Playback state - will play DVDs, VCDs, and able. Select the language and then press CDs The external device must be correctly enter. If no other languages are available, connected to the RSE in order to play the display will show an invalid icon[:]. Auxiliary (AUX) state - will play video properly. Pressing the LANG button during CD games and other external devices play will do nothing.
3 246 Features of your vehicle
15. Slow Play From the remote control for DVD, you can There are 3 slow forward and 3 slow immediately switch to 1/8 forward or reverse speeds available when viewing backward speed with the ( , ) but- DVDs. To review a DVD in slow motion, tons. Press either button again to return first press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to normal play. to pause the DVD, then press either REV While using the Slow Play feature, the or FWD ((W) or (X) on the remote con- current play speed is displayed on the trol) to select slow playback in either screen. reverse or forward. Press PLAY again to resume normal Pressing either the REV or FWD ((W) or play. (X) on the remote control) button once changes the player to 1/8 of normal 16. On/Off speed. Press the button again to return to This button will only turn off the DVD or pause mode. CD and display, not the system itself. The Press and hold either button for more system will remain on standby. than 2 seconds but less than 4 seconds and the player will switch to 1/4 of the normal speed. Hold either button for more than 4 seconds and the player will switch to 1/2 of the normal speed.
3247 Features of your vehicle
Appendix Messages
NON PLAYABLE MEDIA An incompatible format disc is inserted, or the disc is not playable. :[INVALID ICON] Invalid button press: The PREV button was pressed during the first chapter of a DVD, or the NEXT button was pressed during the last chapter of a DVD. NO DISC Displayed with the PLAY button is pressed but not disc is in the player. READING The player is searching the disc to determine its format and check for any special program- ming. STOP A disc is inserted in the RSE but not playing. DISC ERROR The inserted disc is either scratched or otherwise damaged, and cannot be played. REGION ERROR The region code of the disc is different from the RSE DVD region setting. The RSE unit can only play disc from the intent region. (ie, Korean Region, US region, European region, etc…)
Technical Specifications
Input power requirements 12 volts nominal (10.5 to 15.5 volts) @ 5 amps nominal (10amps peak max) A/V inputs - Audio Input : 1 volts nominal (0.8 to 1.2 V) - Video Input : 1 volts nominal (0.7 to 1.4 V)
3 248 Features of your vehicle
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible causes / solutions The disc becomes stuck or Press the STOP/EJECT button to release the disc. The player will attempt to eject the disc blocked. up to three times before performing the Auto-Reload function. Once the Auto-Reload func- tion is complete, press the STOP/EJECT button again to release the disc from the player. If a disc is still stuck or blocked in the RSE unit, turn the ignition off and then on again to reset the RSE unit. There is no audio in the head- Verify that the headphone is equipped with batteries, and that the batteries are charged. phones. Insert or replace 2 AAA batteries to resume headphone function. The RSE does not work. If the display does not show “NO DISC”, then there is no power. Check the vehicle fuse. If the RSE still does not work, contact your authorized Kia dealer. The remote control does not Make sure you are pointing the remote control at the face of the RSE at a 45° angle. Change work. the battery. [Device requires one (1) CR2025 battery.] Use the control buttons on the RSE display panel. If the remote control still does not work, contact your authorized Kia dealer. Continue receiving an invalid Invalid button press. The function you are trying to perform is not available. icon[:] when a button is pressed
3249 Before driving / 4-2 Key positions / 4-3 Starting the engine / 4-4 Automatic transaxle / 4-5 Cruise control system / 4-11 Brake system / 4-14 Electronic stability control / 4-19 Rear parking assist system / 4-22 Rearview camera / 4-25
Driving your vehicle 4
Economical operation / 4-26 Special driving conditions / 4-27 Winter driving / 4-29 Trailer towing / 4-30 Overloading / 4-36 Label information / 4-37 Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle: Before starting (Continued) • Be sure that all windows, outside mir- • Close and lock all doors. You are much more likely to have a ror(s), and outside lights are clean. • Position the seat so that all controls are serious accident if you drink or take • Check the condition of the tires. easily reached. drugs and drive. • Check under the vehicle for any sign of • Adjust the inside and outside rearview If you are drinking or taking drugs, leaks. mirrors. don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv- • Be sure there are no obstacles behind • Be sure that all lights work. er who has been drinking or taking you if you intend to back up. • Check all gauges. drugs. Choose a designated driver • Check the operation of warning lights or call a cab. Necessary inspections when the ignition switch is turned to Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine the ON position. coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid • Release the parking brake and make should be checked on a regular basis, sure the brake warning light goes out. WARNING • When you make a sudden stop or with the exact interval depending on the For safe operation, be sure you are famil- turn the steering wheel rapidly, fluid. Further details are provided in iar with your vehicle and its equipment. Section 6, Maintenance. loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with WARNING WARNING - Driving under the operation of the foot pedals, the influence of alcohol or possibly causing an accident. Driving while distracted can result Keep all things in the vehicle in a loss of vehicle control, that may drugs safely stored. lead to an accident, severe person- Drinking and driving is dangerous. al injury, and death. The driver’s • If you do not focus on driving, it Drunk driving is the number one may cause an accident. Be care- primary responsibility is in the safe contributor to the highway death and legal operation of a vehicle, and ful when operating what may dis- toll each year. Even a small amount turb driving such as audio or use of any handheld devices, other of alcohol will affect your reflexes, equipment, or vehicle systems heater. It is the responsibility of perceptions and judgement. Driving the driver to always drive safely. which take the driver’s eyes, atten- while under the influence of drugs tion and focus away from the safe is as dangerous or more dangerous operation of a vehicle or which are than driving drunk. not permissible by law should (Continued) never be used during operation of the vehicle.
24 Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS ON The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started. Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.
START Turn the ignition key to the START posi- tion to start the engine. The engine will 1VQA3017 1VQA3018 crank until you release the key; then it Illuminated ignition switch Ignition switch and anti-theft returns to the ON position. The brake (if equipped) steering column lock warning lamp can be checked in this Whenever front door is opened, the igni- Ignition switch position position. tion switch will be illuminated for your LOCK ✽ convenience, provided the ignition switch The steering wheel locks to protect NOTICE is not in the ON position. The light will go against theft. The ignition key can be If difficulty is experienced turning the off immediately when the ignition switch removed only in the LOCK position. ignition switch to the ACC position, turn is turned on or go off after about 10 sec- When turning the ignition switch to the the key while turning the steering wheel onds when the door is closed. LOCK position, push the key inward at right and left to release the tension. the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position. WARNING ACC (Accessory) When you intend to park or stop the The steering wheel is unlocked and elec- vehicle with the engine on, be care- trical accessories are operative. ful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.
43 Driving your vehicle
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING - Ignition key WARNING CAUTION • Never turn the ignition switch to Always wear appropriate shoes If the engine stalls while you are in LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is when operating your vehicle. motion, do not attempt to move the moving.This would result in loss of Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski shift lever to the P (Park) position. If directional control and braking boots,etc.) may interfere with your traffic and road conditions permit, function, which could cause an ability to use the brake and acceler- you may put the shift lever in the N accident. ator pedal. (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition • The anti-theft steering column lock switch to the START position in an is not a substitute for the parking 1. Make sure the parking brake is attempt to restart the engine. brake. Before leaving the driver’s applied. seat, always make sure the shift 2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P lever is engaged in P (Park) for (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully. automatic transaxle, set the park- CAUTION You can also start the engine when ing brake fully and shut the engine Do not engage the starter for more the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) off. Unexpected and sudden vehi- than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls position. cle movement may occur if these out or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 sec- precautions are not taken. 3. Turn the ignition switch to START and onds before re-engaging the starter. • Never reach for the ignition switch, hold it there until the engine starts (a Improper use of the starter may or any other controls through the maximum of 10 seconds), then damage it. steering wheel while the vehicle is release the key. in motion. The presence of your 4. In extremely cold weather (below hand or arm in this area could -18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has cause a loss of vehicle control, an not been operated for several days, let accident and serious bodily injury the engine warm up without depress- or death. ing the accelerator. • Do not place any movable objects Whether the engine is cold or warm, it around the driver’s seat as they should be started without depressing may move while driving, interfere the accelerator. with the driver and lead to an acci- dent.
44 Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Lock release button prevents shift lever movement without first depressing the button.
+ (UP)
- (DOWN) Automatic mode Sports mode
Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting. The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever. The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.
OVQ049059
45 Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a CAUTION forward or reverse gear. • To avoid damage to your transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any for- WARNING - Automatic ward gear position with the transaxle brakes on. Before leaving the driver’s seat, • When stopped on an upgrade, do always make sure the shift lever is not hold the vehicle stationary Automatic in the P (PARK) position; then set with engine power. Use the serv- mode the parking brake fully and shut the ice brake or the parking brake. engine off. Unexpected and sudden • Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P 1VQA3024 vehicle movement can occur if (Park) into D (Drive), or R these precautions are not followed Automatic transaxle operation (Reverse) when the engine is in the order identified. above idle speed. All normal forward driving is done with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position. To move the shift lever from the P (Park) position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the lock release button must be depressed.
64 Driving your vehicle
N (neutral) Transaxle ranges (Continued) The wheels and transaxle are not locked. P (park) • Never leave a child unattended in The vehicle will roll freely even on the Always come to a complete stop before a vehicle. shifting into P (Park). This position locks slightest incline unless the parking brake the transaxle and prevents the front or service brakes are applied. wheels from rotating. CAUTION D (drive) The transaxle may be damaged if This is the normal forward driving posi- WARNING you shift into P (Park) while the tion. The transaxle will automatically shift • Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. through a 6-gear sequence, providing the vehicle is in motion will cause the best fuel economy and power. drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the R (reverse) For extra power when passing another vehicle. Use this position to drive the vehicle vehicle or climbing grades, depress the • Do not use the P (Park) position backward. accelerator fully, at which time the in place of the parking brake. transaxle will automatically downshift to Always make sure the shift lever the next lower gear. is latched in the P (Park) position CAUTION so that it cannot be moved unless Always come to a complete stop ✽ the lock release button is pushed NOTICE before shifting into or out of R in, AND set the parking brake Always come to a complete stop before (Reverse); you may damage the fully. shifting into D (Drive). transaxle if you shift into R while • Before leaving the driver’s seat, the vehicle is in motion, except as always make sure the shift lever explained in “Rocking the Vehicle”, is in the P (PARK) position. Set in this manual. the parking brake fully, shut the engine off and take the key with you. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if you do not follow these precau- tions in the order specified. (Continued)
47 Driving your vehicle
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to (Continued) shift up one gear. • In sports mode, when the engine rpm Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once approaches the red zone, shift points to shift down one gear. are varied to upshift automatically. • To maintain the required levels of ✽ NOTICE vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain • In sports mode, the driver must exe- + (UP) gearshifts when the shift lever is oper- cute upshifts in accordance with road ated. conditions, taking care to keep the • When driving on a slippery road, engine speed below the red zone. Sports mode push the shift lever forward into the • In sports mode, only the 6 forward +(up) position. This causes the - (DOWN) gears can be selected. To reverse or transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear OVQ039025 park the vehicle, move the shift lever which is better for smooth driving on to the “R” or “P” position as required. Sports mode a slippery road. Push the shift lever to • In sports mode, downshifts are made Whether the vehicle is stationary or in the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st automatically when the vehicle slows motion, sports mode is selected by push- gear. ing the shift lever from the “D” position down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear into the manual gate. To return to “D” is automatically selected. range operation, push the shift lever back (Continued) into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a manual transaxle, the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.
84 Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a Shift lock system standing start For your safety, the automatic transaxle To move up a steep grade from a stand- has a shift lock system which prevents ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift shifting the transaxle out of P (Park) the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the unless the brake pedal is depressed. appropriate gear depending on load To shift the transaxle out of P (Park): weight and steepness of the grade, and 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. release the parking brake. Depress the 2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to accelerator gradually while releasing the the ON position. service brakes. 3. Depress the lock release button and When accelerating from a stop on a move the shift lever. steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten- If the brake pedal is repeatedly dency to roll backwards. Shifting the OVQ039026 depressed and released with the shift shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) while Shift-lock override lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering in Sports mode will help prevent the noise near the shift lever may be heard. If the shift lever should fail to move from vehicle from rolling backwards. This is a normal condition. the P (Park) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following: 1. Carefully remove the cap covering the S/Lock override access hole which is located on the right side of the shift lever.
49 Driving your vehicle
Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. If the ignition switch is in any other position, the key cannot be removed.
OVQ039027 OVQ039028 2. Insert the screwdriver into the access 3. Depress the lock release button and hole and press down on the screwdriv- move the shift lever. er. 4. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealership immediately.
4 10 Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a con- stant speed without resting your foot on the accelerator pedal. This system is designed to function above approximate- ly 40 km/h (24 mph).
WARNING - Cruise control Do not use the cruise control feature under the following conditions: • Heavy or unsteady traffic • Slippery or winding roads OVQ046002N OVQ046003N • Situations that involve varying To set cruise control speed: 3. Push the COAST/SET switch, and speeds 1. Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button on release it at the desired speed. The SET the steering wheel to turn the system indicator light in the instrument cluster ✽ NOTICE on. The CRUISE indicator light in the will illuminate. Release the accelerator To activate cruise control, depress the instrument cluster will illuminate. at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained. brake pedal at least once after turning the 2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which ignition switch to the ON position or must be more than 40 km/h (24 mph). The SET function cannot be activated until starting the engine. This is to check if the approximately 2 seconds after the brake switch which is important part to CRUISE ON-OFF button has been cancel cruise control is in normal condi- WARNING engaged. tion. If the cruise control is left on, On a steep grade, the vehicle may (CRUISE indicator light in the momentarily slow down while going down- CAUTION instrument cluster illuminated) the hill. Driving while distracted is dangerous cruise control can be switched on and should be avoided. Drivers accidentally. Keep the cruise con- should remain attentive to driving and trol system off (CRUISE indicator always exercise caution when using light OFF) when cruise control is the steering wheel mounted controls not in use. while driving.
411 Driving your vehicle
To turn cruise control off, do one of the following: • Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the CRUISE indicator light in the instru- ment cluster will go OFF). • Turn the ignition off. Both of these actions cancel cruise con- trol operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in “To Set Cruise Control Speed” on the previous page.
OVQ046004N OVQ046005N To cancel cruise control, do one To increase cruise control set of the following: speed: • Press the brake pedal. Follow either of these procedures: • Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic • Push the RES/ACCEL switch and hold transaxle. it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release • Press the CANCEL switch located on the switch at the speed you want. the steering wheel. • Push the RES/ACCEL switch and • Press the COAST/SET and RES/ release it immediately. The cruising ACCEL switches at the same time. speed will increase by 2.0 km/h (1.2 Each of these actions will cancel cruise mph) each time the RES/ACCEL switch control operation (the SET indicator light is operated in this manner. in the instrument cluster will go OFF), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, push the RES/ACCEL switch located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.
4 12 Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on: If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.
OVQ046003N OVQ046005N To decrease the cruising speed: To resume cruising speed at Follow either of these procedures: more than 40 km/h (24 mph): • Push the COAST/SET switch and hold If any method other than the CRUISE it. Your vehicle will gradually slow ON-OFF switch was used to cancel down. Release the switch at the speed cruising speed and the system is still you want to maintain. activated, the most recent set speed will • Push the COAST/SET switch and automatically resume when the release it immediately. The cruising RES/ACCEL switch is pushed. speed will decrease by 2.0 km/h (1.2 It will not resume, however, if the vehicle mph) each time the COAST/SET switch speed has dropped below 40 km/h (24 is operated in this manner. mph).
413 Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes In the event of brake failure (Continued) Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes If service brakes fail to operate while the • When descending a long or steep that adjust automatically through normal vehicle is in motion, you can make an hill, shift to a lower gear and usage. emergency stop with the parking brake. avoid continuous application of In the event that the power-assisted The stopping distance, however, will be the brakes. Continuous brake brakes lose power because of a stalled much greater than normal. application will cause the brakes engine or some other reason, you can to overheat and could result in a still stop your vehicle by applying greater temporary loss of braking per- force to the brake pedal than you nor- WARNING - Parking brake formance. mally would. The stopping distance, how- Applying the parking brake while • Wet brakes may result in the vehi- ever, will be longer. the vehicle is moving at normal cle not slowing down at the usual When the engine is not running, the speeds can cause a sudden loss of rate and pulling to one side when reserve brake power is partially depleted control of the vehicle. If you must the brakes are applied. Applying each time the brake pedal is applied. Do use the parking brake to stop the the brakes lightly will indicate not pump the brake pedal when the vehicle, use great caution in apply- whether they have been affected power assist has been interrupted. ing the brake. in this way. Always test your Pump the brake pedal only when neces- brakes in this fashion after driv- sary to maintain steering control on slip- ing through deep water.To dry the pery surfaces. brakes, apply them lightly while WARNING - Brakes maintaining a safe forward speed • Do not drive with your foot rest- until brake performance returns ing on the brake pedal. This will to normal. create abnormal high brake tem- • Always, confirm the position of peratures, excessive brake lining the brake and accelerator pedal and pad wear, and increased before driving. If you don't check stopping distances. the position of the accelerator (Continued) and brake pedal before driving, you may depress the accelerator instead of the brake pedal. It may cause a serious accident.
4 14 Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes. WARNING - Brake wear When your brake pads are worn and new This brake wear warning sound pads are required, you will hear a high- means your vehicle needs service. pitched warning sound from your front If you ignore this audible warning, brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You you will eventually lose braking per- may hear this sound come and go or it formance, which could lead to a may occur whenever you depress the serious accident. brake pedal. Please remember that some driving con- Parking on curbed streets ditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly • When parking your vehicle on an uphill apply) the brakes. This is normal and grade, park as close to the curb as 1VQA3030 does not indicate a problem with your possible and turn the front wheels Parking brake brakes. away from the curb so that the front wheels will contact the curb if the vehi- Applying the parking brake cle moves backward. To engage the parking brake, first apply CAUTION • When parking your vehicle on a down- the foot brake and then depress the park- To avoid costly brake repairs, do hill grade, park as close to the curb as ing brake pedal down as far as possible. not continue to drive with worn possible and turn the front wheels In addition it is recommended that when brake pads. toward the curb so that the front parking the vehicle on a gradient, the wheels will contact the curb if the vehi- shift lever should be in a low gear on cle moves forward. manual transaxle vehicles or in the P (Park) position on automatic transaxle CAUTION vehicles. Always replace brake pads as com- plete front or rear axle sets.
415 Driving your vehicle
Type A Type B To release the parking brake, depress CAUTION the parking brake pedal a second time • Driving with the parking brake while applying the foot brake. The pedal applied will cause excessive will automatically extend to the fully brake pad and brake rotor wear. released position. If the parking brake • Do not operate the parking brake pedal does not release or does not while the vehicle is moving release all the way, have the system except in an emergency situation. checked by an authorized Kia dealer. It could damage the vehicle sys- tem and make endanger driving safety. 1VQA3031 Type B WARNING - Parking brake • To prevent unintentional move- ment when stopped and leaving the vehicle, do not use the gearshift lever in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake AND make sure the gearshift lever is securely posi- tioned in P (Park) for automatic transaxle equipped vehicles. • Never allow a person who is unfa- OVQ038031 miliar with the vehicle or children Releasing the parking brake to touch the parking brake. If the Type A parking brake is released unin- To release the parking brake, pull the tentionally, serious injury may parking brake release lever while apply- occur. ing the foot brake. The pedal will auto- matically extend to the fully released position. If the parking brake pedal does not release or does not release all the way, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer. 4 16 Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu- WARNING - ABS lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the Your ABS is not a substitute for wheels. good driving judgement. You can When you apply your brakes under con- still have an accident. In fact, your ditions which may lock the wheels, you ABS will probably not be able to may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the prevent an accident in the following brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation driving conditions: in the brake pedal. This is normal and it • Dangerous driving, such as means your ABS is active. neglecting safety precautions, In order to obtain the maximum benefit W-75 speeding, or driving too close to from your ABS in an emergency situa- the vehicle in front of you. Check the brake warning light by turning tion, do not attempt to modulate your the ignition switch ON (do not start the • Driving at high speed in situa- brake pressure and do not try to pump engine). This light will be illuminated tions providing considerably less your brakes. Press your brake pedal as when the parking brake is applied with traction, such as wet conditions hard as possible or as hard as the situa- the ignition switch in the START or ON where hydroplaning could occur. tion warrants and allow the ABS to con- position. • Driving too fast on poor road sur- trol the force being delivered to the Before driving, be sure the parking brake faces. The ABS is designed to brakes. is fully released and the brake warning improve maximum braking effec- light is off. tiveness on typical highways and roads in good condition. On poor If the brake warning light remains on road surfaces in poor condition, after the parking brake is released, there the ABS may actually reduce may be a malfunction in the brake sys- braking effectiveness. tem. Immediate attention is necessary. If at all possible, cease driving the vehi- cle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe loca- tion or repair shop.
417 Driving your vehicle
• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient CAUTION stopping distance. Always maintain a • When you drive on a road having safe distance from the vehicle in front poor traction, such as an icy road, of you. and operate your brakes continu- • Always slow down when cornering. ously, the ABS will be active con- The anti-lock brake system cannot pre- tinuously and the ABS warning vent accidents resulting from exces- light may illuminate. Pull your car sive speeds. over to a safe place and stop the • On loose or uneven road surfaces, engine. operation of the anti-lock brake system • Restart the engine. If the ABS may result in a longer stopping dis- warning light is off, then your tance than for vehicles equipped with a W-78 ABS system is normal. conventional brake system. Otherwise, you may have a prob- CAUTION lem with the ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as • If the ABS warning light is on and possible. stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. In this case, howev- er, your regular brakes will work ✽ NOTICE normally. When you jump start your vehicle • The ABS warning light will stay on because of a drained battery, the engine for approximately 3 seconds after may not run as smoothly and the ABS the ignition switch is ON. During warning light may turn on at the same that time, the ABS will go through time. This happens because of the low self-diagnosis and the light will go battery voltage. It does not mean your off if everything is normal. If the ABS is malfunctioning. light stays on, you may have a • Do not pump your brakes! problem with your ABS. Contact • Have the battery recharged before an authorized Kia dealer as soon driving the vehicle. as possible.
4 18 Driving your vehicle
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL ESC operation ESC ON condition When operating • When the ignition is turned When the ESC is in operation, - ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi- ESC ESC indicator light blinks. cator lights illuminate for • When the Electronic Stability approximately 3 seconds, Control is operating properly, then ESC is turned on. you can feel a slight pulsation • Press the ESC OFF button in the vehicle. This is only the for at least half a second after effect of brake control and indi- turning the ignition ON to turn cates nothing unusual. ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator • When moving out of the mud will illuminate). To turn the or slippery road, pressing the OVQ041014N ESC on, press the ESC OFF accelerator pedal may not ❈ The location of the ESC OFF button may button (ESC OFF indicator cause the engine rpm (revo- be changed depending on your model. light will go off). lutions per minute) to The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) • When starting the engine, increase. monitors information from various vehicle you may hear a slight ticking sensors and then compares the driver's sound. This is the ESC per- commands with the actual behavior of the forming an automatic system vehicle. If an unstable condition occurs - a self-check and does not indi- sudden evasive movement for example - cate a problem. ESC intervenes within fractions of a second via the engine computer and brake system and attempts to stabilize the vehicle.
419 Driving your vehicle
ESC operation off ■ ESC indicator light ESC OFF state WARNING • To cancel ESC operation, The Electronic Stability Control ESC press the ESC OFF button ESC system is only a driving aid; use OFF (ESC OFF indicator light illu- precautions for safe driving by minates). slowing down on curved, snowy, or • If the ignition switch is turned ■ ESC OFF indicator light icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t to LOCK position when ESC attempt to accelerate whenever the is off, ESC remains off. Upon ESC ESC indicator light is blinking, or restarting the engine, the OFF when the road surface is slippery. ESC will automatically turn on again. Indicator light ESC OFF usage When ignition switch is turned to the ON When driving position, the indicator light illuminates, • It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned then goes off if the ESC system is oper- on for daily driving whenever possible. ating normally. • To turn ESC off while driving, press the The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC OFF button while driving on a flat ESC is operating or illuminates when road surface. ESC fails to operate. Never press ESC OFF button while ESC The ESC OFF indicator light comes on is operating (ESC indicator light blinks). when the ESC is turned off with the but- If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat- ton. ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.
4 20 Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE • When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat- ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre- vent the vehicle speed from increas- ing, and result in false diagnosis. • Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system operation.
WARNING Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating. If the ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may go out of control. To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.
421 Driving your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Operation of the rear parking WARNING assist system The rear parking assist system is a Operating condition supplementary function only. The • This system will activate when backing operation of the rear parking assist up with the ignition key ON. system can be affected by several If the vehicle is moved at speeds over factors (including environmental 5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not conditions). It is the responsibility activate correctly. of the driver to always check the area behind the vehicle before • The sensing distance while the rear backing up. parking assist system is in operation is approximately 120 cm (47 in.). OVQ049098 • When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest The rear parking assist system assists one will be recognized first. the driver during backward movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47 Types of warning sound in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a • When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47 supplemental system and it is not intend- in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper : ed to nor does it replace the need for Buzzer beeps intermittently extreme care and attention of the driver. • When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31 The sensing range and objects in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper : detectable by the back sensors are limit- Buzzer beeps more frequently ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much • When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.) attention to what is behind you as you of the rear bumper : Buzzer sounds would in a vehicle without a rear parking continuously. assist system.
4 22 Driving your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of Detecting range may decrease when: rear parking assist system 1. Sensor is stained with foreign matter CAUTION Rear parking assist system may not such as snow or water. (Sensing range 1. The rear parking assist system operate normally when: will return to normal when removed.) may not sound sequentially 2. Outside air temperature is extremely depending on the speed and 1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will shapes of the objects detected. operate normally when moisture hot or cold. melts.) 2. The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle 2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter, Following objects may not be recog- nized by the sensor: bumper height or sensor installa- such as snow or water, or the sensor tion has been modified or dam- cover is blocked. (It will operate nor- 1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles. aged. Any non-factory installed mally when the material is removed or equipment or accessories may the sensor is no longer blocked.) 2. Objects which tend to absorb sensor also interfere with the sensor per- 3. Driving on uneven road surfaces frequency such as clothes, spongy formance. material or snow. (unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi- 3. Sensor may not recognize ent). 3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m objects less than 40 cm (15 in.) 4. Objects generating excessive noise (40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense (vehicle horns, loud motorcycle in diameter. an incorrect distance. Use cau- engines, or truck air brakes) are within tion. range of the sensor. 4. When sensor is frozen or stained 5. Heavy rain or water spray exists. with snow, dirt, or water, sensor 6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones may be inoperative until the are within range of the sensor. stains are removed using a soft 7. Sensor is covered with snow. cloth. 8. Trailer towing 5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
423 Driving your vehicle
CAUTION WARNING This system can only sense objects Pay close attention when the vehi- within the range and location of the cle is driven close to objects on the sensors; It can not detect objects in road, particularly pedestrians, other areas where sensors are not especially children. Be aware that installed. Also, small or slim some objects may not be detected objects, such as poles or objects by the sensors, due to the object’s located between sensors may not distance, size or material, all of be detected by the sensors. which can limit the effectiveness of Always visually check behind the the sensor. Always perform a visual vehicle when driving back up. inspection to make sure the vehicle Be sure to inform any drivers in the is clear of all obstructions before vehicle that may be unfamiliar with moving the vehicle in any direction. the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations. ✽ Your new vehicle warranty does not NOTICE cover any accidents or damage to If you don’t hear an audible warning the vehicle or its occupants due to sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit- rear parking assist system malfunc- tently when shifting the gear to “R” posi- tion. Always drive safely and cau- tion, this may indicate a malfunction in tiously. the rear parking assist system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possi- ble.
4 24 Driving your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED) The rearview camera may be turned off by pressing the ON/OFF button when the rearview camera is activated. To turn the camera on again, press the ON/OFF button again when the ignition switch is on and the shift lever in R (Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned off and on again.
1VQA2117 WARNING Rear view display • This system is a supplementary function only. It is the responsibil- ity of the driver to always check the inside/outside rearview mirror and the area behind the vehicle before and while backing up because there is a dead zone that can't see through the camera. • Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with for- OVQ020600 eign matter, the camera may not operate normally. The rearview camera will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the rearview display mirror while back- ing-up.
425 Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION Your vehicle's fuel economy depends • Do not use the air conditioner unnec- • Open windows at high speeds can mainly on your style of driving, where you essarily. reduce fuel economy. drive and when you drive. • Slow down when driving on rough • Fuel economy is less in crosswinds Each of these factors affects how many roads. and headwinds. To help offset some of kilometers (miles) you can get from a • For longer tire life and better fuel econ- this loss, slow down when driving in liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehi- omy, always keep the tires inflated to these conditions. cle as economically as possible, use the the recommended pressures. following driving suggestions to help • Maintain a safe distance from other Keeping a vehicle in good operating con- save money in both fuel and repairs: vehicles to avoid sudden stops. This dition is important both for economy and • Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the will reduce wear on brake linings and safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia engine is running smoothly, begin driv- pads. Driving in such a way will also dealer perform scheduled inspections ing. Remember, engine warm-up may save fuel because extra fuel is required and maintenance. take a little longer on cold days. to accelerate back to driving speed. • Save fuel by accelerating slowly after • Do not carry unnecessary weight in the stopping. vehicle. WARNING - Engine off dur- • Keep the engine in tune and follow the • Do not rest your foot on the brake ing motion recommended periodic maintenance pedal while driving. This can cause Never turn the engine off to coast schedule. This will increase the life of needless wear, possible damage to the down hills or anytime the vehicle is all parts and lower your operating brakes, and poor fuel economy. in motion. The power steering and costs. • Improper wheel alignment results in power brakes will not function faster tire wear and lower fuel econo- properly without the engine run- my. ning. Instead, keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect. In addition, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering which could cause serious injury or death.
4 26 Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions are WARNING - Downshifting WARNING - Spinning tires encountered such as water, snow, ice, Downshifting with an automatic Do not spin the wheels, especially mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow transaxle, while driving on slippery at speeds more than 56 km/h (35 these suggestions: surfaces can cause an accident. mph). Spinning the wheels at high • Drive cautiously and allow extra dis- The sudden change in tire speed speeds when the vehicle is station- tance for braking. could cause the tires to skid. Be ary could cause a tire to overheat, • Avoid sudden movements in braking or careful when downshifting on slip- explode and injure bystanders. steering. pery surfaces. • When braking with non-ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up- Rocking the vehicle CAUTION and-down motion until the vehicle is The ESC system (if equipped) stopped. If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn should be turned OFF prior to rock- the steering wheel right and left to clear ing the vehicle. WARNING - ABS the area around your front wheels. Then, Do not pump the brake pedal on a shift back and forth between R (Reverse) vehicle equipped with ABS. and any forward gear in vehicles WARNING equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do If your vehicle becomes stuck in not race the engine, and spin the wheels snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may • If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use as little as possible. If you are still stuck second gear. Accelerate slowly to attempt to rock the vehicle free by after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled moving it forward and backward. Do avoid spinning the drive wheels. out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine over- • Use sand, rock salt or other non-slip not attempt this procedure if people heating and possible damage to the or objects are anywhere near the material under the drive wheels to pro- transaxle. vide traction when stalled in ice, snow, vehicle. During the rocking opera- or mud. tion the vehicle may suddenly move CAUTION forward or backward as it becomes Prolonged rocking may cause unstuck, causing injury or damage engine over-heating, transaxle dam- to nearby people or objects. age or failure, and tire damage.
427 Driving your vehicle
Driving at night Driving in the rain Driving in flooded areas Because night driving presents more Rain and wet roads can make driving Avoid driving through flooded areas hazards than driving in the daylight, here dangerous, especially if you’re not pre- unless you are sure the water is no high- are some important tips to remember: pared for the slick pavement. Here are a er than the bottom of the wheel hub. • Slow down and keep more distance few things to consider when driving in the Drive through any water slowly. Allow between you and other vehicles, as it rain: adequate stopping distance because may be more difficult to see at night, • A heavy rainfall will make it harder to brake performance may be affected. especially in areas where there may see and will increase the distance After driving through water, dry the not be any street lights. needed to stop your vehicle, so slow brakes by gently applying them several • Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare down. times while the vehicle is moving slowly. from other driver's headlights. • Keep your windshield wiping equip- • Keep your headlights clean and prop- ment in good shape. Replace your erly aimed on vehicles not equipped windshield wiper blades when they with the automatic headlight aiming show signs of streaking or missing feature. Dirty or improperly aimed areas on the windshield. headlights will make it much more diffi- • If your tires are not in good condition, cult to see at night. making a quick stop on wet pavement • Avoid staring directly at the headlights can cause a skid and possibly lead to of oncoming vehicles. You could be an accident. Be sure your tires are in temporarily blinded, and it will take good shape. several seconds for your eyes to read- • Turn on your headlights to make it eas- just to the darkness. ier for others to see you. • Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly. • If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking oper- ation returns.
4 28 Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING • We recommend that you carry emer- Snow tires gency equipment, including a window If you mount snow tires on your Kia, scraper, windshield de-icer, a bag of make sure they are radial tires of the sand or salt, flares, a small shovel and same size and load range as the original jumper cables. tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels • Make sure you have sufficient ethyl- to balance your vehicle’s handling in all ene-glycol coolant in the radiator. weather conditions. Keep in mind that the • Check the battery condition and traction provided by snow tires on dry cables. Cold temperatures reduce the roads may not be as high as your vehi- capacity of any battery, so it must be in cle's original equipment tires. You should excellent condition to provide enough drive cautiously even when the roads are winter starting power. clear. Check with the tire dealer for max- • Make sure the engine oil viscosity is imum speed recommendations. suitable for cold weather. • Check the ignition system for loose WARNING - Snow tire size connections and damage. Snow tires should be equivalent in • Use antifreeze-formulated windshield size and type to the vehicle's stan- washer fluid. (Do not use engine dard tires. Otherwise, the safety and coolant antifreeze.) handling of your vehicle may be • Do not use the parking brake if it might adversely affected. freeze. When parking, shift to P (Park) with an automatic transaxle and block Do not install studded tires without first the rear wheels. checking local, state and municipal regu- lations for possible restrictions against their use.
429 Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
Item kg (lbs.) WARNING - Towing a trail- er Maximum trailer Without trailer brakes 453 (1000) If you don't use the correct equip- weight With trailer brakes 1587 (3500) ment and drive improperly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. Maximum permissible static vertical 158 (350) For example, if the trailer is too load on the coupling device heavy, the brakes may not work well - or even at all. You and your pas- sengers could be seriously or fatal- CAUTION This section contains many time-tested, ly injured. Pull a trailer only if you important trailering tips and safety rules. have followed all the steps in this Pulling a trailer improperly can Many of these are important for your section. damage your vehicle and result in safety and that of your passengers. costly repairs not covered by your Please read this section carefully before warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, you pull a trailer. follow the advice in this section. WARNING - Weight limits Before towing, make sure the total Load-pulling components such as the trailer weight, gross combination Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and weight, gross vehicle weight, gross what the vehicle trailering capacity is for tires are forced to work harder against axle weight and trailer tongue load your vehicle, you should read the infor- the load of the added weight. The engine are all within the limits. mation in “Weight of the Trailer” that is required to operate at relatively higher appears later in this section. speeds and under greater loads. This additional burden generates extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to Remember that trailering is different than wind resistance, increasing the pulling just driving your vehicle by itself. requirements. Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering requires correct equip- ment, and it has to be used properly.
4 30 Driving your vehicle
Hitches Safety chains Trailer brakes It's important to have the correct hitch You should always attach chains If your trailer weighs more than the max- equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks between your vehicle and your trailer. imum trailer weight without trailer brakes going by, and rough roads are a few rea- Cross the safety chains under the tongue loaded, then it needs its own brakes and sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here of the trailer so that the tongue will not they must be adequate. Be sure to read are some rules to follow: drop to the road if it becomes separated and follow the instructions for the trailer • Will you have to make any holes in the from the hitch. brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust body of your vehicle when you install a Instructions about safety chains may be and maintain them properly. trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to provided by the hitch manufacturer or by • Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys- seal the holes later when you remove the trailer manufacturer. Follow the man- tem. the hitch. ufacturer’s recommendation for attaching If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon safety chains. Always leave just enough monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can slack so you can turn with your trailer. WARNING - Trailer brakes get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and And, never allow safety chains to drag on Do not use a trailer with its own water. the ground. brakes unless you are absolutely • The bumpers on your vehicle are not certain that you have properly set intended for hitches. Do not attach up the brake system. This is not a rental hitches or other bumper-type task for amateurs. Use an experi- hitches to them. Use only a frame- enced, competent trailer shop for mounted hitch that does not attach to this work. the bumper.
431 Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer Following distance Turn signals when towing a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi- When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has amount of experience. Before setting out cle ahead as you would when driving to have a different turn signal flasher and for the open road, you must get to know your vehicle without a trailer. This can extra wiring. The green arrows on your your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the help you avoid situations that require instrument panel will flash whenever you feel of handling and braking with the heavy braking and sudden turns. signal a turn or lane change. Properly added weight of the trailer. And always connected, the trailer lights will also flash keep in mind that the vehicle you are Passing to alert other drivers you’re about to turn, driving is now a good deal longer and not You’ll need more passing distance up change lanes, or stop. nearly so responsive as your vehicle is ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, When towing a trailer, the green arrows by itself. because of the increased vehicle length, on your instrument panel will flash for Before you start, check the trailer hitch you’ll need to go much farther beyond the turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are and platform, safety chains, electrical passed vehicle before you can return to burned out. Thus, you may think drivers connector(s), lights, tires and mirror your lane. behind you are seeing your signals adjustment. If the trailer has electric when, in fact, they are not. It’s important brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov- to check occasionally to be sure the trail- ing and then apply the trailer brake con- Backing up er bulbs are still working. You must also troller by hand to be sure the brakes are Hold the bottom of the steering wheel check the lights every time you discon- working. This lets you check your electri- with one hand. Then, to move the trailer nect and then reconnect the wires. cal connection at the same time. to the left, just move your hand to the left. Do not connect a trailer lighting system During your trip, check occasionally to be To move the trailer to the right, move your directly to your vehicle’s lighting system. sure that the load is secure, and that the hand to the right. Always back up slowly Use only an approved trailer wiring har- lights and any trailer brakes are still work- and, if possible, have someone guide ness. you. ing. Your Authorized Kia Dealer can assist you in installing the wiring harness. Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your WARNING trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, Failure to use an approved trailer road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid wiring harness could result in dam- jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well age to the vehicle electrical system in advance. and/or personal injury.
4 32 Driving your vehicle
Driving on grades Parking on hills Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear CAUTION Generally, you should not park your vehi- before you start down a long or steep • When towing a trailer on steep cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you grades (in excess of 6%) pay People can be seriously or fatally injured, might have to use your brakes so much close attention to the engine and both your vehicle and the trailer can that they would get hot and no longer coolant temperature gauge to be damaged if they begin a downhill tra- operate efficiently. ensure the engine does not over- jectory. On a long uphill grade, shift down and heat. If the needle of the coolant reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45 temperature gauge moves across the dial towards “H” (HOT), pull WARNING - Parking on a mph) to reduce the possibility of engine hill and transaxle overheating. over and stop as soon as it is safe Parking your vehicle on a hill with a If your trailer weighs more than the max- to do so, and allow the engine to trailer attached could cause serious imum trailer weight without trailer brakes idle until it cools down. You may injury or death, should the trailer and you have an automatic transaxle, proceed once the engine has break lose. you should drive in D (Drive) when tow- cooled sufficiently. ing a trailer. • You must decide driving speed Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when depending on trailer weight and However, if you ever have to park your towing a trailer will minimize heat build up uphill grade to reduce the possi- trailer on a hill, here’s how to do it: and extend the life of your transaxle. bility of engine and transaxle 1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into overheating. gear. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park- ing brake, and then shift to P (Park) for an automatic transaxle. 5. Release the brakes.
433 Driving your vehicle
Maintenance when trailer towing CAUTION WARNING - Parking brake Your vehicle will need service more often It can be dangerous to get out of when you regularly pull a trailer. • Due to higher load during trailer your vehicle if the parking brake is Important items to pay particular atten- usage, overheating might occur not firmly set. tion to include engine oil, automatic in hot days or during uphill driv- If you have left the engine running, transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling ing. If the coolant gauge indicates the vehicle can move suddenly. You system fluid. Brake condition is another over-heating, switch off the A/C or others could be seriously or important item to frequently check. Each and stop the vehicle in a safe area fatally injured. item is covered in this manual, and the to cool down the engine. Index will help you find them quickly. If • When towing check transaxle you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review fluid more frequently. When you are ready to leave after these sections before you start your trip. • If your vehicle is not equipped parking on a hill Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer with the air conditioner, you 1. With the automatic transaxle in P and hitch. Follow the maintenance should install a condenser fan to (Park), apply your brakes and hold the schedule that accompanied your trailer improve engine performance brake pedal down while you: and check it periodically. Preferably, con- when towing a trailer. • Start your engine; duct the check at the start of each day’s • Shift into gear; and driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts • Release the parking brake. and bolts should be tight. 2. Slowly remove your foot from the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
4 34 Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer Weight of the trailer The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi- Here are some important points if you How heavy can a trailer safely be? It mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer decide to pull a trailer: should never weigh more than the maxi- weight. After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, • State, provincial, county and municipal mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But separately, to see if the weights are prop- government have varying trailering even that can be too heavy. er. If they aren’t, you may be able to cor- laws. Make sure your hitch, mirrors, It depends on how you plan to use your rect them simply by moving some items lights and wiring arrangements are trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road around in the trailer. legal, not only where you live, but also grades, outside temperature and how where you’ll be driving. A good source much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. The ideal trailer weight for this information is provincial or local WARNING - Trailer law enforcement agencies. can also depend on any special equip- ment that you have on your vehicle. • Never load a trailer with more • Consider using a sway control.You can weight in the rear than in the ask a hitch dealer about sway control. front. The front should be loaded • After your odometer indicates 800 km Weight of the trailer tongue with approximately 60% of the (500 miles) or more, you can tow a The tongue load of any trailer is an total trailer load; the rear should trailer. For the first 800 km (500 miles) important weight to measure because it be loaded with approximately that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over affects the total gross vehicle weight 40% of the total trailer load. 80 km/h (50 mph) and don’t make (GVW) of your vehicle. This weight • Never exceed the maximum starts at full throttle. This helps your includes the curb weight of the vehicle, weight limits of the trailer or trail- engine and other parts of your vehicle any cargo you may carry in it, and the er towing equipment. Improper “wear” in at the heavier loads. people who will be riding in the vehicle. loading can result in damage to • Always drive your vehicle at a moder- And if you will tow a trailer, you must add your vehicle and/or personal ate speed (less than 100 km/h (60 the tongue load to the GVW because injury. Check weights and loading mph)). your vehicle will also be carrying that at a commercial scale or highway • On a long uphill grade, do not exceed weight. patrol office equipped with 70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing scales. speed limit, whichever is lower. • An improperly loaded trailer can • The important considerations have to cause loss of vehicle control. do with weight:
435 Driving your vehicle
OVERLOADING
WARNING - Vehicle weight The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi- cle are on the manufacturer's label attached to the driver's door. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (and people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.
4 36 Driving your vehicle
LABEL INFORMATION There are several important labels and identification numbers located on your vehicle. The label locations are identified in the illus- trations shown.
Frame number VIN Identification label
OVQ076001N OVQ076002N OVQ066023N Vehicle identification number The VIN is also on a plate attached to the Vehicle certification label (VIN) top of the dashboard. The number on the The vehicle certification label attached The vehicle identification number (VIN) is plate can easily be seen through the on the driver's side center pillar gives the the number used in registering your car windshield from outside. vehicle identification number (VIN). and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. The number is punched on the engine compartment bulkhead.
437 Driving your vehicle
OVQ066022N OVQ083006 Tire specification / pressure label Engine number The tires supplied on your new vehicle The engine number is stamped on the are chosen to provide the best perform- engine block as shown in the drawing. ance for normal driving. The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures rec- ommended for your vehicle.
438 Road warning / 5-2 In case of an emergency while driving / 5-3 Emergency starting / 5-4 If the engine overheats / 5-7 If you have a flat tire / 5-8 Towing / 5-17
What to do in an emergency 5 What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING Type A It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehi- cle is stopped near the edge of a road- way. Depress the flasher switch with the igni- tion switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.
OVQ049031 • The hazard warning flasher operates Type B whether your vehicle is running or not. • The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on. • Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehi- cle is being towed.
OVQ049032 Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
25 What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING If the engine stalls at a crossroad If you have a flat tire while driving If engine stalls while driving or crossing If a tire goes flat while you are driving: 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping If the engine stalls at a crossroad or 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal a straight line. Move cautiously off the crossing, set the shift lever in the N and let the car slow down while driving road to a safe place. (Neutral) position and then push the vehi- straight ahead. Do not apply the 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. cle to a safe place. brakes immediately or attempt to pull 3. Try to start the engine again. If your off the road as this may cause a loss of vehicle will not start, contact an autho- control. When the car has slowed to rised Kia dealer or seek other qualified such a speed that it is safe to do so, assistance. brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes. 2. When the car is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse (manual transaxle). 3. Have all passengers get out of the car. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic. 4. When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this sec- tion.
53 What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING Jump starting CAUTION Jump starting can be dangerous if done WARNING - Battery incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to Use only a 12-volt jumper system. • Keep all flames or sparks away yourself or damage to your vehicle or You can damage a 12-volt starting from the battery. The battery pro- battery, follow the jump starting proce- motor, ignition system, and other duces hydrogen gas which may dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom- electrical parts beyond repair by explode if exposed to flame or mend that you have a competent techni- use of a 24-volt power supply (either sparks. cian or towing service jump start your two 12-volt batteries in series or a • Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle. 24-volt motor generator set). vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low; the battery may rupture or WARNING - Battery explode. Never attempt to check the elec- trolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode causing serious injury.
45 What to do in an emergency
Connecting jumper cables Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12- Connect cables in numerical order and volt and that its negative terminal is disconnect in reverse order. grounded. 2. If the booster battery is in another vehi- cle, do not allow the vehicles to touch. Jumper Cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads. 4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the previous illus- tration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1), then con- nect the other end to the positive termi- (-) nal on the booster battery (2). Proceed (+) to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the (-) Discharged battery booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not con- (+) nect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.
CAUTION - Battery cables Booster battery Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the 1VQA4001 booster battery to the negative ter- minal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged bat- tery to overheat and crack, releas- ing battery acid.
55 What to do in an emergency
Do not allow the jumper cables to con- Push-starting tact anything except the correct bat- Vehicles equipped with automatic tery terminals or the correct ground. transaxle cannot be push-started. Do not lean over the battery when Follow the directions in this section for making connections. jump-starting. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehi- CAUTION cle with the discharged battery. Never tow a vehicle to start it If the cause of your battery discharging is because the sudden surge forward not apparent, you should have your vehi- when the engine starts could cause cle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer. a collision with the tow vehicle.
65 What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates over- 4. The coolant level should then be heating, if you experience a loss of checked. If the level in the reservoir is power, or if you hear a loud knocking or low, look for leaks at the radiator pinging noise, the engine has probably hoses and connections, heater hoses overheated. Should any of these symp- and connections, radiator, and water toms occur, use the following procedure: pump. If you find a major leak or 1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher, another problem that may have then drive to the nearest safe location caused the engine to overheat, do not and stop your vehicle; set the auto- operate the engine until it has been matic transaxle in P (Park) and apply corrected. Call an Authorized Kia the parking brake. Dealer for assistance. If you do not 2. Make sure the air conditioner is off. find a leak or other problem, carefully add coolant to the reservoir. 3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the radiator, stop the engine and call an If the engine frequently overheats, have Authorized Kia Dealer for assistance. the cooling system checked and repaired If coolant is not boiling out, allow the by an Authorized Kia Dealer. engine to idle and open the hood to permit the engine to cool gradually. WARNING - Removing If the temperature does not go down radiator cap with the engine idling, stop the engine Do not remove the radiator cap and allow sufficient time for it to cool. when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure. This could cause serious injury.
57 What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
1VQA4035
OVQ056003N OVQ056004N Removing the spare tire 3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to Your spare tire is stored underneath loosen the bolt enough to lower your vehicle, directly below the right the spare tire. sliding door (on the cargo). Turn the wrench counterclockwise 1. Open the right sliding door (or the until the spare tire reaches the tailgate) and find the plastic hex ground. bolt cover on the floor. 2. Remove the cover. OVQ056002N The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment. Remove the panel indicated in the illustration.
85 What to do in an emergency
OVQ056005N OVQ056006N OVQ057016N 4. After the spare tire reaches the Storing the spare tire 2. Place the wheel under the vehicle ground, continue to turn the 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the and install the retainer through the wrench counterclockwise, and valve stem facing down. wheel center. draw the spare tire outside. Never 3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it rotate the wrench excessively, oth- clicks. erwise the spare tire carrier may be damaged. 5. Remove the retainer from the cen- ter of the spare tire.
59 What to do in an emergency
When using a compact spare tire, WARNING CAUTION observe the following precautions: Ensure the spare tire retainer is • You should drive carefully • Under no circumstances should properly aligned with the center when the compact spare is in you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a of the spare tire to prevent the use. The compact spare higher speed could damage the spare tire “rattling”. Otherwise, it should be replaced by the tire. may cause the spare tire to fall proper conventional tire and • Ensure that you drive slowly off the carrier and lead to an rim at the first opportunity. enough for the road conditions to accident. • The operation of this vehicle avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, is not recommended with such as a pothole or debris, could more than one compact spare seriously damage the compact Important - use of compact spare tire in use at the same time. spare. tire • Any continuous road use of this tire Your vehicle is equipped with a com- could result in tire failure, loss of pact spare tire. This compact spare vehicle control, and possible per- tire takes up less space than a regu- WARNING sonal injury. lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a This spare tire should be used conventional tire and is designed for only for VERY short distances. • Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi- temporary use only. Compact spares should NEVER mum load rating or the load-carry- be used for long drives or ing capacity shown on the sidewall extended distances. of the compact spare tire. • Avoid driving over obstacles. The The compact spare should be inflat- compact spare tire diameter is ed to 420 kPa (60 psi). smaller than the diameter of a con- ventional tire and reduces the ✽ NOTICE ground clearance approximately Check the inflation pressure after 25 mm (1 inch), which could result installing the spare tire. Adjust it to in damage to the vehicle. the specified pressure, as necessary.
5 10 What to do in an emergency
• Do not take this vehicle through an Follow jacking instructions to reduce automatic car wash while the com- the possibility of personal injury. pact spare tire is installed. • Do not use tire chains on the com- - Changing tires pact spare tire. Because of the WARNING smaller size, a tire chain will not fit • Never attempt vehicle repairs properly. This could damage the in the traffic lanes of a public vehicle and result in loss of the road or highway. chain. • Always move the vehicle com- • The compact spare tire should not pletely off the road and onto be installed on the front axle if the the shoulder before trying to vehicle must be driven in snow or OVQ059007N change a tire. The jack should on ice. Changing tires be used on level firm ground. If you cannot find a firm, level • Do not use the compact spare tire Jacking instructions place off the road, call a tow- on any other vehicle because this The jack is provided for emergency ing service company for tire has been designed especially tire changing only. assistance. for your vehicle. To prevent the jack from “rattling” • Be sure to use the correct • The compact spare tire’s tread life while the vehicle is in motion, lower front and rear jacking posi- is shorter than a regular tire. the jack to the lowest position, place tions on the vehicle; never use Inspect your compact spare tire the jack in the luggage side trim and the bumpers or any other part regularly and replace worn com- turn the wing bolt (1) clockwise firmly. of the vehicle for jack support. pact spare tires with the same size Make sure the jack is secured firmly (Continued) and design, mounted on the same by trying to move the jack forward wheel. and backward.
511 What to do in an emergency
(Continued) • The vehicle can easily roll off the jack causing serious injury or death. No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack; use vehicle support stands. • Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack. 1VQA4022 1VQA4023 • Do not allow anyone to remain Tire replacement 4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, in the vehicle while it is on the 1. Park on a level surface and apply jack, jack handle, and spare tire jack. the parking brake firmly. from the vehicle. • Make sure any children pres- 2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park) 5. Block both the front and rear of the ent are in a secure place away with automatic transaxle. wheel that is diagonally opposite from the road and from the the jack position. vehicle to be raised with the 3. Activate the hazard warning flash- jack. er.
5 12 What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Changing a tire • To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diago- nally opposite the wheel being changed. • We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is 1VQA4024 OVQ049406 being jacked. 6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun- 7. Place the jack at the front or rear terclockwise one turn each, but do jacking position closest to the tire not remove any nut until the tire you are changing. Place the jack has been raised off the ground. at the designated locations under the frame. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised dot to index with the jack.
WARNING - Jack location To reduce the possibility of injury, be sure to use only the jack provided with the vehicle and in the correct jack position; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
513 What to do in an emergency
CAUTION Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or 1VQA4026 OVQ056008N vice-versa will not secure the 8. Insert the jack handle into the jack 11. Once the wheel lug nuts have wheel to the hub properly and and turn it clockwise, raising the been tightened, lower the vehicle will damage the stud so that it vehicle until the tire just clears the fully to the ground and continue to must be replaced. ground. This measurement is tighten the lug nuts until they are Note that most lug nuts do not approximately 30 mm (1.2 in). fully secured. Tighten the wheel have metric threads. Be sure to Before removing the wheel lug lug nuts firmly in a “X ” pattern. use extreme care in checking nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta- If you are unsure of the tightness for thread style before installing ble and that there is no chance for of the wheel lug nuts, have them aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. movement or slippage. checked at the nearest service If in doubt, consult an 9. Remove the wheel lug nuts by station. The specified tightening Authorized Kia Dealer. turning them counterclockwise, torque is 9~11 kg•m (65-79 lb•ft, then remove the wheel. 88-107 N•m). Improperly tight- 10. Mount the spare tire into position ened wheel lug nuts could cause and install the wheel lug nuts brake pedal vibration while brak- with the beveled edge inward. ing.
5 14 What to do in an emergency
Carrying a flat tire WARNING - Wheel studs Do not store the flat tire on the com- If the studs are damaged, they pact spare tire carrier underneath may lose their ability to retain your vehicle. The full size flat tire the wheel. This could lead to the should be stored and fixed in the loss of the wheel and a collision vehicle until you reach a service sta- resulting in serious injuries. tion.
To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in OVQ056010N motion, store them properly. To place a flat tire in the vehicle: 1. Wrap the flat tire with the cover WARNING - Inadequate with the valve stem facing up. spare tire pressure Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
515 What to do in an emergency
OVQ056011N OVQ056013N
OVQ059300A 4. Tighten the strap firmly pulling the strap out of the buckle. 5. Make sure the flat tire is properly secured by trying to move it.
WARNING - Flat tire Never leave the flat tire unfixed OVQ056012N OVQ056014N in the vehicle to prevent the tire “rattling”. Otherwise, the unse- 2. Place the flat tire in the cargo area 3. If necessary, connect the two cured flat tire may be thrown when the 3rd row seat is upright straps with the buckle. about inside the vehicle which position or on the floor when the Pass one end of the strap through can cause damage to the vehi- 3rd row seat is stowed in the cargo the wheel center and connect both cle and serious injury or death area. strap hooks to each striker of the to the vehicle occupants in case 3rd row seat on the floor. of a sharp turn, a sudden stop or an accident.
5 16 What to do in an emergency
TOWING
1VQA4030
1VQA4028 1VQA4029 If emergency towing is necessary, we It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the recommend having it done by an author- rear wheels on the ground (without dol- ized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck lies) and the front wheels off the ground. service. Proper lifting and towing proce- When being towed by a commercial tow dures are necessary to prevent damage truck and wheel dollies are not used, the to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or front of the vehicle should always be lift- flatbed is recommended. ed, not the rear. 1GHA4105A For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to section 4 “Driving your vehicle”. CAUTION • Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause dam- age to the vehicle. • Do not tow with sling-type equip- ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.
517 What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer- If towing is necessary, we recommend gency without wheel dollies : you to have it done by an Authorized 1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi- Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck tion. service. 2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N If towing service is not available in an (Neutral). emergency, your vehicle may be tem- 3. Release the parking brake. porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the rear of the vehicle. Use CAUTION extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Failure to place the transaxle shift A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter- and operate the brakes. nal damage to the transaxle. OVQ056016N If your car must be towed Towing in this manner may be done only Towing with a vehicle other than a on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis- tow truck tance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition. • Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi- cle out of mud, sand or other condi- tions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. • Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing. • The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequent- ly.
5 18 What to do in an emergency
CAUTION WARNING CAUTION • Attach a towing strap to the tow Use extreme caution when towing To prevent internal damage to the hook. the vehicle. transaxle, never tow your vehicle • Using a portion of the vehicle • Avoid sudden starts or erratic from the rear (backwards) with all other than the tow hooks for tow- driving maneuvers which would four tires in contact with the sur- ing may damage the body of your place excessive stress on the face. vehicle. emergency towing hook and tow- • Use only a cable or chain specifi- ing cable or chain. The hook and cally intended for use in towing towing cable or chain may break vehicles. Securely fasten the and cause serious injury or dam- cable or chain to the towing hook age. provided. • If the disable vehicle is unable to be moved, do not forcibly contin- ue the towing. Contact an • Before emergency towing, check that Authorized Kia dealer or a com- the hook is not broken or damaged. mercial tow truck service for • Fasten the towing cable or chain assistance. securely to the hook. • Tow the vehicle as straight ahead • Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and as possible. even force. • Keep away from the vehicle dur- • To avoid damaging the hook, do not ing towing. pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
519 What to do in an emergency
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle The following methods are effective when your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand or similar substances that prevent the vehicle from being driven out under its own power. • Remove the soil and sand, etc. from the front and the back of the tires. • Place a stone or wood under the tires.
1VQA4033 Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)
WARNING Do not use the hooks under the front of the vehicle for towing pur- poses. These hooks are designed ONLY for transport tie-down. If the tie-down hooks are used for towing, the tie-down hooks or front bumper will be damaged and this could lead to serious injury.
520 Maintenance services / 6-2 Maintenance schedule / 6-3 Owner maintenance / 6-10 Engine compartment / 6-12 Engine oil / 6-13 Engine coolant / 6-14 Air cleaner / 6-16 Brakes / 6-17 Lubricants and fluids / 6-18 Power steering / 6-19 Climate control air filter / 6-20 Wiper blades / 6-21 Fuses / 6-23 Battery / 6-32 Tires and wheels / 6-34
Maintenance 6
Lubricant / 6-47 Appearance care / 6-49 Emission control system / 6-53 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care to Owner’s responsibility Repairs and adjustments required as a prevent damage to your vehicle and result of improper maintenance or a lack injury to yourself whenever performing of required maintenance are not covered. Maintenance Service and Record any maintenance or inspection proce- Retention are the owner's responsibil- We strongly recommend that all vehicle dures. ity. maintenance be performed by an author- Should you have any doubts concerning ized Kia dealer using genuine Kia parts. the inspection or servicing of your vehi- cle, we strongly recommend that you You should retain documents that show have an Authorized Kia Dealer perform proper maintenance has been performed this work. on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts An Authorized Kia Dealer has factory- shown on the following pages. You need trained technicians and genuine Kia this information to establish your compli- parts to service your vehicle properly. For ance with the servicing and maintenance expert advice and quality service, see an requirements of your Kia warranties. Authorized Kia Dealer. Detailed warranty information is provided Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient in your Warranty & Consumer Information servicing may result in operational prob- manual. lems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or person- al injury.
26 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both kilometrage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first. R : Replace or change I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first INTERVALS × 1,000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 MAINTENANCE ITEM # Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Engine oil and oil filter Replace every 12,000 km or 12 months Add fuel additive (1) Add every 12,000 km or 12 months Fuel filter (2) I I I I Fuel tank, fuel filler cap, canister, vapor hose, fuel line, fuel hoses and IIII connections of each part. Fuel tank air filer (CCV filter) (2) I I I I
(1) If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives ars available from your authorized Kia deal- er along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives. (2) Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
63 Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) R : Replace or change I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first INTERVALS × 1,000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 MAINTENANCE ITEM # Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Vaccum hoses I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII Air cleaner element I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R Spark plugs R Valve clearance (3) II
(3) Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.
46 Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) R : Replace or change I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first INTERVALS × 1,000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 MAINTENANCE ITEM # Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 At first, inspect the drive belt at 96,000 km or 72 months; Drive belts (4) after that, inspect it 24,000 km or 24 months
At first, replace at 192,000 km or 120 months; Engine coolant (5) after that, replace every 48,000 km or 24 months
Cooling system hoses & connections I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII Automatic transaxle oil No check, No service required Brake/clutch* fluid I I I I Brake lines/lines & connections IIIIIIII (including booster) Clutch* & brake pedal free play I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
* if equipped (4) The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively. (5) When adding coolant, use only deionizes water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An inproper coolant mixture can result in serious maifunction or engine damage.
65 Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) R : Replace or change I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first INTERVALS × 1,000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 MAINTENANCE ITEM # Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Front brake disc/pads, calipers I I I IIIII Rear brake disc/pads I I I IIIII Parking brake I I I I Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings I I I IIIII Front suspension ball jonts I I I IIIII Steering gear box, linkage & boots/ IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint Drive shaft dust boots I I I IIIII All latch, hinges and locks I I I IIIII Battery condition I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
66 Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) R : Replace or change I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first INTERVALS × 1,000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 MAINTENANCE ITEM # Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Power steering fluid and lines* I I I IIIII Power steering pump, belt and hoses I I I IIIII Climate contol air filter R R R RRRRR Air conditioner compressor operation & IIIIIIII refrigerant amount Rotate tires I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII Tire condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
* if equipped
67 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals. R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE ITEM DRIVING OPERATION INTERVALS CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER R EVERY 6,000 km OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K AIR CLEANER ELEMENT R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 96,000 km A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 12,000 km OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G
86 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE ITEM DRIVING OPERATION INTERVALS CONDITION
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A - Repeatedly driving shorts distanse of less than 8 km (5 miles) in E - Driving in sandy areas normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing tem- F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F) perature G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing roads J - Driving over 170 km/h (100 mph) D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions cold weather
69 Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner maintenance schedule While operating your vehicle: At least monthly: The following lists are vehicle checks and • Note any changes in the sound of the • Check coolant level in the coolant inspections that should be performed by exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes recovery reservoir. the owner or an Authorized Kia Dealer at in the vehicle. • Check the operation of all exterior the frequencies indicated to help ensure • Check for vibrations in the steering lights, including the stoplights, turn sig- safe, dependable operation of your vehi- wheel. Notice any increased steering nals and hazard warning flashers. cle. effort or looseness in the steering • Check the inflation pressures of all Any adverse conditions should be wheel, or change in its straight-ahead tires including the spare. brought to the attention of your dealer as position. soon as possible. • Notice if your vehicle constantly turns At least twice a year These Owner Maintenance Checks are slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav- (i.e., every Spring and Fall): generally not covered by warranties and eling on smooth, level road. • Check radiator, heater and air condi- you may be charged for labor, parts and • When stopping, listen and check for tioning hoses for leaks or damage. lubricants used. unusual sounds, pulling to one side, • Check windshield washer spray and increased brake pedal travel or “hard- wiper operation. Clean wiper blades When you stop for fuel: to-push” brake pedal. with clean cloth dampened with wash- • Check the engine oil level. • If any slipping or changes in the oper- er fluid. ation of your transaxle occurs, check • Check coolant level in coolant reser- • Check headlight alignment. the transaxle fluid level. voir. • Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields • Check automatic transaxle P (Park) and clamps. function. WARNING • Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear • Check parking brake. Be careful when checking your and function. engine coolant level when the • Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle • Check for worn tires and loose wheel engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant (water dripping from the air condition- lug nuts. and steam may blow out under ing system during or after use is nor- pressure.This could cause burns or mal). other serious injury. • Check the windshield washer fluid level. • Look for low or under-inflated tires.
6 10 Maintenance
At least once a year: Owner maintenance precautions • Clean body and door drain holes. Improper or incomplete service may WARNING - Maintenance • Lubricate door hinges and checks, and result in problems. This section gives work hood hinges. instructions only for the maintenance • Performing maintenance work on • Lubricate door and hood locks and items that are easy to perform. a vehicle can be dangerous. You latches. As explained earlier in this section, sev- can be seriously injured while per- • Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips. eral procedures can be done only by an forming some maintenance pro- • Check the air conditioning system Authorized Kia Dealer with special tools. cedures. If you lack sufficient before the warm weather season. knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do Improper owner maintenance during • Check the power steering fluid level. the work, have it done by an the warranty period may affect war- • Inspect and lubricate automatic Authorized Kia Dealer. ranty coverage. For details, read the transaxle linkage and controls. • Working under the hood with the • Clean battery and terminals. separate Kia Warranty & Consumer Information Manual provided with the engine running is dangerous. It • Check the brake fluid level. vehicle. If you're unsure about any becomes even more dangerous servicing or maintenance procedure, when you wear jewelry or loose have it done by an Authorized Kia clothing. These can become Dealer. entangled in moving parts and result in injury. Always remove all loose or hanging clothing and all jewelry before working on the engine.
611 Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Air cleaner 5. Fuse box 6. Negative battery terminal 7. Positive battery terminal 8. Radiator cap 9. Engine oil dipstick 10. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. OVQ063001N
6 12 Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
WARNING Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in con- tact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory ani- mals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil. OVQ066002N OXM079005 Checking the engine oil level If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground. the level to F. Do not overfill. CAUTION 2. Start the engine and allow it to reach Do not spill engine oil, when adding Use a funnel to refill the new oil com- normal operating temperature. or changing engine oil. If you drop fortably. 3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few the engine oil on the engine room, minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to wipe it off immediately. return to the oil pan. Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to “Recommended Lubricants” later in 4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and this section.) re-insert it fully.
WARNING - Radiator hose Have engine oil and filter changed by an Authorized Kia Dealer according to the Be very careful not to touch the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning radiator hose when checking or of this section. adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you. 5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L. 613 Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT The high-pressure cooling system has a (Continued) reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac- Step back while the pressure is tory. released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pres- Check the antifreeze protection and sure has been released, press coolant level at least once a year, at the down on the cap, using a thick beginning of the winter season, and towel, and continue turning coun- before traveling to a colder climate. terclockwise to remove it. • Even if the engine is not operat- Checking the coolant level ing, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the WARNING engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow OVQ066004N Removing radiator out under pressure, causing seri- Check the condition and connections of cap ous injury. all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio- rated hoses. • Never attempt to remove the radi- WARNING ator cap while the engine is oper- The electric motor (cool- ating or hot. Doing so might lead ing fan) is controlled by to cooling system and engine engine coolant tempera- damage and could result in seri- ture, refrigerant pres- ous personal injury from escap- sure and vehicle speed. ing hot coolant or steam. It may sometimes operate even • Turn the engine off and wait until when the engine is not running. Use it cools down. Use extreme care extreme caution when working near when removing the radiator cap. the blades of the cooling fan so that Wrap a thick towel around it, and you are not injured by a rotating fan turn it counterclockwise slowly to blades. As the engine coolant tem- the first stop. perature decreases, the electric (Continued) motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.
6 14 Maintenance
Have coolant changed by an Authorized For mixture percentage, refer to the fol- Kia Dealer according to the Maintenance lowing table. Schedule at the beginning of this section. • When adding coolant, use only deion- Mixture Percentage (volume) ized water or soft water for your vehicle Ambient and never mix hard water in the Temperature coolant filled at the factory. An improp- Coolant Water er coolant mixture can result in serious Solution malfunction or engine damage. -15°C (5°F) 35 65 • The engine in your vehicle has alu- -25°C (-13°F) 40 60 minum engine parts and must be pro- -35°C (-31°F) 50 50 OVQ066021N tected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosion and freez- -45°C (-49°F) 60 40 The coolant level should be filled ing. between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol cool. coolant or mix them with the specified If the coolant level is low, add enough coolant. specified coolant to provide protection • Do not use a solution that contains against freezing and corrosion. Bring the more than 60% antifreeze or less than level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent 35% antifreeze, which would reduce additions are required, see an Authorized the effectiveness of the solution. Kia Dealer for a cooling system inspec- tion.
615 Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
CAUTION - Engine Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in exces- sive engine wear.
WARNING - Engine Driving without an air cleaner encourages backfiring, which could cause a fire in the engine compart- ment. OVQ066010N OVQ066005N Element replacement WARNING Have the air cleaner element checked Radiator cap and replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure caus- ing serious injury.
6 16 Maintenance
BRAKES Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer to “Recommended Lubricants” later in CAUTION this section.) Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint Never mix different types of fluid. damage will result. Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never WARNING - Loss of brake be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be thrown fluid out. Don't put in the wrong kind of In the event the brake system fluid. A few drops of mineral-based requires frequent additions of fluid, oil, such as engine oil, in your brake the vehicle should be inspected by OVQ067024N system can damage brake system an Authorized Kia Dealer. parts. Checking brake fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri- odically. The fluid level should be Brake fluid between MAX and MIN marks on the WARNING - side of the reservoir. When changing and adding brake fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it Before removing the reservoir cap and come in contact with your eyes. If adding brake fluid, clean the area around brake fluid should come in contact the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent with your eyes, immediately flush brake fluid contamination. them with a large quantity of fresh If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX tap water. Have your eyes examined level. The level will fall with accumulated by a doctor as soon as possible. mileage. This is a normal condition asso- ciated with the wear of the brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
617 Maintenance
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS Body lubrication WARNING - Coolant All moving points of the body, such as • Do not use radiator coolant or door hinges, hood hinges, and locks, antifreeze in the washer fluid should be lubricated each time the reservoir. engine oil is changed. Use a non-freez- • Radiator coolant can severely ing lubricant on locks during cold weath- obscure visibility when sprayed er. on the windshield and may cause Make sure the engine hood secondary loss of vehicle control or damage latch keeps the hood from opening when to paint and body trim. the primary latch is released. • Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol OVQ066013N and can be flammable under cer- Checking the washer fluid level tain circumstances. Do not allow The reservoir is translucent so that you sparks or flame to contact the can check the level with a quick visual washer fluid or the washer fluid inspection. reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or it's occupants could occur. Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain • Windshield washer fluid is poi- water may be used if washer fluid is not sonous to humans and animals. available. However, use washer solvent Do not drink and avoid contacting with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- windshield washer fluid. Serious mates to prevent freezing. injury or death could occur. This warning light indicates the washer fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the washer fluid as soon as possible.
6 18 Maintenance
POWER STEERING Power steering hoses CAUTION Check the connections for oil leaks, • To avoid damage to the power severe damage and twists in the power steering pump, do not operate the steering hose before driving. vehicle for prolonged periods with a low power steering fluid level. • Never start the engine when the reservoir tank is empty. • When adding fluid, be careful that dirt does not get into the tank. • Too little fluid can result in OVQ066012N increased steering effort and/or Checking the power steering fluid noise from the power steering sys- level tem. • The use of the non-specified fluid With the vehicle on level ground, check could reduce the effectiveness of the fluid level in the power steering reser- the power steering system and voir periodically. The fluid should be cause damage to it. between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir at the normal tem- perature. Use only the specified power steering Before adding power steering fluid, thor- fluid. (Refer to "Recommended oughly clean the area around the reser- Lubricants" later in this section.) voir cap to prevent power steering fluid contamination. If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. In the event the power steering system requires frequent addition of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
619 Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER The climate control air filter should be Outside air replaced every 15,000 km (10,000 miles). If the vehicle is operated in the Recirculated severely air-polluted cities or on dusty air rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you try to replace the climate control air filter by owner maintenance, replace it performing the following procedure, and in this case, be Blower Heater core careful to avoid damaging other compo- Climate control Evaporator nents. air filter core 1LDA5047 The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehi- cle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this hap- pens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
6 20 Maintenance
WIPER BLADES CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
Replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade- quately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement. 1VQA5022 1LDA5023 Maintenance CAUTION Front windshield wiper blade Commercial hot waxes applied by To prevent damage to the wiper 1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper automatic car washes have been arms or other components, do not blade assembly to expose the plastic known to make the windshield diffi- attempt to move the wipers manual- locking clip. cult to clean. ly. CAUTION Contamination of either the windshield or Do not allow the wiper arm to fall the wiper blades with foreign matter can CAUTION against the windshield, since it may reduce the effectiveness of the wind- The use of a non-specified wiper chip or crack the windshield. shield wipers. Common sources of con- blade could result in wiper malfunc- tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot tion and failure. wax treatments used by some commer- cial car washes. If the blades are not wip- ing properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.
621 Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade replace- ment To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.
1LDA5024
1LDA5025 2. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward. 3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
6 22 Maintenance
FUSES Blade type This vehicle has three fuse panels, one Fuse replacement located in the driver’s side panel bolster, another in the cargo area, the other in the engine compartment near the bat- WARNING - Fuse replace- tery. ment If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces- • Never replace a fuse with any- Normal Blown sories, or controls do not work, check the thing but another fuse of the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has same rating. blown, the element inside the fuse will be • A higher capacity fuse could Cartridge type melted. cause damage possibly a fire. If the electrical system does not work, • Never install a wire or aluminum first check the driver’s side fuse panel. foil instead of the proper fuse - Before replacing a blown fuse, discon- even as a temporary repair. It may nect the negative battery cable. cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire. Normal Blown Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating. Fusible link If the replacement fuse blows, this indi- cates an electrical problem. Avoid using CAUTION the system involved and immediately Do not use a screwdriver or any consult an Authorized Kia Dealer. other metal object to remove fuses Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type because it may cause a short circuit for lower amperage rating and cartridge and damage the system. Normal Blown type, fusible link for higher amperage rat- ings. 1VQA4037 ✽ A vehicle’s electrical system is protected NOTICE from electrical overload damage by The actual fuse/relay panel label fuses. may differ from equipped items.
623 Maintenance
CAUTION CAUTION • When replacing a blown fuse or After checking the fuse box in the relay with a new one, make sure engine compartment, securely the new fuse or relay fits tightly install the fuse box cover. If not, into the clips. The incomplete fas- electrical failures may occur from tening fuse or relay may cause water leaking in. the vehicle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire. • Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and termi- 1VQA4006 nals may be fastened incomplete- Engine compartment ly, and it may cause a possible 1.Turn the ignition switch and all other fire. If fuses, relays and terminals switches off. fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, consult with an authorized 2.Remove the fuse box cover by press- Kia dealer. ing the tap and pulling up. • Do not input any other objects 3.Check the removed fuse; replace it if it except fuses or relays into is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, fuse/relay terminals such as a use the fuse puller in the main fuse box driver or wiring. It may cause con- in the engine compartment. tact failure and system malfunc- 4.Push in a new fuse of the same rating, tion. and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.
6 24 Maintenance
Driver’s side panel If the headlights or other electrical com- ponents do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.
1VQA4002 1VQA4004 Rear cargo area panel 3.Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided on the main fuse box in the engine compart- ment. 4.Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the main fuse box in the engine compartment. 5.Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized Kia OVQ059016N Dealer. Inner panel If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may 1.Turn the ignition switch and all other not need for operating the vehicle, such switches off. as the cigar lighter fuse. 2.Open the fuse panel cover.
625 Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity. Driver’s side panel Engine compartment
1VQA4008 Main fuse If the main fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows: 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above. Rear cargo area panel 3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating. 4. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
✽ NOTICE If the main fuse is blown, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.
OVA067012/OVQ069017N/OVQ067104N/OVQ046010N
6 26 Maintenance
Driver's side fuse panel Description Fuse rating Protected component AUDIO 15A Audio, Step lamp MEMORY 7.5A Climate control module, Clock, Cluster, Trip computer, Front area module, Power sliding door module, Power tailgate module, Driver's door module, Front passenger door module, Driver's power seat module, Driver position memory system unit VRS 10A Variable rack stroke system module, Variable rack stroke system control button IG2-1 7.5A Air conditioner control module, Multi function switch, Inside relay box, ECM mirror, Rain sensor, Seat Warmer IG2-2 7.5A Rear climate control button, Front area module, Power sliding door module, Power tailgate module, Driver's door module, Front passenger door module, Driver's power seat module, Driver position memory system unit OBD-II 7.5A OBD-II, Diagonosis connector ROOM 7.5A Vanity mirror, Map lamp, Overhead console, Room lamp switch, Climate control module, Homelink K/LOCK 7.5A Key interlock solenoid ILLUMI 7.5A Instrument panel illumination AMP 25A Amplifier SEAT WARMER 20A Inside relay box(Seat warmer) SUNROOF 25A Sunroof module DDM 30A Driver's door module TPMS 7.5A Tire pressure monitoring system PEDAL 15A Power adjustable pedal relay(None-driver position memory system only) P/OUTLET 1 15A Power outlet(Front) ASS P/SEAT 20A Front passenger's power seat module DRV P/SEAT 30A Driver's power seat module ADM 30A Front passenger door module ACC 7.5A Audio, Clock, Outside rearview mirror control and folding switch P/OUTLET 2 15A Cigar lighter, Power outlet START 7.5A Start relay AIRBAG IND 7.5A Cluster
627 Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component ENG 7.5A Automatic shift lever switch, Vehicle speed sensor, Inhibitor switch, Transaxle control module, Input speed sensor, Output speed sensor, Back-up lamp switch, Fuel filter IG1 7.5A Trip computer, Buzzer(Back warning system), Cluster, ESC switch, Ambient temperature sensor, Generator ABS 7.5A ABS control module, ESC control module, Yaw rate sensor, Steering angle sensor AIRBAG 15A Air bag control module ALTERNATOR - Generator relay SHUNT - Shunt connector
Rear cargo area panel Description Fuse rating Protected component RR D/LOCK 20A Sliding door lock relay, Sliding door unlock relay, Sliding door lock actuator, Tailgate lock actuator RR WIPER 15A Rear wiper relay, Rear wiper motor RR DEFOG 25A Rear window defroster relay, Rear window defroster POWER TAIL GATE 30A Power tailgate module P/QUARTER 10A Power rear quarter glass open relay, Power rear quarter glass close relay, Power rear quarter glass motor RR P/WIN-RH 25A Sliding door power window relay(Right), Sliding door power window motor(Right) RR P/WIN-LH 25A Sliding door power window relay(Left), Sliding door power window motor(Left) PSD-RH 30A Power sliding door module(Right) PSD-LH 30A Power sliding door module(Left) LUGGAGE 7.5A Step lamp, Power tailgate ON/OFF switch, Tailgate lamp FUEL DOOR 15A Fuel filler lid relay, Fuel filler lid actuator RR P/OTLT-LH 15A Rear power outlet(Left) RR P/OTLT-RH 15A Rear power outlet(Right) RR DEFOG RELAY - Rear window defroster relay
6 28 Maintenance
Engine compartment Description Fuse rating Protected component Description Fuse rating Protected component FRT/RR WASHER 10A Front washer motor relay, P/TRAIN 7.5A Theft alarm relay, Main relay, Rear washer motor relay TCM, Generator, ECM, Injector IG 2 7.5A Fuel filter 15A, ECU 2 15A, ECU 1 10A, STOP LAMP 20A Stop lamp, Air conditioner compressor relay, High mounted stop lamp Inlet metering valve, EGR sole- FUEL HEATER 20A Fuel filter heater noid valve, Air flow sensor, KEY SW 1 25A Instrument panel module Diesel box, Immobilizer module STOP SIGNAL 7.5A TCU, PCU/ECU, ABS/ESC Unit FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel pump motor A/C COMP 7.5A Air conditioner compressor relay SP 7.5A Spare fuse ATM 15A ATM solenoid SP 10A Spare fuse FRT DEICER 15A Front deicer SP 15A Spare fuse HORN 15A Horn relay SP 20A Spare fuse ECU 1 10A PCU/ECU, A/C comp relay, Mass SP 25A Spare fuse air flow sensor, Immobilizer unit ABS 1 40A ABS control module, O2 DN 10A O2 sensor(RL, RR) ESC control module ECU 2 15A PCU/ECU, Oil control valve 1/2, ABS 2 20A ABS control module, Variable intake manifold valve 1/2, ESC control module Canister purge solenoid valve, FRT WIPER 30A Front wiper ON relay Canister close valve, KEY SW 2 30A Start relay, IG2 Load(Variable Pulse width modulation relay rack stroke, ECM mirror, Rain O2 UP 10A O2 sensor(FL, FR) sensor, Seat warmer) IGN COIL 20A Ignition coil 1/2/3/4/5/6, Condensor RAM 1 50A Rear area module INJECTOR 15A PCU/ECU, Injector 1/2/3/4/5/6, RAM 2 50A Rear area module Glow relay 1/2, Intake manifold RAM 3 50A Rear area module valve, EGR Solenoid valve, Cooling fan relay, Air flow sen- sor, Intake throttle valve
629 Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component IPM 1 50A Instrument panel module IPM 2 50A Instrument panel module IPM 3 50A Instrument panel module FRT BLOWER 40A Inside relay box(Front blower relay) RR BLOWER 30A Inside relay box(Rear blower relay) IG 2 RELAY - Ignition relay A/C COMP RELAY - Air conditioner compressor relay MAIN RELAY - Main relay START RELAY - Start relay FUEL PUMP RELAY - Fuel pump relay
Engine compartment (main fuse) Description Fuse rating Protected component ALT 150A/200A Generator C/FAN 60A Cooling fan
6 30 Maintenance
✽ NOTICE • If the shunt connector is pulled up Shunt connector from the fuse panel, the warning chime, audio, clock and interior lamps, etc., will not operate. Some items must be rest after replacement. • Even though the shunt connector is pulled up, the battery can still be dis- charged by operation of the head- lights or other electrical devices.
1VQA4005 Shunt connector Your vehicle is equipped with a shunt connector to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods. Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine. 2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights. 3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and pull up the shunt connector.
631 Maintenance
BATTERY
(Continued) (Continued) Keep batteries out of the An inappropriately dis- reach of children because posed battery can be harm- batteries contain highly ful to the environment and corrosive SULFURIC ACID. human health. Dispose the Do not allow battery acid to battery according to your contact your skin, eyes, local law(s) or regulation. clothing or paint finish. • When lifting a plastic-cased bat- If any electrolyte gets into tery, excessive pressure on the your eyes, flush your eyes case may cause battery acid to with clean water for at least leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with OVQ066018N 15 minutes and get immedi- ate medical attention. If your hands on opposite corners. possible, continue to apply • Never attempt to recharge the WARNING - Battery water with a sponge or battery when the battery cables dangers cloth until medical attention are connected. Always read the following is received. If electrolyte • The electrical ignition system instructions carefully when gets on your skin, thor- works with high voltage. Never handling a battery. oughly wash the contacted touch these components with the area. If you feel a pain or a engine running or the ignition Keep lighted cigarettes and burning sensation, get med- switched on. all other flames or sparks ical attention immediately. Failure to follow the above warn- away from the battery. Wear eye protection when ings can result in serious bodily Hydrogen, a highly com- charging or working near a injury or death. bustible gas, is always battery. Always provide present in battery cells and ventilation when working in may explode if ignited. an enclosed space. (Continued) (Continued)
6 32 Maintenance
• If the battery gradually discharges For best battery service: (Continued) • Keep the battery securely mounted. because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20- • Keep the battery top clean and dry. • Watch the battery during charg- 30A for two hours. ing, and stop or reduce the charg- • Keep the terminals and connections ing rate if the battery cells begin clean, tight, and coated with petroleum Items to be reset after the battery gassing (boiling) violently or if jelly or terminal grease. the temperature of the electrolyte • Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the has been discharged or the bat- tery has been disconnected. of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F). battery immediately with a solution of • Wear eye protection when check- water and baking soda. • Clock (See Chapter 3) ing the battery during charging. • If the vehicle is not going to be used for • Sunroof (See Chapter 3) • Disconnect the battery charger in an extended time, disconnect the bat- • Trip computer (See Chapter 3) the following order. tery cables. • Climate control system (See Chapter 1. Turn off the battery charger main 3) switch. CAUTION • Audio (See Chapter 3) 2. Unhook the negative clamp from • Power sliding door and power tailgate the negative battery terminal. If you connect unauthorized elec- (See Chapter 3) tronic devices to the battery, the 3. Unhook the positive clamp from battery may be discharged. Never the positive battery terminal. use unauthorized devices. WARNING - Recharging battery Battery recharging When recharging the battery, CAUTION Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, observe the following precautions: • Before performing maintenance calcium-based battery. • The battery must be removed or recharging the battery, turn off • If the battery becomes discharged in a from the vehicle and placed in an all accessories and stop the short time (because, for example, the area with good ventilation. engine. headlights or interior lights were left on • Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or • The negative battery cable must while the vehicle was not in use), flame near the battery. be removed first and installed last recharge it by slow charging (trickle) (Continued) when the battery is disconnected. for 10 hours.
633 Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures OVQ053100
All tire pressures (including the OVQ066022N spare) should be checked every day when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the vehicle has not been driv- All specifications (sizes and pres- en for at least three hours or driven sures) can be found on a label less than 1.6 km (one mile). attached to the vehicle. Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehi- cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
OVQ053101
6 34 Maintenance
WARNING - Tire underin- (Continued) WARNING - Tire Inflation flation • Overinflation produces a Overinflation or underinflation harsh ride, excessive wear at Severe underinflation (70 kPa can reduce tire life, adversely the center of the tire tread, and (10 psi) or more) can lead to affect vehicle handling, and lead a greater possibility of dam- severe heat build-up, causing to sudden tire failure.This could age from road hazards. blowouts, tread separation and result in loss of vehicle control other tire failures that can result and potential injury. in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or CAUTION death. This risk is much higher • Warm tires normally exceed CAUTION - Tire pressure on hot days and when driving recommended cold tire pres- Always observe the following: for protracted periods at high sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 • Check tire pressure when the speeds. psi). Do not release air from tires are cold. (After vehicle warm tires to adjust the pres- has been parked for at least sure or the tires will be under- three hours or hasn't been inflated. CAUTION driven more than 1.6 km (one • Be sure to reinstall the tire mile) since startup.) • Underinflation also results in inflation valve caps. Without • Check the pressure of your excessive wear, poor handling the valve cap, dirt or moisture and reduced fuel economy. spare tire each time you check could get into the valve core the pressure of other tires. Wheel deformation also is and cause air leakage. If a possible. Keep your tire pres- valve cap is missing, install a • Never overload your vehicle. sures at the proper levels. If a new one as soon as possible. Be careful not to overload a tire frequently needs refilling, vehicle luggage rack if your have it checked by an vehicle is equipped with one. Authorized Kia Dealer. • Worn, old tires can cause acci- (Continued) dents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.
635 Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pressure Remove the valve cap from the tire Tire rotation Check your tires once a month or valve stem. Press the tire gage firm- To equalize tread wear, it is recom- more. ly onto the valve to get a pressure mended that the tires be rotated Also, check the tire pressure of the measurement. If the cold tire inflation every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or spare tire. pressure matches the recommended sooner if irregular wear develops. pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjust- During rotation, check the tires for How to check ment is necessary. If the pressure is correct balance. Use a good quality gage to check tire low, add air until you reach the rec- When rotating tires, check for uneven pressure. You can not tell if your tires ommended amount. wear and damage. Abnormal wear is are properly inflated simply by look- If you overfill the tire, release air by usually caused by incorrect tire pres- ing at them. Radial tires may look pushing on the metal stem in the sure, improper wheel alignment, out- properly inflated even when they're center of the tire valve. Recheck the of-balance wheels, severe braking or underinflated. tire pressure with the tire gage. Be severe cornering. Look for bumps or Check the tire's inflation pressure sure to put the valve caps back on bulges in the tread or side of tire. when the tires are cold. - "Cold" the valve stems. They help prevent Replace the tire if you find either of means your vehicle has been sitting leaks by keeping out dirt and mois- these conditions. Replace the tire if for at least three hours or driven no ture. fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, more than 1.6 km (1 mile). be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness. Refer to Section 7, Specifications.
6 36 Maintenance
With a full-size spare tire (if equipped) Disc brake pads should be inspected Tread wear indicator for wear whenever tires are rotated. Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left.
WARNING S2BLA790 Without a spare tire • Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation • Do not mix bias ply and radial 1LDA5026 ply tires under any circum- Tire replacement stances. This may cause If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear unusual handling characteris- indicator will appear as a solid band tics that could result in death, across the tread. This shows there is severe injury, or property less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread damage. S2BLA790A left on the tire. Replace the tire when Directional tires (if equipped) this happens. Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replac- ing the tire.
CBGQ0707A
637 Maintenance
Wheel replacement However, if you notice unusual tire WARNING When replacing the metal wheels for wear or your vehicle pulling one way The ABS works by comparing any reason, make sure the new or the other, the alignment may need the speed of the wheels.Tire size wheels are equivalent to the original to be reset. can affect wheel speed. When factory units in diameter, rim width If you notice your vehicle vibrating replacing tires, all 4 tires must and offset. when driving on a smooth road, your use the same size originally sup- wheels may need to be rebalanced. plied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the WARNING ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) A wheel that is not the correct CAUTION and ESC (Electronic Stability size may adversely affect wheel Improper wheel weights can Control) to work irregularly. and bearing life, braking and damage your vehicle's alu- stopping abilities, handling char- minum wheels. Use only acteristics, ground clearance, approved wheel weights. Compact spare tire replacement body-to-tire clearance, snow A compact spare tire has a shorter chain clearance, speedometer tread life than a regular size tire. calibration, headlight aim and WARNING - Replacing Replace it when you can see the bumper height. tires tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire • Driving on worn-out tires is Wheel alignment and tire very hazardous and will reduce should be the same size and design balance tire as the one provided with your braking effectiveness, steering new Kia and should be mounted on The wheels on your vehicle were accuracy, and traction. the same compact spare tire wheel. aligned and balanced carefully at the • Your vehicle is equipped with The compact spare tire is not factory to give you the longest tire life tires designed to provide for designed to be mounted on a regular and best overall performance. safe ride and handling capa- size wheel, and the compact spare In most cases, you will not need to bility. tire wheel is not designed for mount- have your wheels aligned again. (Continued) ing a regular size tire.
6 38 Maintenance
(Continued) Tire traction 1 Tire traction can be reduced if you Do not use a size and type of 5,6 drive on worn tires, tires that are tire and wheel that is different improperly inflated or on slippery 7 from the one that is originally road surfaces. Tires should be installed on your vehicle. It can replaced when tread wear indicators 4 affect the safety and perform- appear. To reduce the possibility of ance of your vehicle, which losing control, slow down whenever could lead to handling failure 2 there is rain, snow or ice on the road. 3 or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with Tire maintenance 1 I030B04JM the tire and wheel of the same In addition to proper inflation, correct size, type, tread, brand and wheel alignment helps to decrease Tire sidewall labeling load-carrying capacity. tire wear. If you find a tire is worn Federal law requires tire manufactur- • The use of any other tire size unevenly, have your dealer check the ers to place standardized information or type may seriously affect wheel alignement. on the sidewall of all tires. This infor- ride, handling, ground clear- When you have new tires installed, mation identifies and describes the ance, stopping distance, body make sure they are balanced. This fundamental characteristics of the to tire clearance, snow tire will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire and also provides the tire identifi- clearance, and speedometer tire life. Additionally, a tire should cation number (TIN) for safety stan- reliability. always be rebalanced if it is removed dard certification. The TIN can be • It is best to replace all four tires from the wheel. used to identify the tire in case of a at the same time. If that is not recall. possible, or necessary, then replace the two front or two 1. Manufacturer or brand name rear tires as a pair. Replacing Manufacturer or Brand name is just one tire can seriously shown. affect your vehicle’s handling.
639 Maintenance
2. Tire size designation 86 - Load Index, a numerical code Tire speed ratings A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire associated with the maximum The chart below lists many of the dif- size designation. You will need this load the tire can carry. ferent speed ratings currently being information when selecting replace- H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the used for passenger cars. The speed ment tires for your car. The following speed rating chart in this section rating is part of the tire size designa- explains what the letters and num- for additional information. tion on the sidewall of the tire. This bers in the tire size designation symbol corresponds to that tire's mean. designed maximum safe operating Wheel size designation Example tire size designation: speed. Wheels are also marked with impor- (These numbers are provided as an tant information that you need if you Speed example only; your tire size designa- ever have to replace one. The follow- tor could vary depending on your Rating Maximum Speed ing explains what the letters and Symbol vehicle.) numbers in the wheel size designa- P185/65R14 86H tion mean. S 180 km/h (112 mph) T 190 km/h (118 mph) P - Applicable vehicle type (tires Example wheel size designation: H 210 km/h (130 mph) marked with the prefix “P’’ are 5.5JX14 V 240 km/h (149 mph) intended for use on passenger Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph) cars or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking). 5.5 - Rim width in inches. 185 - Tire width in millimeters. J - Rim contour designation. 65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section 14 - Rim diameter in inches. height as a percentage of its width. R - Tire construction code (Radial). 14 - Rim diameter in inches.
6 40 Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire 5. Maximum permissible inflation Identification Number) WARNING - Tire age pressure Any tires that are over 6 years, based Tires degrade over time, even This number is the greatest amount on the manufacturing date, tire when they are not being used. of air pressure that should be put in strength and performance, decline Regardless of the remaining the tire. Do not exceed the maximum with age naturally (even unused tread, it is recommended that permissible inflation pressure. Refer spare tires). Therefore, the tires tires generally be replaced after to the Tire and Loading Information (including the spare tire) should be six (6) years of normal service. label for recommended inflation replaced by new ones. You can find Heat caused by hot climates or pressure. the manufacturing date on the tire frequent high loading conditions sidewall (possibly on the inside of the can accelerate the aging 6. Maximum load rating wheel), displaying the DOT Code. process. Failure to follow this The DOT Code is a series of num- This number indicates the maximum warning can result in sudden tire load in kilograms and pounds that bers on a tire consisting of numbers failure, which could lead to a and English letters. The manufactur- can be carried by the tire. When loss of control and an accident replacing the tires on the vehicle, ing date is designated by the last four involving serious injury or death. digits (characters) of the DOT code. always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire. DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO 4. Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rub- The front part of the DOT means a ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire 7. Uniform tire quality grading plant code number, tire size and manufacturers also must indicate the Quality grades can be found where tread pattern and the last four num- materials in the tire, which include applicable on the tire sidewall bers indicate week and year manu- steel, nylon, polyester, and others. between tread shoulder and maxi- factured. The letter "R" means radial ply con- mum section width. For example: struction; the letter "D" means diago- For example: nal or bias ply construction; and the DOT XXXX XXXX 1613 represents TREADWEAR 200 that the tire was produced in the 16th letter "B" means belted-bias ply con- week of 2013. struction. TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A
641 Maintenance
Tread wear Traction - AA, A, B & C The tread wear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to WARNING - Tire tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B and C. The temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tires ability to The temperature grade for this conditions on a specified govern- stop on wet pavement as measured tire is established for a tire that ment test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on spec- is properly inflated and not graded 150 would wear one-and-a- ified government test surfaces of overloaded. Excessive speed, half times as well on the government asphalt and concrete. A tire marked underinflation, or excessive course as a tire graded 100. C may have poor traction perform- loading, either separately or in The relative performance of tires ance. combination, can cause heat depends upon the actual conditions Temperature -A, B & C build-up and possible sudden of their use. However, performance The temperature grades are A (the tire failure. This can cause loss may differ from the norm because of highest), B and C. The grades repre- of vehicle control and serious variations in driving habits, service sent the tire’s resistance to the gen- injury or death. practices and differences in road eration of heat and its ability to dissi- characteristics and climate. pate heat when tested under con- These grades are molded on the trolled conditions on a specified side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. indoor laboratory test wheel. The tires available as standard or Sustained high temperature can optional equipment on Kia vehicles cause the material of the tires to may vary with respect to grade. degenerate and reduce tires life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tires failure. Grades A and B represent higher levels of perform- ance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by the law.
6 42 Maintenance
Tire terminology and definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of Intended Outboard Sidewall: The Air Pressure: The amount of air air pressure in a tire, measured in side of an asymmetrical tire, that inside the tire pressing outward on kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per must always face outward when the tire. Air pressure is expressed in square inch (psi) before a tire has mounted on a vehicle. kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per built up heat from driving. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for square inch (psi). Curb Weight: This means the weight air pressure. Accessory Weight: This means the of a motor vehicle with standard and Load Index: An assigned number combined weight of optional acces- optional equipment including the ranging from 1 to 279 that corre- sories. Some examples of optional maximum capacity of fuel, oil and sponds to the load carrying capacity accessories are, automatic transmis- coolant, but without passengers and of a tire. cargo. sion, power seats, and air condition- Maximum Inflation Pressure: The ing. DOT Markings: The DOT code maximum air pressure to which a Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a includes the Tire Identification cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- tire's height to its width. Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des- mum air pressure is molded onto the ignator which can also identify the sidewall. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords tire manufacturer, production plant, that is located between the plies and brand and date of production. Maximum Load Rating: The load the tread. Cords may be made from rating for a tire at the maximum per- steel or other reinforcing materials. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating missible inflation pressure for that Bead: The tire bead contains steel GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight tire. wires wrapped by steel cords that Rating for the front Axle. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: hold the tire onto the rim. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight The sum of curb weight; accessory Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in Rating for the rear axle. weight; vehicle capacity weight; and which the plies are laid at alternate production options weight. angles less than 90 degrees to the Normal Occupant Weight: The centerline of the tread. number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 pounds).
643 Maintenance
Occupant Distribution: Designated Speed Rating: An alphanumeric Vehicle Maximum Load on the seating positions. code assigned to a tire indicating the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to Outward Facing Sidewall: The side maximum speed at which a tire can curb and accessory weight plus of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- operate. maximum occupant and cargo ticular side that faces outward when Traction: The friction between the weight. mounted on a vehicle. The outward tire and the road surface. The Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: facing sidewall bears white lettering amount of grip provided. That load on an individual tire that is or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or Tread: The portion of a tire that determined by distributing to each model name molding that is higher or comes into contact with the road. axle its share of the curb weight, deeper than the same moldings on accessory weight, and normal occu- the inner facing sidewall. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow pant weight and driving by 2. bands, sometimes called "wear Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire bars," that show across the tread of a Vehicle Placard: A label permanent- used on passenger cars and some tire when only 2/32 inch of tread ly attached to a vehicle showing the light duty trucks and multipurpose remains. original equipment tire size and rec- vehicles. ommended inflation pressure. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Recommended Inflation Pressure: Grading Standards, a tire information Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- system that provides consumers with All season tires ed tire inflation pressure and shown ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- on the tire placard. Kia specifies all season tires on ture and treadwear. Ratings are some models to provide good per- Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in determined by tire manufacturers formance for use all year round, which the ply cords that extend to the using government testing proce- including snowy and icy road condi- beads are laid at 90 degrees to the dures. The ratings are molded into tions. All season tires are identified centerline of the tread. the sidewall of the tire. by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud Rim: A metal support for a tire and Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num- and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow upon which the tire beads are seat- ber of designated seating positions tires have better snow traction than ed. multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the all season tires and may be more Sidewall: The portion of a tire rated cargo and luggage load. appropriate in some areas. between the tread and the bead.
6 44 Maintenance
Summer tires Snow tires Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped) Kia specifies summer tires on some If you equip your car with snow tires, Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect models to provide superior perform- they should be the same size and ratio is lower than 50, are provided ance on dry roads. Summer tire per- have the same load capacity as the for sporty looks. formance is substantially reduced in original tires. Snow tires should be Because the low aspect ratio tires snow and ice. Summer tires do not installed on all four wheels; other- are optimized for handling and brak- have the tire traction rating M+S wise, poor handling may result. ing, it may be more uncomfortable to (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 ride in and there is more noise com- if you plan to operate your vehicle in psi) more air pressure than the pres- pare with normal tires. snowy or icy conditions. Kia recom- sure recommended for the standard mends the use of snow tires or all tires on the tire label on the driver's season tires on all four wheels. side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 mph) when your car is equipped with snow tires.
645 Maintenance
CAUTION CAUTION Because the sidewall of the low • It is not easy to recognize the aspect ratio tire is shorter than tire damage with your own the normal, the wheel and tire of eyes. But if there is the slight- the low aspect ratio tire is easi- est hint of tire damage, even er to be damaged. So, follow the though you cannot see the tire instructions below. damage with your own eyes, - When driving on a rough road have the tire checked or or off road, drive cautiously replaced because the tire because tires and wheels may damage may cause air leak- be damaged. And after driving, age from the tire. inspect tires and wheels. • If the tire is damaged by driv- - When passing over a pothole, ing on a rough road, off road, speed bump, manhole, or curb pothole, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the stone, it will not be covered by tires and wheels are not dam- the warranty. aged. • You can find out the tire infor- - If the tire is impacted, we rec- mation on the tire sidewall. ommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized Kia dealer. - To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 3,000km.
6 46 Maintenance
LUBRICANT Recommended lubricants These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and vehicle. durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct Lubricant Classification lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy. Engine oil *¹ API Service SM*2, Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. (drain and refill) ILSAC GF-4 or above Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to over- MICHANG ATF SP-IV come engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to SK ATF SP-IV measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer Automatic transaxle fluid NOCA ATF SP-IV significant cost and energy savings. Kia genuine ATF SP-IV or other brands meeting the above specifica- tion approved by Kia motors corp. Power steering fluid PSF-III Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers. *2 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
647 Maintenance
Recommended SAE viscosity Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather oper- number ating (starting and oil flow). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel econ- omy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other CAUTION than those recommended could result in engine damage. Always be sure to clean the area When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operat- around any filler plug, drain plug, or ed in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from dipstick before checking or drain- the chart. ing any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug °C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 and dipstick areas will prevent dirt Temperature and grit from entering the engine (°F) -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 and other mechanisms that could 10W-30 Engine Oil *1 be damaged. 5W-20, (5W-30)
*1 For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosi- ty grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil vis- cosity chart.
6 48 Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE Exterior care Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, Exterior general caution industrial pollution and similar deposits WARNING - Wet brakes can damage your vehicle’s finish if not It is very important to follow the label After washing the vehicle, test the removed immediately. directions when using any chemical brakes while driving slowly to see if cleaner or polish. Read all warning and Even prompt washing with plain water they have been affected by water. If caution statements that appear on the may not completely remove all these braking performance is impaired, label. deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on dry the brakes by applying them painted surfaces, may be used. lightly while maintaining a slow for- After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- ward speed. Finish maintenance oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do Washing not allow soap to dry on the finish. To help protect your vehicle’s finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with CAUTION lukewarm or cold water. • Do not use strong soap, chemical If you use your vehicle for off-road driv- detergents or hot water, and do ing, you should wash it after each off- not wash the vehicle in direct road trip. Pay special attention to the sunlight or when the body of the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, vehicle is warm. mud, and other foreign materials. Make • Do not wash the side windows sure the drain holes in the lower edges of too close with high pressure the doors and rocker panels are kept water. Water may leak through the clear and clean. windows and wet the interior. • To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
649 Maintenance
Waxing Finish damage repair Wax the vehicle when water will no Deep scratches or stone chips in the longer bead on the paint. painted surface must be repaired Always wash and dry the vehicle before promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust waxing. Use a good quality liquid or and may develop into a major repair paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s expense. instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster. ✽ NOTICE Removing oil, tar, and similar materials If your vehicle is damaged and requires with a spot remover will usually strip the any metal repair or replacement, be sure wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax the body shop applies anti-corrosion these areas even if the rest of the vehicle materials to the parts repaired or OJB037800 does not yet need waxing. replaced. CAUTION CAUTION Bright-metal maintenance • Water washing in the engine com- • To remove road tar and insects, use a partment including high pressure • Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the tar remover, not a scraper or other water washing may cause the fail- sharp object. ure of electrical circuits located in finish. • Do not use steel wool, abrasive • To protect the surfaces of bright-metal the engine compartment. parts from corrosion, apply a coating of • Never allow water or other liquids cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or wax or chrome preservative and rub to to come in contact with electri- a high luster. cal/electronic components inside caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This • During winter weather or in coastal the vehicle as this may damage areas, cover the bright metal parts with them. may result in damage to the pro- tective coating and cause discol- a heavier coating of wax or preserva- oration or paint deterioration. tive. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.
6 50 Maintenance
Underbody maintenance Aluminum or chrome wheel mainte- Interior care Corrosive materials used for ice and nance Interior general precautions snow removal and dust control may col- The aluminum or chrome wheels are Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos- lect on the underbody. If these materials coated with a clear protective finish. metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and are not removed, accelerated rusting can • Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol- air freshener from contacting the interior occur on underbody parts such as the ishing compound, solvent, or wire parts because they may cause damage fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust brushes on aluminum or chrome or discoloration. If they do contact the system, even though they have been wheels. They may scratch or damage interior parts, wipe them off immediately. treated with rust protection. the finish. See the instructions for the proper way to Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody • Clean the wheel when it has cooled. clean vinyl. and wheel openings with lukewarm or • Use only a mild soap or neutral deter- cold water once a month at the end of gent, and rinse thoroughly with water. ✽ NOTICE each winter. Pay special attention to Also, be sure to clean the wheels after these areas because it is difficult to see Never allow water or other liquids to driving on salted roads. This helps pre- come in contact with electrical/ electron- all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm vent corrosion. than good to wet down the road grime ic components inside the vehicle as this • Avoid washing the wheels with high- may damage them. without removing it. The lower edges of speed car wash brushes. doors, rocker panels, and frame mem- bers have drain holes that should not be • Do not use any alkaline or acid deter- allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in gents. It may damage and corrode the CAUTION these areas can cause rusting. aluminum or chrome wheels coated When cleaning leather products with a clear protective finish. (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol WARNING content solutions. If you use high After washing the vehicle, test the alcohol content solutions or brakes while driving slowly to see if acid/alkaline detergents, the color they have been affected by water. If of the leather may fade or the sur- braking performance is impaired, face may get stripped off. dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow for- ward speed.
651 Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and interior Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web- trim bing Vinyl Clean the belt webbing with any mild Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl soap solution recommended for cleaning with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc- Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner. tions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because Fabric this may weaken it. Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Cleaning the interior window glass Clean with a mild soap solution recom- If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi- mended for upholstery or carpets. cle become fogged (that is, covered with Remove fresh spots immediately with a an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the receive immediate attention, the fabric directions on the glass cleaner container. can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not CAUTION properly maintained. Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result CAUTION in damage to the rear window defroster grid. Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire- resistant properties.
6 52 Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM The emission control system of your Engine exhaust gas precautions • Do not operate the engine in confined vehicle is covered by a written limited (carbon monoxide) or closed areas (such as garages) any warranty. Please see the warranty infor- • Carbon monoxide can be present with more than what is necessary to move mation contained in the Warranty & other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you the vehicle in or out of the area. Consumer Information Manual in your smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside • When the vehicle is stopped in an vehicle. your vehicle, have it inspected and open area for more than a short time repaired immediately. If you ever sus- with the engine running, adjust the Vehicle modifications pect exhaust fumes are coming into ventilation system (as needed) to draw • This vehicle should not be modified. your vehicle, drive it only with all the outside air into the vehicle. Modification of your Kia could affect its windows fully open. Have your vehicle • Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi- performance, safety or durability and checked and repaired immediately. cle for any extended time with the may even violate governmental safety engine running. and emissions regulations. • When the engine stalls or fails to start, In addition, damage or performance WARNING - Exhaust excessive attempts to re-start the problems resulting from any modifica- Engine exhaust gases contain car- engine may cause damage to the tion may not be covered under warran- bon monoxide (CO). Though color- emission control system. ty. less and odorless, it is dangerous • If you use unauthorized electronic and could be lethal if inhaled. devices, it may cause the vehicle to Follow the instructions following to operate abnormally, wire damage, bat- avoid CO poisoning. tery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.
653 Maintenance
Operating precautions for catalyt- Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic ic converters (if equipped) converter emission control device. Therefore, the following precautions must be observed: WARNING - Fire • Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso- • A hot exhaust system can ignite line engine. flammable items under your vehi- • Do not operate the vehicle when there cle. Do not park, idle or drive the are signs of engine malfunction, such vehicle over or near flammable as misfire or a noticeable loss of per- objects, such as grass, vegeta- formance. tion, paper, leaves, etc. • Do not misuse or abuse the engine. • The exhaust system and catalytic Examples of misuse are coasting with system are very hot while the the ignition off and descending steep engine is running or immediately grades in gear with the ignition off. after the engine is turned off. Keep • Do not operate the engine at high idle away from the exhaust system and speed for extended periods (5 minutes catalytic, you may get burned. or more). Also, do not remove the heat sink • Do not modify or tamper with any part around the exhaust system, do of the engine or emission control sys- not seal the bottom of the vehicle tem. All inspections and adjustments or do not coat the vehicle for cor- must be made by an authorized Kia rosion control. It may present a dealer. fire risk under certain conditions. • Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If you run out of gasoline, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter. Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.
654 Dimensions / 7-2 Bulb wattage / 7-2 Tires / 7-3 Capacities / 7-4
Specifications 7 Specifications
DIMENSIONS BULB WATTAGE
Item mm (in) Light Bulb Wattage Overall length 5130 (202.0) Headlights (Low) 55 Overall width 1985 (78.1)*1 / 1940 (76.4) Headlights (High) 55 Overall height 1805 (71.1)*2 / 1760 (69.3) Front turn signal/Position lights 28/8 (Amber) Side mark lights 5 Front tread 1685 (66.3) Side repeater lights LED*1 Rear tread 1685 (66.3) Front fog lights 35 Wheelbase 3020 (118.9) Stop and tail lights 27/8 *1 With door handle *2 With roof rack Rear turn signal lights 27 (Amber) Back-up lights 16 High mounted stop light LED*1 License plate lights 5 Front map lamps 10 Center dome lamps 10 Tailgate lamp 10 Door courtesy lamps 5 Glove box lamp 5 Vanity mirror lamps 3
*1 LED : Light-emitting diode
27 Specifications
TIRES Inflation pressure Tire Wheel lug nut torque kg•m Item Wheel size kPa (psi) size (N•m, lb•ft) Front Rear 225/70R16 6.5J×16 240 240 Full size tire 235/60R17 6.5J×17 (35) (35) 9~11 Compact 420 420 (88~107, 65~79) T135/90R17 4.0T×17 spare tire (60) (60)
73 Specifications
CAPACITIES Lubricant Volume Classification Engine oil *1 (drain and refill) 5.7 l (6.02 US qt.) API Service SM*2, ILSAC GF-4 or above Recommended (or equivalent)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV Automatic transaxle fluid 7.8 l (8.24 US qt.) NOCA ATF SP-IV, Kia genuine ATF SP-IV or other brands meeting the above specification approved by Kia motors corp. Power steering 1.0 l (1.06 US qt.) PSF-III Coolant 8.6 l (9.09 US qt.) Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator 0.7~0.8 l Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4 (0.7~0.8 US qt.) Fuel 75 l (19.8 US gal.) -
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the page 6-48. *2 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
47 Index I Index
A Automatic transaxle ··························································4-5 Shift lock system·························································4-9 Air bags···········································································3-83 Sports mode·································································4-8 Air bag collision sensors ...... 3-96 Aux, USB and iPod port···············································3-195 Air bag warning label...... 3-105 Air bag warning light ...... 3-103 B Curtain air bag ...... 3-95 Driver's air bag ...... 3-93 Battery·············································································6-32 Front passenger’s air bag ...... 3-94 Battery saver function···················································3-137 Side air bag...... 3-94 Before driving ···································································4-2 Air cleaner·······································································6-16 Bottle holders, see cup holders·····································3-190 Alarm system ····································································3-7 Brake system···································································4-14 Antenna·········································································3-195 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)··································4-17 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)········································4-17 Parking brake·····························································4-15 Appearance care······························································6-49 Power brakes ·····························································4-14 Exterior care······························································6-49 Brakes ·············································································6-17 Interior care ·······························································6-51 Bulb wattage ·····································································7-2 Armrest··································································3-44, 3-47 Ashtray··········································································3-189 C Audio remote control····················································3-196 Audio system ································································3-197 Capacities (Lubricants) ·····················································7-4 Automatic climate control system ································3-159 Central door lock switch·················································3-13 Air conditioning ······················································3-166 Changing tires·································································5-11 Instrument panel vents ············································3-166 Chains Outlet port locations················································3-164 Safety chains ·····························································4-32 Rear climate control ················································3-167 Checking tire inflation pressure······································6-36 Child restraint system ·····················································3-76 Tether anchor system·················································3-78
I 2 Index
Child-protector rear door lock ·······································3-15 Digital clock ·································································3-193 Cigarette lighter ····························································3-189 Dimensions ······································································7-2 Climate control air filter ················································6-20 Displays, see instrument cluster ··································3-116 Climate control system (Automatic) ···························3-159 Display illumination, see instrument Air conditioning ·····················································3-166 panel illumination ·····················································3-120 Climate control system (Manual) ································3-147 Door locks·······································································3-11 Air conditioning ·····················································3-152 Central door lock switch ··········································3-13 Clock (Digital) ·····························································3-193 Child-protector rear door lock ·································3-15 Clothes hanger ······························································3-191 Drinks holders, see cup holders ···································3-190 Cluster ionizer·······························································3-176 Driver position memory system ·····································3-59 Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ·············3-116 Driver's air bag ·······························································3-93 Compact spare tire replacement ····································6-38 Driving at night ······························································4-28 Compass mirror, see the Electric chromic Driving in flooded areas ················································4-28 mirror (ECM) ····························································3-110 Driving in the rain ··························································4-28 Coolant ···········································································6-14 Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ··································6-14 E Cruise control system ····················································4-11 Cup holder ···································································3-190 Economical operation ····················································4-26 Curtain air bag ·······························································3-95 Electronic stability control (ESC)···································4-19 Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ···································3-110 D Emergency starting ··························································5-4 Jump starting ······························································5-4 Dashboard, see instrument cluster ·······························3-116 Push starting ·······························································5-6 Dashboard illumination, see instrument Emergency towing ·························································5-17 panel illumination ·····················································3-120 Emergency while driving ·················································5-2 Defogging (Windshield) ··············································3-173 Emission control system ················································6-53 Defogging logic (Windshield) ·····································3-175 Engine compartment ······················································6-12 Defroster ······································································3-145 Engine coolant ·······························································6-14 Defrosting (Windshield) ··············································3-173 I 3 Index
Engine oil ·······································································6-13 G Engine overheats ······························································5-7 Engine temperature gauge ···········································3-119 Gauges···········································································3-117 Exterior care ···································································6-49 EcominderTM indicator ·········································3-118 Engine temperature gauge ······································3-119 F Fuel gauge ······························································3-119 Instrument panel illumination ································3-120 Flat tire ·············································································5-8 Odometer ································································3-117 Changing tires ··························································5-11 Speedometer ···························································3-117 Compact spare tire ···················································5-10 Tachometer ·····························································3-118 Jack and tools ·····························································5-8 Trip odometer··························································3-118 Jacking instructions ··················································5-11 Glove box ·····································································3-187 Removing the spare tire ·············································5-8 Storing the spare tire ··················································5-9 Floor mat anchor(s) ·····················································3-194 H Fluid Hazard warning flasher ················································3-146 Brakes fluid ······························································6-17 Hazardous driving conditions ········································4-27 Washer fluid ·····························································6-18 Headrest ································································3-42, 3-48 Folding the rear seat back···············································3-50 Homelink® wireless control system ······························3-178 Front seat adjustment - manual ······································3-39 Homelink® wireless control system with rearview Front seat adjustment - power ·······································3-40 display········································································3-182 Front passenger’s air bag ················································3-94 Hood ···············································································3-29 Fuel filler lid ··································································3-30 Horn ·············································································3-145 Fuel gauge ····································································3-119 How to use this manual ···················································1-2 Fuel requirements ····························································1-2 Fuses ··············································································6-23 Fuse/relay panel description ····································6-26 Main fuse ··································································6-26
I 4 Index
I J
Ignition switch ·································································4-3 Jack and tools ···································································5-8 Immobilizer system ·························································3-9 Jump starting ····································································5-4 Indicators and warnings ···············································3-127 Instrument cluster ························································3-116 K Instrument panel illumination ······································3-120 Instrument panel overview ···············································2-3 Key positions ···································································4-3 Interior care ····································································6-51 Keys ·················································································3-3 Interior features ····························································3-189 Ashtray ···································································3-189 L Cigarette lighter ······················································3-189 Clothes hanger·························································3-191 Label Cup holder ······························································3-190 Air bag warning label ·············································3-105 Digital clock ···························································3-193 Engine number ·························································4-38 Floor mat anchr(s) ··················································3-194 Tire specification / pressure label ····························4-38 Power outlet ···························································3-193 Vehicle certification label ·········································4-37 Shopping bag holder ···············································3-191 Vehicle identification number ··································4-37 Sunvisor ··································································3-192 Label information ··························································4-37 Interior lights ·······························································3-133 Lighting ········································································3-137 Dome light ······························································3-134 Battery saver function ············································3-137 Door courtesy lamp ················································3-136 Daytime running light ············································3-140 Glove box lamp ······················································3-136 Front fog light ·························································3-140 Map light ································································3-133 High - beam operation ············································3-138 Tailgate light ·························································3-135 Lighting control·······················································3-137 Interior overview ······························································2-2 Rescue mode function·············································3-137
I 5 Index
Lubricant·········································································6-47 Inside rearview mirror ············································3-110 Recommended lubricants········································· 6-47 Outside rearview mirror ·········································3-108 Recommended SAE viscosity number ···················· 6-48 Lubricants and fluids ······················································6-18 N Luggage net holder ······················································3-176 Luggage rack, see roof rack ·········································3-177 Neck restraints, see headrest ································3-42, 3-48 Lumbar support ······························································3-46 O M Odometer ·····································································3-117 Main fuse ·······································································6-26 Oil (Engine) ···································································6-13 Maintenance Outside rearview mirror ···············································3-108 Maintenance schedule ·················································6-3 Overheats ·········································································5-7 Maintenance services ················································· 6-2 Overloading·····································································4-36 Owner maintenance ··················································6-10 Owner maintenance ·······················································6-10 Tire maintenance ······················································6-39 Maintenance schedule·······················································6-3 P Maintenance services ·······················································6-2 Manual climate control system ····································3-147 Parking brake ·································································4-15 Air conditioning ·····················································3-152 Passenger's front air bag ················································3-94 Instrument panel······················································3-151 Power adjustable pedals··················································3-61 Outlet port locations················································3-149 Power brakes ··································································4-14 Rear climate control ···············································3-153 Power outlet ·································································3-193 Mirrors ·········································································3-108 Power sliding door and power tailgate ···························3-17 Compass ······················································3-113, 3-121 Power steering ····················································3-106, 6-19 Conversation mirror ················································3-115 Power steering fluid level ···············································6-19 Day/night rearview mirror ·····································3-110 Power window lock switch ············································3-28 Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ·····························3-110 Pre-tensioner safety belt ················································3-72
I 6 Index
R Front seat adjustment - manual ································3-39 Front seat adjustment - power ··································3-40 Rear seat adjustment ·······················································3-46 Lumbar support ························································3-46 Rear seat entertainment system ····································3-231 Rear seat adjustment ·················································3-46 Rear parking assist system ·············································4-22 Seatback pocket ························································3-44 Rearview camera ····························································4-25 Seat warmer ······························································3-45 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ··················6-34 Shift lock system ·····························································4-9 Recommended lubricants ···············································6-47 Shopping bag holder ·····················································3-191 Recommended SAE viscosity number ··························6-48 Side air bag ····································································3-94 Remote keyless entry ·······················································3-4 Sirius satellite radio information ·································3-215 Road warning ···································································5-2 Snow tires ······································································4-30 Rocking the vehicle ·······················································4-27 Spare tire Roof antena···································································3-195 Compact spare tire replacement ·······························6-38 Roof rack ·····································································3-177 Removing the spare tire ·············································5-8 Storing the spare tire ··················································5-9 Special driving conditions ·············································4-27 S Driving at night ························································4-28 Safety belts ·····································································3-62 Driving in flooded areas ···········································4-28 Pre-tensioner safety belt ···········································3-72 Driving in the rain ····················································4-28 Lap/shoulder belt ······················································3-65 Hazardous driving conditions ··································4-27 Safety belt warning light and chime·······························3-64 Rocking the vehicle ··················································4-27 Scheduled maintenance service Speedometer ·································································3-117 Maintenance schedule ·················································6-3 Sports mode ·····································································4-8 Seat warmer ···································································3-45 Starting the engine ···························································4-4 Seatback pocket ·····························································3-44 Steering wheel ·····························································3-106 Seat ·················································································3-37 Power steering ························································3-106 Armrest ···························································3-44, 3-47 Tilt steering ····························································3-107 Headrest ··························································3-42, 3-48 Storage compartment ···················································3-186 Folding the rear seatback ··········································3-50 Glove box ·······························································3-187 I 7 Index
Side table·································································3-188 Trailer towing ·································································4-30 Sunglass holder ······················································3-187 Safety chains ····························································4-31 Sunroof············································································3-33 Transaxle Sunvisor ·······································································3-192 Automatic transaxle ···················································4-5 Trip computer ······························································3-121 T V Tachometer ···································································3-118 Tailgate ···········································································3-15 Vehicle break-in process ··················································1-3 Tether anchor system ·····················································3-78 Vehicle certification label ··············································4-37 Theft-alarm system ··························································3-7 Vehicle identification number (VIN) ·····························4-37 Tilt steering ··································································3-107 Tire specification / pressure label ··································4-38 W Tires ··················································································7-3 Tires and wheels ····························································6-34 Washer fluid level ···························································6-18 Checking tire inflation pressure ·······························6-36 Waste tray, see ashtray ·················································3-189 Compact spare tire replacement ·······························6-38 Warnings and indicators ··············································3-127 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ·············6-34 Wheel alignment and tire balance ·································6-38 Tire care ···································································6-34 Wheel replacement ························································6-38 Tire maintenance ······················································6-39 Windows ········································································3-26 Tire replacement ·······················································6-37 Power window lock switch ······································3-28 Tire rotation ······························································6-36 Windshield defrosting and defogging ··························3-173 Tire sidewall labeling ···············································6-39 Defogging logic ······················································3-175 Tire traction ······························································6-39 Winter driving ································································4-30 Wheel alignment and tire balance ····························6-38 Snow tires ·································································4-30 Wheel replacement ···················································6-38 Wiper blades ··································································6-21 Towing ···········································································5-17 Wipers and washers ·····················································3-141 Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing) ·························5-20
I 8